DETAILS OF SUBJECTS - University of Melbourne

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS

FOB

P U B L I C

AND

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS

A S PRESCRIBED BT THE PROFESSORIAL BOAKU ON THB

RECOMMENDATION OF THE SEVERAL FACULTIES AND BOARDS,

ON 18TH MAT, 1914.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS FOE THE JUNIOE PUBLIC EXAMINATION, DECEMBER, 1915, AND FEBEUAEY, 1916.

N.B.— Handwriting, spelling, and general intellfgence will be taken into account throughout the Examination.

1. ENGLISH— (o) An Essay, with out I ins of the same, or correspond

ence. (A) Leading rules of Syntax. (<-) Analysis of sentences into clauses, stating the

grammatical function and connection of each clause.

(>/) A literary selection not earlier in date than Shakespeare, viz.: poetry about 1000 lines, and prose not exceeding in amount 15 numbers of the " Spectator."

(c) From 250 to 300 lines to be learnt by heart. ( / ) One question will be set involving a general know

ledge of a prescribed play of Shakespeare. Books prescribed—

(</) A Victorian Anthology. Edited by M. P. Hansen Part I.

(r) To be learnt by heart:— Tennyson—Three Songs and I i-ossing the Bat Browning—Prospice. Kipling—Flag of England. Henley—England. Newbolt—Clifton Chapel. Cutbbertson—Sunrise.

( / ) Shakespeare—Julius Caesar.

2. OEEEK—

(a) Translation of short easy sentences from English into Greek prose as a test of grammatical know ledge. Translation of an easy passage of Greek not prescribed for the examination. Such a knowledge of the Accidence and the leading rules of Syntax as the preceding sections involve.

•2«

372 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

(A) One of the easier books of Greek prose or portions of such books in the Attic dialect, in length about that of the first book of Xenophon's Anabasis, together with some selection of easier Greek verse.

Candidates will be required to pass in both («) and (A). Special books:—

Luuian, Vera Historia, I., II., omitting 1., §§ 1-3, 9-26; II. , §§ 34-40 (Yates).

Aristophanes, Frogs (Sidgwick).

3. LATIN—

(a) Trauslatiou into English of easy passages of Latin from books not prescribed for the examination. Translation into Latin prose of easy passages of English. Accidence and the leading rules of Syntax.

(A) One book of Vergil's iEueid and one book of Ciesar, or their equivalent.

Candidates will be required to pass in both (n) and (A). Special Books:—

lulium Sidus (edited by W. Kerry ; Geo. Robertson and Co.), omitting Extract II., The Battle with the Nervii.

' Kecomiiiended for grammar aud vocabulary (but this book iu in no way prescribed):—

Tucker—Decursus Primus. Recommended for the use of teachers—

Caesar's Gallic War (edited by T. Rice Holmes, Ox-ford). The same editor's Caesar's Conquest of Gaul (Part I. of the larger work published separately) is suitable for school libraries.

4. FRENCH—

Translation into English of easy passages of French. Accidence and the leading rules of Syntax. A short original composition in French on a subject

set. The writing of an easy passage of French from

dictation. ' N.B.—Not more than 10 per cent, of the total minks will

be assigned to dictation.

JUNIOR PUBLIC. 373

The standard of work required is about that of the following books, viz.: in Grammar, Composition and Translation, as in Kirkman's Premiere et deuxieme annees de froncais (but this book is in no way prescribed as a textbook).

5. GERMAN—

Translation into English of easy passages of German. Accidence and the leading rules of Syntax. Translation into German prose of an easy passage

of English, or, as an alternative,

All original composition in German on a set subject.

The standard of work required is about that of the following books; viz., Siepmann's Public School German Primer, and Longman's German Composition, Part I. (but these,books'are in no way prescribed as text-books).

<5. 'ARITHMETIC— The elementary processes, including fractions, non

recurring decimals and approximations, proportion, simple interest, square root, rectangular areas aud volumes, the metric system, graphic arithmetic, stocks and shares, rates and taxes, insurances, profit and loss, percentages, partnerships, compound interest, discount, exchanges, mensuration of plane rectilineal figures and the circle.

7. "ALGEBRA— Tbe elements of Algebra including factors, fractions,

H.C.F., L.C.M., quadratic equations, simultaneous equations of two unknowns, both simple or one quadratic and one simple. Easy examples in surds and indices. The three progressions. Problems. Graphic solution of the above-mentioned equations.

* The papers in Mathematics will be set in general accordance with the recommendations contained In •'Teaching of Elementary Mathematics; report of the Committee appointed by the Mathematical Association," published by O. Rell and Sons.

.24A

374 ' DKTXILS OF SUBJECT'S.

8. ^GEOMETRY—Practical and Theoretical—

SCHEDDLE A. Bisection of angles and of straight lines. Construction of perpendiculars to straight lines. Construction of an angle equal to a given angle. Construction of parallels to a given straight line. Simple cases of the construction from sufficient data of

triangles and quadrilaterals. Division of straight lines into a given number of equal

parts or into parts in any given proportions. Construction of a triangle and a square equal in area

to a given polygon. Division of a straight line in medial section. Construction of tangents to a circle and of a common

tangent to two circles. Simple cases of the construction of circles from suffi

cient data. Construction of regular figures of 3, 4, 6 or 8 sides in.

or about a given circle.

SCHEDULE B. Angles at a Point.

If a straight line stands on another straight line, the sum of the two angles so formed is equal to two-right angles; and the converse.

If two straight lines intersect, the vertically opposite-angles are equal.

Parallel Straight Lines, When a straight line cuts two other straight lines, if

(i) a pair of alternate angles are equal, or (ii) a pair of corresponding angles are equal,

or (iii) a pair of interior angles on the same side of the cutt ing line are together equal to two right angles,

then the two straight lines are parallel; and the converse.

Straight lines which are parallel to the same straight line are parallel to one another.

* The papers In Mathematics will be set In general oocordance with the reoonunendations contained in " Teaching; ol Elementary Mathematics ; report ot the Committee appointed hy the Mathematical Association," published by O. Bell and Sons.

JUNIOR PUBLIC. 376

Triangles and Rectilinear Figures.

The sum of the angles of a triangle is equal to two right angles.

If the sides of a convex polygon are produced in order, the sum of the angles so formed is equal to four right angles.

If two triangles have two sides of the one equal to two sides of the other, each to each, and also the angles contained by those sides equal, the triangles are congruent.

If two triangles have two angles of the one equal to two angles of the other, each to each, and also one side of the one equal to the corresponding side of the other, the triangles are congruent.

If two sides of a triangle are equal, the angles opposite to these sides are equal; and the converse.

If two triangles have the three sides of the one equal to the three sides of the other, each to each, the triangles are congruent.

If two right-angled triangles have their hypotenuses equal, and one side of the one equal to one side of the other, the triangles are congruent.

If two sides of a triangle are unequal,.the greater side has the greater angle opposite to i t ; and the converse.

Of all the straight lines that can be drawn to a given straight line from a given point outside it, the perpendicular is the shortest.

The opposite sides and angles of a parallelogram are equal, each diagonal bisects the parallelogram, and the diagonals bisect one another.

If there ore three or more parallel straight lines, and the intercepts made by them on any straight line tha t cuts them are equal, then the corresponding intercepts on any other straight line that cuts them are also equal.

Areas. Parallelograms ou the same or equal bases and of

the same altitude are equal in area. Triangles on the same or equal bases and of the same

altitude are equal in area.


Equal triangles on the same or equal bases are of the same attitude.

Illustrations and explanations of the geometrical theorems corresponding to the following algebraical identities:—

k(n + b + c + ...) = ta + tb + t c+ .... (n + b ) ' = a i + 2 a b + b*, \ a - b ) ' i = a * - 2 a b + b ' ,

a- - b ' = (a + b) ( a - b ) .

The square on a side of a triangle is greater than, equal to, or less than the sum of tbe squares on the other two sides, according as the angle contained by those sides is obtuse, right, or acute. The difference in the cases of inequality is twice the rectangle contained by one of the two sides and the projection on it of the other.

Loci.

The locus of a point which is equidistant from two fixed points is the perpendicular bisector of the straight line joining the two fixed points.

The locus of a point which is equidistant from two intersecting straight lines consists of the pair of straight lines which bisect the angles between the two given lines.

The Circle.

A straight line, drawn from the centre of a circle to bisect a chord which is not a diameter, is at right angles to the chord; conversely, the perpendicular to a chord from the centre bisects the chord.

There is one circle, and one only, which passes through three given points not in a straight line.

In equal circles (or, in the same circle) (i.) if two arcs subtend equal angles a t the centres, they are equal; (ii.) conversely, if two arcs are equal, they subtend equal angles at the centres.

In equal circles (or, in the same circle) (i.) if two chords are equal, they cut off equal arcs; (ii.) conversely, if two arcs are equal, the chords of the arcs are equal.

JUNIOR PUBLIC. 377

Equal chords of a circle are equidistant from the centre; and the converse.

The tangent a t auy point of a circle and the radius through the point are perpendicular to one another.

If two circles touch, the point of contact lies on the straight line through the centres.

The angle which an arc of a circle subtends a t the centre is double that which it subtends a t any point on the remaining part of the circumference.

Angles in the same segment of a circle are equal; and, if the line joining two points subtends equal angles at two other points on the same side of it, the four points lie on a circle.

The angle in a semicircle is a right angle; the angle in a segment greater than a semicircle is less than a right angle; and the angle in a segment less than a semicircle is greater than a right angle.

Tbe opposite angles of any quadrilateral inscribed in a circle are supplementary; and the converse.

If a straight line touch a circle, and from the point of contact a chord be drawn, the angles which this chord makes with the tangent are equal to the angles in the alternate segments.

If two chords of a circle intersect either inside or outside the circle, the rectangle contained by the parts of the one is equal to the rectangle contained by the parts of the other.

9. •TRIGONOMETRY— A simple treatment of the following:—Angular mea

surements -, addition formulae; relations between the sides and angles of a t r iangle; the use of logarithmic tables; solution of triangles. Simple examples in heights and dis-tances.

•The papers in Mathematics will be set in general accordance with the recommendations contained in " Teaching of Elementary Mathematics ; report of the Committee appointed by the Mathematical Association," published liv Cl. Bell $ Sons.


10. HISTORY—

1. British.

(a) From the earliest times to 1485.

(A) From 1485 to 1714. (r) From 1714 to 1846, together with outlines of

the exploration of Australia up to and including 1800.

2. Roman.

(</) From the establishment of the Republic to the death of Augustus.

3. Grecian.,

(e) From the earliest times to the death of Alexander.

Candidates will be required to pass in two of tbe divisions marked a, b, r, d, e, together with the illustrative Geography.

Candidates for the Junior Commercial Examination are recommended to pass in two of the divisions marked a. A, c, together with the illustrative Geography.

Seven questions, of which Candidates must attempt not more than five, will be set in each Section.

11. GEOGRAPHY—

Astronomical— Observation of the meridian altitude of the sun a t least

once a mouth throughout the school year; similar observations of the places and times at which the sun rises and sets; connection between these apparent movements and the real movements of the earth.

Movements of the ear th; rotation on its axis; proofs of rotation.

Effects of rotation—Apparent movement of the sun and s tars ; shifting of positions of high tides, etc.

Revolution round sun.—Proof, varying meridian altitudes of sun, cycle complete in one year.

JUNIOR PUBLIC. 379

Effects.—Change of seasons, etc. Determination of latitude by (1) Altitude of circum-

polar stars, (2) Sun's altitude a t equinoxes. Determination of Longitude by simple methods such as

comparison of Greenwich time and local time, by using chronometer registering Greenwich time, or by telegraph signal and recognition of local time by determination of mid-day.

Physical—

Definition of the principal descriptive geographical terms. Distribution of land and water, the shapes of continents, the use of terrestrial globes for showing real proportional dimensions of earth's surface.

Atmospheric temperatures.—Effect on temperature of the change of angle a t which the sun's rays fall. General distribution . of temperature on the earth's surface as indicated by isothermal lines on maps. Tbe recognition of the limits of the Tropical, Temperate, Arctic and Antarctic Zones. Influence of altitude above earth's surface on temperature.

Atmospheric pressure.—Variations due to changes in humidity and temperature. Causes of such Changes, Isobars, Cyclones, Anticyclones, barometric gradient. General arrangement of planetary circulation of atmosphere aud its causes, aerial currents, trade winds, antitrades, land and sea breezes, monsoons, calms. Buys Ballot's Law of the Winds. The climate of Victoria.

Oceanology. — Meaning of the term, " Continental Shelf." The principal ocean currents - and their distribution. ' Influence of convection and of wind currents respectively, in producing ocean currents.

The earth's surface.—Work done by water in altering the configuration of the earth's surface. The work of rivers and the recognition of different parts of a river's course. The mountain tract, the valley tract, the plain tract, and the nature of the river's work in each part of its course.

380 DETAILS OK SUBJECTS.

Nature and classification of the principal land forms. Plains—Marine—Coastal—Marine denudation.

Freshwater—Alluvial flats. Subaerial—Peneplains.

Deserts—Nature and origin. Plateaux—Young.

Dissected. Basins and Lakes. Mountain types—1. Volcanoes.

2. Residual. 3. Alpine type. 4. Highlands.

The build of each continent showing the arrangement of the chief mountain systems, river systems, plateaux, basins, and lakes.

An elementary knowledge of the causes which operate in producing the above geographical features, especially as illustrated by the physical geography of Victoria.

In both the Astronomical and Physical sections teachers should use observational methods as far as possible. Questions will be set involving a practical knowledge of such experimental demonstrations.

Political and Commercial— Knowledge in moderate detail of the physical, political,

and commercial geography (including economic products) of the British Empire, and of the following :—European countries (excluding colonies and dependencies), Argentina, China, Japan, United States (only the towns of great interest in history or industry will be required).

The relative areas of all these compared with Victoria or Australia.

The chief trade and cable routes to and from Australia.

Mapping—

Mapping from memory of tbe Continent of Enrope, of Australia, or of any of the Australian States. Rough outline map of the World (on which tbe chief Pacific Island groups should be shown), Asia, North America, United Kingdom and the three main divisions thereof, New Zealand.

JUNIOK PUBLIC. 3 8 1

N.B.—Explanation should be given by the teacher of t he exaggeration of the polar areas in maps drawn by Mercator's projection. Candidates will be expected to be familiar with the interpretation of simple topographic maps, the meaning of contours and hachures, and may be expected to construct a section across a given simple contoured map and to explain the geography of the area. Teachers will get an indication of the scope of the work required by reference to books such as " Physical Geography for Schools," E. Bernard Smith, pp. 08-73, and alsc-" T h e Practical Geography," by E. J. F . Uustead, Part I., 1st chapter.

Books for reference:— The Geography ot Victoria.—J. W. Gregory. Physical Geography for Schools—Bernard Smith. Junior Geography—A. J. Herbertson. Physical Geography—Tarr. Victorian Hill and Dale—T. S. Hall. Australia, Physiographic and Economic—Griffith

Taylor.

12. PHYSICS—

Candidates for the Junior Public and Junior Commercial Examinations will be examined in Sections A and B of t he following syllabus, those for Senior Public and Senior Commercial Pass in a fuller treatment of Sections A and B, together with C. Candidates for Senior Public and Senior Commercial Honours must take the paper for Senior Public and Senior Commercial Pass, together with a further paper on Sections B, C and D.

Section A. ( a ) Measurement of length and time. Position and

displacement. Composition of displacements. Velocity. Specification of velocity. Composition of two velocities. Simple illustrations.

Acceleration. Specification of acceleration. Composition of two accelerations. Laws of uniformly accelerated motion and the formula; embodying them. Acceleration due t o gravity. Atwood's machine.

3 8 2 DETAILS OP SUBJECTS.

Mass Or quantity of matter. Measurement of mass. Principle of tne conservation of mass. Density, its direct measurement. Specific gravity.

Newton's Laws of Motion. Momentum. Force. Impulse. Gravitational units of Force. Absolute units of Force.

Specification of a force. Composition of two forces, whether along intersecting or parallel lines. Resolution of a force. Experimental methods of verifying the laws of the composition and resolution of forces.

Moment of a force. Principle of moments. Couples. Equilibrium of a body capable of turning on a fixed axis.

Equilibrium of coplanar forces. Centre of parallel forces. Centre of gravity and its position in simple .

cases. Equilibrium of a body resting on a smooth

plane, horizontal or inclined. Stable, unstable and neutral equilibrium.

Work. Measurement of work. Gravitational units of work (foot pound, gramme centimetre). Absolute units of work (foot-poundal, erg).

Definition of energy. Distinction between potential and kinetic energy. Different forms of each. Simple illustrations.

Measurement of energy. Units of energy. Principles of the conservation and transforma

tion of energy. Simple illustrations' of these principles.

Definition of power. Unit of power. Horsepower.

Definition of a machine. The simple machines Construction, theory, and mode of use.

The simple pendulum. Determination of the numerical value of the . acceleration of gravity.

Centrifugal force. Simple illustrations.

JUNIOR PUBLIC. 3 8 3

Friction. Laws of Friction. Limiting Friction. Co-efficient of Friction. Experimental Determinations. General effect on action of simple machines.

The essential and general properties of matter. Law of Gravitation. Constant of Gravitation.

Elasticity. Laws of the resistance of elastic bodies to elongation, compression, bending, and torsion. Experimental verification of above laws.

Different states of matter. Force acting across an area. Pull and Thrust-

Tension and Pressure. Transmission of pressure through a fluid.

Measurement of pressure a t any point of a fluid. Bramah press.

The pressure of the atmosphere. Torricelli 's experiment. Mercurial and aneroid barometers. Liquid manometer.

Surface of a liquid acted on by gravity. Pressure a t any point of a liquid acted on by gravity. Equilibrium of a floating body.

Determination of the specific gravity of insoluble solids and of liquids by the balance and the specific gravity bottle. Hydrometers.

Compressibility of gases. Boyle's law. Experimental verification of Boyle's law. Air and water pumps. Siphon. Diving Bell.

Section U.

(b) The general effects of heat. Heat and temperature.

Thermometry. Construction ot the mercuriat thermometer. Centigrade and Fahrenheit scales. Reduction from one to the other. Metallic thermometers. Maximum and minimum thermometers.

Expansion of sdlids. Linear and cubical expansion. Co-efficients of expansion and the i r measurement. Force of expansion. Practical Applications.

3 8 4 DETAILS OK SUBJECTS.

Expansion of liquids. Apparent and real expansion. Coefficients of apparent and real expansion and their measurement. Variation of density of liquids with temperature. Maximum density of water.

Expansion of gases. Air thermometer. Absolute temperature.

Heat as a quantity. Unit of heat. Specific heat. Calorimetry.

Heat a form of energy. The mechanical equivalent of heat.

Fusion. Laws of fusion. Latent heat of usion. Measurement of latent heat of water.

Freezing mixtures. Kvaporation. Laws of evaporation. Dalton's

Law of Partial Pressures. Latent heat of evaporation. Cold produced by evaporation. Leslie's experiment. Cryophorus. Carre's freezing machine.

Ebullition. Definition and laws of ebullition. Measurement of the latent heat of steam. Effect of pressure on the boiling point. Determination of heights by the boiling point.

Hygrometry. Water vapour in the atmosphere. Humidity. Relative humidity. Hygro-scopes. Dew point. Daniell's hygrometer. Wet and dry bulb thermometers.

Convection of heat. Simple experiments illustrative of convection. Heating of houses by hot water pipes. Ventilation. Winds.

Conduction of heat. Simple experiments illustrative of conduction. Comparison of conducting powers of different solids. Safety lamp.

Radiation of heat. Leslie's differential thermometer. Simple experiments illustrating reflection, emission, absorption, and diathermancy. Comparison of emissive and absorptive powers.

JUN10K PUBLIC. 385

Section C.

,'o) General Properties, of Magnets. Position of equilibrium of a suspended magnet. Poles. Magnetic axis. Laws of mutual action of

• poles. Experimental verification. Lines of force.

Magnetic Induction. Effects on hard steel and on soft iron. Retentiveness. Explanation of the attraction of a magnet for magnetic metals.

Permanent Magnets. Methods of magnetisation. Determination of the distribution of magnetism in magnets by means of spring balance. Effects' of subdividing magnets. Molecular nature of magnetism. Effect of heat on a magnet.' Kffect of a keeper. Astatic needles.

Terrestrial Magnetism. Magnetic meridian. Declination, Inclination. Dip Circle. Mariner's Compass. Changes in declination and dip from place to place on the earth's surface.

Electrification by friction. Attraction and repulsion. Two kinds ot electrification. Their mutual relations.

Conductors and Non-conductors. Insulation. Electroscopes. Light rod on watch glass

Pith-ball electroscope. Gold-leaf electroscope.

Induction. Simple experiments il lustrating induction. Free and bound charge. Explanation of attraction.

Faraday's ice-pail experiments. The electro-phorus.

Potential. Difference of Potential. Quantity of Electricity. Definition of unit

quantity. Statement and explanation of the laws of electric action. Experimental verification.

Capacity of a conductor.

386 DETAILS OP SUaiKCTS.

Distribution of Electricity on Conductors. Experiments to show that on a charged conductor the electricity resides on the outside surface. Electric density. Surface density, on differently shaped conductors (simple cases). Action of points. •

Frictional Electric Machines. Condensers. Plate condenser. Leyden jar.

Arrangements of condensers in parallel and in series. Residual charge. Seat of the charge in a Leyden jar. Dissected jar. Capacity of a condenser.

Condensing Electroscope. Its construction and elementary theory. Its application to the detection of small potential differences.

Atmospheric electricity. Lightning Conductors.

Voltaic current. Simple galvanoscope. Copper-zinc cell. Volta's Pile. Demonstra

tion of the statical potential difference at the electrodes, and of the existence of a current when the electrodes are joined.

Theory of simple Voltaic Cell. Defects of simple cell. How these are obviated. Constant cells. Details of Daniell's, Grove's, Clark's, Bichromate and Leclanche's cells, and explanation of their action.

Meaning of Electromotive Force, Current and Resistance, and units for their measurement.

Ohm's Law. Arrangements of resistances in series and

parallel. Arrangements of cells in series and in parallel

to form a battery. Magnetic effects of the Electric Current. Am

pere's rule. The construction and theory * of the astatic galvanometer and its applica

tion to the detection of weak currents. Tangent galvanometer.

The heating effect of the current. Simple experiments to illustrate this effect. Joule's Law. Arc and incandescent lamps.

JUNIOK PUBLIC. 387

Magnetisation of soft iron by the current. Electro-magnets.

Chemical action of the current. Electrolysis. Faraday's Laws. Voltameters.

Measurement of resistances. Simple substitution. Wheatstone's Bridge.

Measurement of Electromotive Forces. High Resistance Galvanometer.

Single Needle Telegraph. Morse Telegraph. Electric Bell.

Electro-magnetic induction. Alternating and direct current dynamos. Direct

current motors. Simple treatment. The induction coil.

Section D.

(dj Vibration. Wave motion. Their graphic representation. Transmission of wave motion. Longitudinal and transversal vibrations. Relation between wave length, vibration frequency, and velocity of wave propagation.

Measurement of the velocity of light. Intensity of light. Photometers (Rumford, Bun-

sen and Bouguer or Joly). Reflection of light. Plane and curved mirrors. Refraction of light. Refractive index. Prisms

and lenses. Dispersion of light. The spectrum. Microscopes and Telescopes. The eye as an optical- instrument. Measurement of the velocity of sound. The characteristics of a vibration and the cor

responding characteristics of a musical note. Measurement of pitch. The siren. Musical

intervals. Scales. Temperament. Reflection of sound waves. Interference. Beats. The tuning fork, strings and organ pipes. Sympathetic resonance.

.26

3 8 8 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

The scope of tbe work required in the above subjects may be gauged from the following books (which are not prescribed as text-books):—

Junior Public, and Junior Commercial.

Rosenberg—First Stage Mechanics (Organised Science Series).

Gregory and Hadley—Mechanics. Sanderson—Hydrostatics. Stewart—Elementary Heat (University Tutorial

Series). Jones—Heat. Gregory and Simmons—Exercises in Practical Physics,

edited by Hansen.

Senior Public and Senior Commercial. Glazebrook—Dynamics. Glazebrook—Hydrostatics.

Glazebrook—Heat. Glazebrook—Electricity and Magnetism. Jones—Light and Sound. Wright—Heat (Advanced Science Series).

Laboratory Work.

Twenty independent experiments, ranging over the course, will be considered a satisfactory year's work for candidates for the Junior Public and Junior Commercial Examinations. Twenty-five additional ones will be required for the Senior Public- and Senior Commercial Examinations.

All candidates must submit for examination their Laboratory Note-books. Demonstrations performed by the teacher may be entered in the note-book, but should be indicated as such by the teacher's initials.

On the inside of the front cover of the note-book the Science Teacher should also attach the following certificate*, which must be countersigned by the Head Teacher.

• Printed fonns of this certificate may be obtained at the University office. For other rules in regard to Note-Books see Handbook ol Public Examinations.

JUNIOR PUBLIC. 389

This. note-book contains the original record of experiments done under my immediate supervision by in the laboratory of the school during the year Except where otherwise indicated, the records herein are the candidate's own descriptions of his experiments,

(Signed)

Science Teacher at

(Countersigned] Head Teacher.

L I S T OF SUGGESTED EXPERIMENTS.

The following, list' is intended merely to indicate to teachers the type and standard of experiments which will satisfy the Board of Examiners, and not to restrict in any other way the freedom of the teacher in selecting or devising experiments. It is essential that any selection of experiments should be representative of the complete Syllabus.

Section A.—Mechanics and Hydrostatics.

1. Use of measuring rule; Direct determination of the dimensions, length, area and volume of geometrical solids.

2. Use of balance; Weight and density of material of solids.

3. Determination of area of figure: (a) by counting squares on squared paper. (b) by weighing cardboard hgure.

4. Determination of volume of irregular solid by displacement.

5. Determination of volume of vessel; (a) by volume of contained liquid, (b) by weight of contained liquid.

6. Use of micrometer wire-gauge; Volume and density of metal rod or wire.

25A

390 DKTAILS OF SUBJECTS.

7. Use of spherometer; Thickness of thin plate. 8. The simple pendulum; Law of isochronism, law

of lengths, and value of gravity. 0. The parallelogram of forces.

10. The laws of composition of parallel forces. 11. Determination of the centre of gravity of a plane

figure. 12. Principle of moments; the lever and other illus

trations. 13. The simple machines; Determination of their

mechanical advantage and efficiency. 14. The law of Elasticity; by means of spiral spring,

wooden lath, metal wire or bar, and 16. Boyle's Law. 16. Experimental verification of Archimedes' Prin

ciple. 17. Determinations of densities and Specific Gravities

(a) by Archimedes' method, (b) by the Specific Gravity bottle, (c) by the U tube method.

18. The U tube manometer; measurement of gas pressures.

19. Experiments with the air-pump.

Section B.—Heat.

[Experiments suitable for Senior Public only marked • ] . 1. The thermometer; calibration by standard; test

of fixed points. 2. 'Determination of coefficient of expansion of

metal rods. 3. Determination of coefficient of apparent expan

sion of a liquid in glass. 4. 'Determination of coefficient of real expansion of

liquid by Dulong and Petit 's method. 6. 'Determination of pressure-coefficient of air. 6. Determination of specific heat of solids or liquids.

Method of mixtures. 7. Determination of melting point of solid, such as

paraffin wax; (a) by direct method, (b) from the cooling curve.

JUNIOR PUBLIC. 391

8. Determination of boiling point ot liquid such as alcohol;

(a) by direct method. (b) Jones' method.

9. 'Determination of the Latent Heat (a) of steam, (b) of water.

10. Determination of the relative humidity of the air; wet and dry bulb thermometer.

11. 'Comparison of the relative conducting powers of different metals.

12. Experiments on radiant heat.

Section C.—Electricity and Magnetism. Magnetism.

1. Map of lines of force of field due to bar-magnet and earth.

2. Comparison of intensities of fields by vibration magnetometer.

8. Use of Deflection-magnetometer; (a) to verify inverse cube law of force for

short bar magnet. (b) to compare the magnetic moments of

two-bar magnets. 4. Verification of inverse square law of force by

method of vibrations or of torsion. 5. Determination of the Declination. (The geo

graphical meridian should be determined once for all and marked in the laboratory.)

6. Determination of the Dip. 7. Intensity of free magnetism along axis of bar-

magnet. Electricity.

1. The gold-leaf Electroscope; (a) Development of equal and opposite

charges by friction. (b) Induction—Faraday's ice-pail experi

ment, (c) Comparative insulating powers of sub

stances. 2. The electrophorus. 3. The plate condenser.


4. The condensing electroscope; measurement of E.M.F of voltaic cell.

6. The dissectable Leyden jar. 6. Construction of simple voltaic cell; effects of

current in wire. 7. Polarisation of simple cell; falling off of current

with time of flow. 8. Construction of Daniell cell. 9. The Tangent Galvanometer; absolute measure of

current. 10. The Astatic Galvanometer; comparative measure

of feeble currents. 11. Tbe resistance box; variation of current with

resistance. 12. Measurement of resistance;

(a) by the method of substitution, (b) by the Wheatstone bridge.

13. Comparison of E.M.F.s; (a) by high resistance sensitive galvano

meter, (b) by simple potentiometer.

14. Development of beat in a wire; proof of Joule's law and determination of the. mechanical equivalent.

16. Thermo-electric effects. 16. The water voltameter. 17. The copper voltameter. 18. Induced currents; observations of the funda

mental phenomena. 19. Magnetic action of coil carrying current. In

verse cube law for short coil.

Section D.—Light and Sound.

Light. 1. Law of Reflection. 2. Photometry;

(a) Bunsen's photometer. (b) Rumford's photometer, (c) Joly's or Bouger's photometer.

JCNIOK PUBLIC. 393

3. Law of refraction; (a) by block, (b) by prism.

4. Focal length of concave mirror. 6. Focal length of lenses. 6. Verification of inverse square law. 7. Total reflection; critical angle.

Sound.

1. Determination of the velocity of sound. 2. The Monochord; laws of vibrating strings. 3. Difference of pitch by counting beats. 4. Frequency of vibration of fork by graphic

method. 6. Non-transmission of sound in vacuo.

18. CHEMISTRY— The simpler physics and chemistry of the atmosphere

and its chief component gases. Examples of chemical combination as distinguished

from physical change. The chemistry of combustion ; conservation of mass ;

common fuels and their products. The three states of aggregation of matter and the

transition from one state to another as exemplified by water. Tbe simpler chemistry of water and its elements. Water as a solvent for solids and gases, and the simpler phenomena of solution such as crystallization, saturation and super-saturation.

The chemistry of carbonate of lime, quicklime, carbonic acid, carbonic oxide, carbon (charcoal, graphite and diamond); of common salt, chlorine, hydrochloric acid, sodium, caustic soda and sodium carbonate; of sulphuric acid, sulphurous acid, hydrogen sulphide, sulphur and the sodium sulphates ; of magnesium, magnesia and magnesium sulphate; of nitre, nitric acid, the oxides of nitrogen, ammonia, and ammonium chloride and sulphate; of bone-ash, phosphoric acid and phosphorus (yellow and red); of clay, silica, alumina, waterglass and alum.


The fundamental chemical laws of conservation of mass, definite proportions, multiple proportions and equivalents; Boyle's and Charles' laws, the density of gases, Gay Lussac's and Avagadro's laws; the vapour pressure of water and boiling points; the general characteristics of mixtures, compounds and elements (metallic and non-metallic), allotropic modifications; the theory of molecules and atoms in its simpler developments; the use of chemical formulae and equations; and the relation of salts, bases, acids and basic and acidic oxides; so far as they can be illustrated by an elementary practical study of the above-mentioned substances.

Simple chemical calculations.

Practical Work.



This note-book contains the original record of experiments done under my immediate supervision by in the laboratory of the school during the year Except where otherwise indicated, the records herein are the candidate's own descriptions of his experiments.

(Signed)

Science Teacher at

[Countersigned] Head Teacher.

* Printed forms ot this certificate may be obtained at the University office. For other rules in regard to Note-Rooks see Handbook of Public Examinations.

JUNIOK PUBLIC. 395

For further recommendations see under Senior Public Examination.

The scope of the work and the method of treatment may be gauged from

Farrish and Forsyth, Chemistry for Organised Schools of Science. (Macmillan and Co.).

or some similar book.

14. ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY— ' a ) Macroscopic Morphology.

1. Frog.—The anatomy of the alimentary, circulatory, excretory and respiratory organs and the nervous system (except cranial nerves).

2. Man.—General anatomy of.the alimentary, circulatory, excretory and respiratory tracts.

Elementary anatomy of the joints sufficient to explain the mechanical principles of limb movements.

The larger subdivisions of tbe central nervous system.

The origin of spinal nerves. (b) Microscopic Morphology.

1. General Histology.—The cell; protoplasm and nucleus; with special reference to the structure of a protozoon. Epithelium in limiting membranes and in secretory organs. Nerve cell and nerve fibre. Afferent and efferent nerve endings (excluding organs of vision, smell, hearing, touch and taste). Connective tissue. Muscular t issue; skeletal, cardiac and involuntary. Blood. Lymphoid tissue and organs.

2. Special Histology of Man iu outline.—Alimentary tract. Respiratory tract. Circulatory tract. Renal tract. Skin and its appendages.

(c) General Physiology. 1. The organism as a whole, with special reference to

the physiology of a typical protozoon. Repair; growth; response to environmental change (including the elements of immunity). Sources of energy, work performed. Digestion and excretion.


2. Constituent parts of the organism. Metallic compounds in organisms. Elementary chemistry of carbo-hydrates, fats (including fat-like bodies) and proteins. Enzyme reactions. Diffusion, osmosis and permeability of membranes.

(d) Special Physiology of Man,

1. Elementary Survey of Nervous System.—Origin and significance of afferent impulses; destination and action of efferent impulses; reflex action, including functions of nerve-roots.

2. Physical and chemical characters of foods; dietetics; action of cooking on foods.

3. Digestion and absorption. 4. Excretion. 5. Circulation. 6. Respiration. 7- Metabolism.

The approximate standard for the above is that indicated by Foster and Shore's Physiology for Beginners in so far as it deals with the requirements, but teachers are recommended to read Osborne's Elements of Animal Physiology and Leonard Hill's Manual of Physiology (last edition). •

/ 'radical Exercises, All candidates must submit for examination- their

Laboratory Note-books. Demonstrations performed by the teacher may be entered in the note-book, but should be indicated as such by the teacher's initials.


This note-book contains the original record of experiments done under my immediate supervision by in the laboratory of the school during the year Except where otherwise

* Printed tonus of this certificate may be obtained at the University office. For other rules in regard to Note-Books see Handbook of Public Examinations.

JUNIOR PUBLIC. 397

indicated, the records herein are the candidate's own descriptions of his experiments.

(Signed)

Science Teacher a t

[Countersigned]

Head Teacher.

The Npte-books must give evidence that candidates have learnt either by actual dissection or by demonstration

(1) The main macroscopic features in regard to the alimentary, circulatory, excretory, and respiratory organs and nervous system (except cranial nerves) of the Fi-og.

(2) The macroscopic structure of trachea, lungs, heart, liver, pancreas and kidney, aud the microscopic structure of striated muscle, -.subcutaneous areolar connective tissue, hyaline cartilage and bone, nerve and blood, small..intestine of mammal and pancreas.

(3) Some form of Protozoon. Candidates will be expected to possess an acquaintance

with the principles of Chemistry and Physics such as is contained in Macmillan's Science Primers on these subjects by Roscoe- and Stewart.

15. BOTANY—

1. Systematic. (o) The characteristic features of the following

groups:—Fungi (Mucor and Agaricus), Algae (Spirogyra and Fucus or Hormosira), Vascular Cryptogams (Pteris), Angiospermae (Monocotyledons and Dicotyledons).

(jh) The characteristic features of the following natural orders:—(1) Liliaceae, (2) Grami-neae, (3) Ranunculaceae, (4) Leguminosae, (5) Myrtaceae, (6) Proteaceae, (7) Compositae, with reference to the general distribution of the order, and to the common weeds and economic plants included in it.


2. Morphology and Anatomy. (a) The general morphology of the root, stem,

buds, leaf, inflorescence, flower, fruit and seed.

(6) The general arrangement and functions of the tissues in the leaf and young stem of Monocotyledon and Dicotyledon, and the outlines of secondary growth.

(c) Function and detailed structure of young cell (cell wall, protoplasm, nucleus, plaetidsj, and the following adult tissues:—Parenchyma, sclerenchyma, vascular tissue (sieve tubes and vessels), epidermis, including cuticle, stomata and cork.

3. Physiology, (a) An outline of Plant Physiology, including the

principles of Absorption, Nutrition, Trans-

Siration, Respiration, Germination and tovement, Pollination, Dispersal of fruits

and seeds. Elementary facts of adaption to environment.

Practical Exercises-All candidates must submit for examination their

Laboratory Note-books. Demonstrations performed by the teacher may be entered in the note-book, but should be indicated as such by the teacher's initials.

On the inside of the front cover of the note-book the Science Teacher should also attach the following certificate,* which must be countersigned hy the Head Teacher:

This note-book contains the original records of experiments done under my immediate supervision by in the laboratory of the school, during the year Except where otherwise indicated, the records herein are the candidate's own descriptions of his experiments.

(Signed) Science Teacher a t

(Countersigned) • Head Teacher.

* Printed forms of this certificate may )w obtained at the University office. Por other rules in regard to Note-Books see llandl>ook-of Public Examinations.

JUNIOR PUBLIC. • 3 9 9

The note-books must give evidence that candidates have performed the following practical work: —

(a) Have examined as follows tbe types mentioned in Section 1 (o):—The microscopic structure of the vegetative and reproductive parts of the Algae and Fungi, the macroscopic structure of Pteris and the microscopic s tructure of its sorus and sporangia.

(b)'Have a practical acquaintance with the general form of the plant and the structure of the flower and fruit of at least two typical examples of each of the natural orders mentioned in Section 1 (6).

(c) Have performed or seen performed at least 16. experiments in plant physiology, illustrating the following:—-Elements of Plant Nutrition (by water culture or otherwise). Root absorption. Rise of sap, Transpiration, Carbon-dioxide assimilation. Influence of Light on photosynthesis. Respiration, Germination and effect of varying conditions on germination. Growth and growth movements (geotropism, heliotropism, nutation). Movements of adult par ts (pulvini, etc.), and non-vital movements (swelling of seeds, etc.).

The standard required will be approximately tha t of Ewart ' s Matriculation Botany, Scott's Flowerlesa Plants , or J . W. Oliver's Elementary Botany. Candidates will be expected to possess an acquaintance with the principles of Chemistry and Physics, such as are contained in Macmillan's Science Primers on these subjects, by Roscoe and Stewart. I t is strongly recommended tha t candidates should have taken par t in at least one field excursion.

Lowson's Second Stage Botany is recommended r.a a reference book for teachers.

1C. MUSIC—

The Certificates of the Music Examination Boards of the-Universitjes of Melbourne. Adelaide. Tasmania, Queensland and Western A ustralia will be accepted under the conditions, set out in the Syllabus of Public Examinations in Music.


Candidates will be required to pass iu Grade III., Theory . and Practice, at one Examination.

For details of subjects, tees, dates, etc., see current Syllabus ol Public Examinations in Music. The Syllabus may be obtained on application.

17. DRAWING—

1. Practical Geometry. The use of the T-square, set-square, protractor, com

passes and dividers. To draw an angle equal to a given angle or to contain a given number of degrees, and to draw lines parallel and perpendicular to each other by construction. (a) The construction and use of scales ; plain,

metric, and diagonal. Proportionals, areas, similar figures. The construction of triangles, quadrilaterals, polygons, and circles in accordance with given conditions. Easy problems on the circle, together with the description and circumscription of circles, circles tangent to lines and circles. Construction of ellipse by use of intersecting arcs, pencils, or trammels.

(4) The drawing of plans, elevations, and sections of simple solids and structures

or (a) Arrangement and analysis of simple geomet

rical patterns. (A) Drawing to scale simple objects or structures.

2. Memory Drawing. Drawing common objects and simple structures from memory.

3. Drawing from geometrical models and from common objects. Groups of not more than three geometrical models or common objects.

4. Elementary Perspective, instrumental and freehand. Candidates must take all four sections, and for a Pass

must satisfy the examiners in three of them. Distinction will only be granted if the candidate satisfies the examiners in all four sections.

The standard and amount of knowledge required is such .as is contained in Spanton's Geometrical Drawing and Design, or Morris's Geometrical Drawing for Arts Students, and Petty's Elementary Perspective.

For sections 1 and 4 an H or H H pencil should be used, i o r sections 2 and 3 an HB or B pencil.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS FOR THE JUNIOR COMMERCIAL EXAMINATION, DECKMBF,R, 1915, AND FEBRUARY, 1916.

N.B.—Handwriting, spelling and genernl intelligence will be taken into account throughout the Examination,

The details of the subjects for this Examination are the same as for the corresponding subjects in the Junior Public Examination with the following exceptions : —

HISTORY—

Candidates are recommended to paws in two of the divisions marked a, b, c, in the details for the Junior Public Examination.

BOOKKEEPING, PRECIS AND COMMERCIAL CORRESPONDENCE—

A. Honk-keeping —

General Principles of Book-keeping by Double Entry-Knowledge of commercial terms.

Caudidates will be expected to work simple exercises which will illustrate the following:—Opening and balancing ledger, and drawing up trial balance, balance-sheet, profit and loss account.

Candidates will be supplied with ordinary examination paper, and with double foolscap ruled with two money columns on each page.. The ruled foolscap must be used for Cash Book, Journal, Purchase, Sales and Returns Books, and Ledger. Candidates may be called upon to rule sheets suitable for Bill Books. No other paper will be supplied or allowed.

Candidates must also understand how to draw up and deal with invoices, accounts current, account sales, bills of exchange, promissory notes and cheques, bills of lading, and other ordinary commercial documents of n. simple nature.


Book suggested for reference :— Commercial and Legal Terms in ordinary use—A

C. Morley.

B. Precis and Commercial Correspondence— (a) Precis—Candidates will be required to condense

articles on various subjects, and to make abstracts of letters and documents.

(b) Correspondence—Practical exercises in English composition, special attention being paid to correct use of words generally and business terms in particular, structure of sentences, logical sequence of ideas and paragraphing. Candidates will be required to write letters, to make reports and abstracts, and to compose short essays on various business topics. Special attention to be paid to clearness and neatness of writing.

C. Test for Handwriting— (a) Not more than 300 words to be written from un

familiar printed matter. Special attention to-be paid to legibility, accuracy and neatness. All written matter to be properly punctuated and capitalised without ornamentation ; (4) t he test will also include writing figures in columns. Time allowed 30 minutes.

A separate paper will be set for each of the sections marked A, B and C. Candidates must pass in each section,

•SHORTHAND— Passages of moderate difficulty will be dictated for 8-

minutes a t the rate of 100 words a minute. Candidates will be required to hand in their notes and a longhand transcript, for the writing of which one hour will be allowed. Spelling, punctuation, paragraphing and neatness of writing in transcription will be taken in to account.

* No Certificate for Shorthand or Typewriting at this standard will he-issued to candidates who have not passed the Junior Commercial Examination.

JCNIOK COMMERCIAL. 403

•TYPEWRITING— Candidates will be required to copy in correct form a

rough MS. draft of a business letter or legal document involving the use of technical terms, abbreviations and corrections: to type and rule in red ink an invoice, account or other form of business document; to copy and set out correctly a balance sheet or statistical table.

Neatness, speed (as shown by the amount of work completed) spelling, syllabication, punctuation and general intelligence will be taken into account.

N.B.—Candidates must supply their own machines.

* No certificate for Shorthand or Typewriting at this standard will be Issued to candidates who have not passed the Junior Commercial Examination.

.28

DETAILS OP SUBJECTS FOR THE SENIOR PUBLIC EXAMINATION, DECEMBER, 1915, AND FEBRUARY, 1916.

1. ENGLISH— 1. Composition and History of English Language.

Wyld—Elementary Lessons in English Grammar (Clarendon Press)", Chapters I., XIL, XIII. , XIV.

Teachers should consult such books as : Sweet—New English Grammar, Part I. Emerson—History of the English Language. Wyld—Historical Study of the Mother Tongue.

2. Literature. (a) A literary selection not earlier in date than

Milton, viz.: Poetry about 101)0 lines, and Prose not exceeding in amount 15 numbers of the Spectator.

(b) A play of Shakespeare. (c) Selected English prose after 1550, equivalent

to 10 essays of Bacon, (rf) A New Primer of English Literature, by

Tucker and Murdoch.

Additional for Honours.

(e) An historical novel. ( / ) One of the Idylls of the King, or its equi-

* valent. (g) A New Primer of English Literature, by

Tucker and Murdoch. Books prescribed:—

(a) Pure Gold j A Choice of Lyrics and Sonnets, edited by H.C. O'Neill (T. C. and E. C. Jack).

(The selections from Arnold, Bums, Byron, S. T. Coleridge, Cowper. Gray, Keats, Shelley, Swinburne, Tennyson, Wordsworth).

(A) Shakespeare—Julius Caesar, (r) Kuskin— Susume and Lilies (Short Studies,

Nelson and Sons). Goldsmith—Selected Essays, edited by Lobban

(Cambridge Univ. Press). (e) Conan Doyle-The White Company. (/•) Milton—Selections given in Pure Gold (edited

by H. C. O'Neill).

SENIOR PUBLIC. 405

NOTE : In the Pass Examination tbe questions on the History of English Literature will deal with the following authors only :—Milton, Pope, Addison, Goldsmith, Gray, Wordsworth, Byron, Shelley, Keats, Scott.

In the Honour Examination the questions will deal with the foregoing and in addition with :—Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Dryden, Thomson, Lamb, Hazlitt, Tennyson, Browning.

2. BRITISH HISTORY—

The History of England aud of the British Empire in moderate detail from the earliest times to 1846, together with the outlines of the exploration of Australia up to and including I860.

Honours.

(a) The above, but a sound general rather than a detailed knowledge is required.

(A) Special Study in 1915: Jose—Australasia (Dent and Co.).

Twelve questions, of which candidates must attempt not more than eight, will be set for both Pass and Honours.

a. GREEK— One of the easier Greek plays, together with a book

or selection of comparatively easy prose Greek not exceeding iu length the second book of Thucydides; translation of a comparatively easy English passage into Greek prose; translation from comparatively easy Greek prose or verse at s ight; the outlines of Greek History to the death of Alexander the Great, together with the geography involved.*

Special books :— Aeschylus,Prometheus Vinctus (Laurence), omitting

all lyrics after v. 297. Arrian, Anabasis I., cc. 7-16, I I . (Auden).

Recommended:— Pyffe—Greece (Macmillan's Primers).

' See note at end of Senior Public Details. .26A


Honours.

The books prescribed for Pass together with a book of Thucydides (or its equivalent from Demosthenes or Plato), translation from English into Greek prose; translation from Greek at s ight ; Grammar; the outlines of Greek History as for pass; a knowledge of the history of literature and of antiquities such as is contained in the books recommended below.

Special books:— Aeschylus, Prometheus Vinctus (Laurence), the

whole. Arrian, Anabasis I., cc. 7-16, I I . (Audeu). Demosthenes, Olynthiacs and Philippics I. (Sandys).

Recommended :—

Jebb—Primer of Greek Literature. Qow—Companion to School Classics, Third Edition,

pp. 90-146, 263-290.

Recommended for the use of Teachers :—

Tucker—Life in Ancient Athens.

4. LATIN—

A book of Livy and a book of Vergil's Aeneid (or the i r equivalent); translation of a comparatively easy English passage into Latin prose: translation from comparatively easy Latin prose or verse at sight; the outlines of Roman History to the-death of Augustus, together with the geography involved.*

Special books:— Vergil, Georgics I. (Page). Livy XXI., 1-4S, 52-56 (Trayes).

Recommended:—

Everard Owen—A Brief History of Rome (Blackie).

* See note at end of Senior Public Details.

SKNIOK PUBLIC. 407

Honours.

The. works prescribed for Pass together with a speech of Cicero and a book of tbe Odes of Horace (or their equivalent) ; translation from English into Latin prose; translation from Latin at s ight ;

.. grammar; the outlines of the Roman History as for Pass; a knowledge of the history of literature and of antiquities such as is contained in the books recommended below.

Special books in addition to those prescribed for Pass:— Horace—Selected Odes (Wickham), omitting !>, 21,

22, 23, 25. Pliny—Selected Letters (Pritchard and Bernard)

E p p : 1, 3-12, 16, 17, 23-25, 29-31, 35, 39, 49, 57-59,61.68.71, 72, HI, 90,91. -

Recommended .-Wilkins—Primer of Latin Literature. Gow—Companion to School Classics, Third Edition,

pp. 158-237, 257-262.

6. FRENCH— A more advanced examination in the snbjects of the

- the Junior Public examination, including the life and works of the following authors:— Corneille, Moliere, Racine, La Fontaine, Voltaire, A. de Clu'nier, Chateaubriand, V. Hugo, Hon. de Balzac, Michelet; French composition, reading, pronunciation and writing from dictation ; outlines of French History and Literature from 10iii (beginingof XVIIth.century) to 1880.*

Recommended :— Abrege d'Histoire et de Litterature francaises

(F. I. Maurice-Carton.) Honours.

More advanced work on the aliove, including the life and works of the following authors:—Corneille, Moliere, Racine, La Fontaine, Fenelon, Mine, de Sevigne, Voltaire, A. de Chenier,

. Bernardin de Saint-Pierre, Chateaubriand. Mme. de Stael, Lamartine, V. Hugo, Hon. de Balzac, Michelet; and easy conversation.

' .See note at end of Senior Public Details,

408 DETAILS OF SUaiECTS.

6. GERMAN—

A more advanced examination in the subjects of the Junior Public examination, including the following authors :— Eichendorff, Freytag, Goethe, Grillparzer, Hebbel, Heine. Mdrike, Schiller, Uhland, Wildenbruch; German composition, reading, pronunciation and writing from dictation ; outlines of German History, beginning with Frederick the Great; and of the History of German Literature, beginning with Klopstock.*

Honours.

Mure advanced work on the above, including the following additional authors:—Charaisso, Geibel, Lessing, Platen, J. Voss, Wieland; and easy conversation.

7. + ALGEBRA—

More advanced treatment of work prescribed for the Junior Public examination together with the remainder theorem ; quadratic equations of two unknown quantities; ratio; proportion; variation ; permutations and combinations; binomial theorem for positive integral exponent; logarithms; relations between the roots and co-efficients of quadratic and cubic equations ; graphic solution of cubic equations.

Honours.

More advanced treatment of work prescribed for the Pass examination together with the elements of the theory of partial fractions; the elements of the theory of equations and determinants; exponential and logarithmic series.

" See Note at end ol Senior Public Details. T The papers in Matheniatics will be set in general accordance with the

recommendations contained in " Teaching of Elementary Mathematics; report ol the Committee appointed by the Mathematical Association;" published by O. Bell and Son.

SKN10K PUBLIC. 409

8. 'GEOMETRY— -More advanced treatment of work prescribed for the

Junior Public; examination, together with the constructions and theorems contained in the annexed Schedule A.

SCHKDUI.K A.

Proportions and Similar Figuies.

Parallel lines cut all transversals in the same ratio. Rectangles and triangles of equal alti tude are as their

bases. In equal circles angles at the centre and sectors are as

the arcs on which they stand. The internal or external bisector of the vertical angle

of a triangle cuts the base or base produced in the ratio of the sides.

Equi-angular triangles have their corresponding sides proportional and conversely.

Triangles which have one angle of one equal to one angle of the other and the sides about the equal angles proportional are similar.

Similar triangles and polygons are as the squares on corresponding sides.

Internal and external division of a straight line in a given ratio.

Construction of a mean proportional between two given straight lines, and of a third or fourth proportional to two or three given straight lines.

Iiouus of a point whose distances from two given points are in a given ratio.

Straight Line and Plane.

Two intersecting straight lines determine a plane. Two intersecting planes determine a straight line. A straight line perpendicular to each of two intersecting

straight lines a t their point of intersection is perpendicular to the plane in which they lie.

' Tht- papers iu Mathematics will be set in general accordance with the reooinimtndatioiis contained In "Teaching of Elementary Mathematics; •report of the Committee appointed hy the Mathematical Association '̂ published hy u. Bell & Sons.


Straight lines perpendicular to a given straight line at a point are co-planar.

If one of two parallel straight lines is perpendicular to a given plane so is the other.

Straight lines which are perpendicular to the same plane are parallel.

Straight lines parallel to the same straight line are parallel to one another.

If two intersecting straight 1 ines, are parallel to two other intersecting straight lines, then the two pairs contain equal angles and determine parallel or coincident planes.

Planes perpendicular to the same straight line are parallel.

Parallel planes cut any other plane in parallel lines and cut all straight Hues in tbe same ratio.

A plane perpendicular to a straight line is also perpendicular to any plane through the straight line.

A plane perpendicular to two intersecting planes is also perpendicular to their intersection.

The three plane angles which form a trihedral angle are together less than four right angles, and any two are together greater than the third.

Construction of the straight line through a given point perpendicular to a given plane.

Construction of the straight line perpendicular to two given straight lines which are not in the same plane.

Parabola. Square of the ordinate varies as the abscissa. Any chord meets the directrix on a focal radius equally

inclined to the focal radii of its extremities. Constructions for the tangent and normal a t a point. Locus of foot of focal perpendicular on a tangent. Construction for tangents from a point. Similarity of triangles formed by two tangents aud

focal radii of points of intersections and contact.

Honours,

More advanced treatment of work prescribed for the Pass examination together with harmonic ranges, inversion, radical axis, pole and polar centres of similitude, and the elementary geo-

8ENI0U PUBLIC, 411

metry of the parallelepiped, pyramid, cone, cylinder and sphere. Elementary analytical geometry so far as relates to the point, line, circle and parabola referred to rectangular axes.

Recommended:— K. S. Cross—The Elementary Geometrical Properties

of the Parabola.

«. •TRIGONOMETRY—

More advanced treatment of work prescribed for the Junior Public Examination together with heights and distances and the general solution of simple trigonometrical equations. The simple treatment 'of circumscribed, .inscribed, and escribed circles.

Honours .

More advanced treatment of work prescribed for the Pass examination together with De Moivre's theorem and its simpler applications; summation of simple finite trigonometrical series.

10. PHYSICS—

See under Junior Public Examination.

11. CHEMISTRY— A fuller treatment of the work prescrilied for the

Junior examination, including a more detailed study of the following non-metallic, elements and their more important compounds (e.g. the simple hydrocarbons, methane, ethylene and acetylene) with one another,—H, Cl, O, S, N, P, C and Si. ; and of the following metals and their more important compounds with the non-metals named above,—Na, K, Mg, Ca, Al, Fe, Zn, Cu and Ag and also Ammonium. The chemistry involved in the simpler methods of extraction of

'The papers In Mathematics will be set in general accordance with the recommendations contained in "Teaching of Elementary Mathematics; report of the Committee appointed by the Mathematical Association ; " published by -O. Bell and Son


the above elements, and in the manufacture of their more important products, such as glass, superphosphate, alkali, potassium cyanide, blenching powder, coal gas.

A fuller treatment of the atomic theory ; Dalton's law of partial pressures, Henry's law of solubility of gases and.Dulong and Petit 's law of specific-heats. Vapour density, substitution and double decomposition.

The nature of-salts; basic and acidic radicles and the more obvious phenomena of electrolysis.

Text-books (suggested only).-— Besides the book suggested for the Junior Examina

tion, teachers will find the following uesful as a guide to the work, especially in the laboratory;

Newell, Experimental Chemistry. (D. C. Heath and Co.).

Honours.

The detail* prescribed for puss, with the addition of the following elements and their more important compounds,—Br, I, F, A, He, Ba, Hg, Sn, Pb, As, Sb, Cr, Mn, Co, Ni, Au and Pt.

The chemical nature, sources and general properties of alcohol, acetic acid, oxalic acid; mineral oil, coal tar, benzene ; fat, soap, glycerin ; sugar and starch.

Tbe principles of homologous series as exemplified in the paraffins, alcohols and fatty acids.

The determination of molecular weights by vapour density, freezing and boiling point methods. The determination of atomic weights.

The natural classification of the elements (Periodic law).

Reversibility of actions, gaseous dissociation, mass action and equilibrium treated in a simple manner.

Electrolytes and non-electrolytes; an elementary treatment of the ionic theory of electrolysis, of " strong " and " weak " acids and of double decomposition.

SENIOK PUBLIC. 4 1 3

For reference for honour work :— either Holleman, A Text-book of Inorganic Chemistry,

(John Wiley and Sons). or Newth, A Text-book of Inorganic Chemistry. (Long-

mans Green and Co.). The scope of the work in Organic Chemistry may be-

ganged from Bailey, The New Matriculation Chemistry (University Tutorial Press).

Practical Work—Pass and Honours.



This note-book contains the original record of experiments -done under my immediate supervision by in the laboratory of the school during the year Except where otherwise-indicated, the records herein are the candidate's-own descriptions of his experiments.

(Signed)

Science Teaches- a t

[Countersigned]

Head Teacher.

Ret oitiiiti'inititioits for 'Junior and Senior E.vnniinations.

Candidates will be required to submit satisfactory evidence and to show by their answers that they have-performed or seen experiments illustrative of tbe subjects included in the syllabus.

* Printed forms of this certificate may be obtained at the University office . For other rules in regard tu Note-Books see Handbook of Public Examlna* tionn.

' 4 1 4 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

The questions set will have regard to the conditions under which the subject may best be experimentally t augh t in schools.

The Laboratory work done should comprise exercises on t h e following:

Preparation of the more important gases; purification of substances involving the operations of filtration, crystallization, distillation, determination of boiling points, etc.

Simple quantitative verification of the laws of deflniti ve proportions and equivalent weights.

A few selected examples of dry-way aud wet-way methods employed in Qualitative Analysis.

12. ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY—

The same subjects as are required for the Junior examination, with the following additions:—

Macroscopic morphology of the nervous system of the frog. Life history of the frog. Macroscopic morphology of the circulatory and respiratory tracts in a fish. Human microscopic and macroscopic morphology, of the standard indicated by Huxley's Physiology. Anatomy and Physiology of the nervous system and of the organs of special sense iu man, of the standard indicated by Huxley's Physiology.

All • candidates must submit for examination their Laboratory Note-books. Demonstrations performed by the teacher may be entered in the note-book, but should 'lie indicated as such by the teacher'p initials.

On the inside of the front cover of the note-book the -Science Teacher should also attach the following certificate*, which must be countersigned by the Head Teacher.

;* Printed forms of this certificate may lie obtained ut the University office. For other rnles in regard to Note-Books see Handbook of INitilic K\amfna--tions.

SKNIOK PUBLIC. 41.>

This note-book contains the original record of experiments done under my immediate supervision by in the laboratory of the school during the year Except where otherwise-indicated, the records herein are the candidatc's-own descriptions of his experiments.

(Signed)

Science Teacher at

[Countersigned] Head Teacher.

Practical Exercises.

The Note-Books must give evidence that candidates have-learnt either by actual dissection or by demonstration.

(1) The macroscopic structure ot the circulatory,. respiratory, and central nervous systems of a fish (preferably a shark) and of a frog.

(2) The macroscopic structure of tbe mammalian heart and eye.

(3) The microscopic structure of the more important parts of the alimentary canal and respiratory tracts, of the skin and its appendages, and of the spinal cord.

Honours.

(rt) Mncrostopic Morphology. The alimentary, circulatory, excretory and respiratory-

tracts, also central nervous system of shark,, frog and rabbit.

{b) Microscopic Morphology.

The histology of the epithelial, muscular, nervous and' connective tissues, of the alimentary, circulatory, excretory and respiratory tracts, and of t h e spinal cord and cerebellum of a mammal.

Standard indicated by Schafer's Essentials of Histology,


(c) Human Physiology.

The material basis of the body; tlie blood, the contractile tissues, the conducting tissues; the vascular mechanism; lymph and tissue fluids; the mechanisms of digestion, respiration, excretion ; metabolism, ductless glands, special sense.

Standard indicated by Noel Paton's Essentials of Physiology.

.Starling's Elements of Human Physiology is recommended for the use of teachers

Practical Exercises.

The student must produce satisfactory evidence of above that he has personally made dissections as shark, frog and rabbit, illustrating the macroscopic features mentioned above, and that he has had demonstrated to him sections illustrating the microscopic morphology mentioned above. He must also have performed simple test-tube experiments in blood and the digestive juices; and also experiments on the special senses which do not involve any complex apparatus.

Beddai'd Edkins and Hill's Practical Physiology is recommended for the use of teachers.

13. BOTANY— 1. Systematic.

(a) As in Junior, bu t a more advanced knowledge involving a pbylogenetic comparison of the reproduction of the members of the groups, and with the addition of the following types:—Bacteria, Yeast, Mucoi- Yeast, t no additional Vascular Cryptogams (Equisetum and Selaginella) and a Gymnosperm (Pine).

<6) As in Junior, with the addition of the following:—Orohideae, Rosaceae, Cruciferae, Solanaceae, Labiatae.

SKNIOU PUBLIC. 4 1 7

2. Morphology and Anatomy.

As in Junior, but in greater detail, with the addition of:—Development of adult tissues from a young cell; Details of secondary growth; Structure of roots and growing points.

3. Physiology. As in Junior, but a uioiv advanced knowledge

and in addition an elementary knowledge of Plant distribution, including the modes of dispersal of plants, and the elementary facts of distribution and of adaptation to environment (as in Ewart 's Matriculation Botany).

Practical Exercises-

As in Junior, bu t in greater detail, showing: — (o) and (h) The structure of the additional types

mentioned, also microscopic structure of the Vascular Crytogams and Gymnosperms (so far as the types mentioned are concerned).

(c) A greater number and variety of experiments in Plant Physiology, some of which must be personally conducted.

The Standard required will be approximately tha t of Lowson's Second Stage Botany, and teachers are recommended to use more advanced books for reference {See Honours syllabus).

Honours. A more detailed and comparative knowledge of the

subjects in Sections 2 and 3, and of Section 1, with the addition of Mueci and Gymnosperms, and of the following natural orders:—Rutaceae, TJmbelliferae, Epacrideae.

Practical Exercises—Honours. (a), (b) and (c) As for the Pass examination, but

in greater detail, and using more types, and with a smiliar knowledge in regard to the additional orders. In the case of all natural orders, one example a t least should be indigenous to or naturalised in Victoria.


The standard required iu regard to Morphology and Physiology will be approximately tha t of the " Text Book of Botany," by Strasburger, and of Reynolds Green's " Plant Physiology," so far as the subjects are respectively dealt with in these works. Teachers will do well to consult such larger works as " The Natural History of P lan t s , " by Eerner and Oliver, " Plant Distr ibut ion," by Schimper, and Pfeffer's '• Physiology of Plants ," in regard to matters incompletely discussed in tbe smaller works. I t must be distinctly understood that each higher examination involves a knowledge of the work included in those of lower grade.

14. GEOGRAPHY— Tlie Astronomical, Physical, Political and Commercial

Geography as prescribed for the Junior Public examination but in greater detail and a knowledge in moderate detail of the physical, political and commercial geography of the chief countries of the world. Chief vegetation zones. A general knowledge of the causes and effects of the chief agents which mould the surface of the earth, including tbe work of rivers, the sea. the wind, ice, earthquakes and volcanoes. The nature and modes of formation of the different earth forms. An elementary knowledge of the weather and the factors which control it. Limits of oceans and seas. Determination of depths and configuration of the ocean bottom. Distribution of Oceanic deposits. Temperature of the sea at various depths.

Maps—Formed hy projection of parts of a globe on to a plane. Construction of maps by methods of conical and of Mercator's projection.

Mapping—The map of the world, maps of the continents aud the principal countries. The maps asked for to be either structural or industrial. Candidates will be expected to be familiar with the simple methods of mapping by use of the plane table, to understand contoured topographic maps, and to be able to construct sections to scale across them and to explain the physical and commercial geography of the district.

8ENI0K PUBLIC. 419

Books for reference:— J. W. Gregory—Geography of Victoria. J. W. Gregory—Structural, Physical and Compara

tive Geography. A. J. Herbertson—Senior Geography or H. R. Mill—International Geography. Tarr—Physical Geography. T. S. Hall—Victorian Hill and Dale. Griffith Taylor—Australia, Physiographical and

Economic. J. F. (Instead—The Practical Geography, Part I.,

chapter 1. J. F. Unstead—The Practical Geography, Par t II . ,

chapter 1 (for mapping work).

Practical Exercises—Pass and Honours.

All candidates must submit for examination their Laboratory and Field Note Books.

On the inside of the front cover of the note-book the Geography teacher should also attach the following certificate,* which must be countersigned by the Head Teacher:—

This note-book contains the original records of exercises and excursions done under my immediate supervision by of the school during the year

(Signed)...,

Geography Teacher at (Countersigned)

Head Teacher; The note-books must give records of the follow

i n g : — (a) A rough plane table survey of a school yard or

• other convenient area. (6) Descriptions, with sketches and section of not

less t h a n five geographical field excursions.

* Printed forms of this Certificate may be obtained at the University office. For other rules in regard to Note books see Handbook of Public Examlna-otlons.

.27

4 2 0 DETAIL8 OF SUIWKCTH

(c) Rough contoured topographic plans representing three arens of distinct and diversified relief, accompanied by descriptions of the geography of each area, and by topographic sections.

Note.—The plane table survey may be a copy of one done under the supervision, of the teacher, but each student must have taken a share in its production

Honours.

A more detailed knowledge of the above. Book for reference :—

Davis—Geographical Essays.

15. GEOLOGY— Dynamical Geology—Geological agents which act upon

rocks of the earth's crust considered especially as agents of denudation, transport and deposition. Movements of subterranean water and the positions of springs, wells and soakages. Organic and chemical agencies; their constructive effects as in the formation of carbonaceous and calcareous deposits ; their destructive effects as in the weathering of rocks, and the production of soils. The valuable constituents in soils, their removal and reintroduction. Subterranean ugencies — the movements of the earth's crust., including the formation of anticlinal and synclinal folds and overfolding; faulting, including the formation of normal, reversed, thrust, step, ridge and trough faults ; earthquakes and volcanoes.

Pelrological Geology—Stratified or aqueous rocks, their composition, structure, classification and field relations. The igneous rocks, including plutonic,

, intrusive and volcanic rocks, their composition, structure, classificatiou, and field relations. The altered and metamorphic rocks, the modes and effects of alteration and metanioiplflsin.

Historical Geology—A recognition of the prominent characters of the great subdivisions of the invertebrate and vertebrate kingdoms, and their value when found in the fossil state. Classification of the stratified rocks. The four great ggo-

SENIOR PUBLIC. 421

logical groups—Azoic, Palaeozoic, Mesozoic, and Kainozoic—their principal subdivisions, their general characters and the broad outlines of the life forms on the globe during their formation. An elementary knowledge of the stratigraphy of Victoria.

Mineralogy—The common ores and rock-forming minerals and their modes of occurrence.

Hooks for reference :— Lapworth's Intermediate Text-book of Geology. W. W. Wat t s ' Geology for Beginners. Grenville Cole's Aids to Practical Geology.

For Stratigraphy of Victoria, see chapters on the Geology of Victoria in the following books :—

State Hand Book for Victoria for British Association for Advancement of Science. Australian Meeting, 1914.

J . W. Gregory's Geography of Victoria. „ Geography of Australasia, Vol. i.

Commonwealth Year Book, No. 1 (1908), or No. 2 (1909).

For geological mapping and section work, consult A. R Dwerryhouse, Geographical and Topographical Maps (Edward Arnold).

I ' rnr t icnl Exercises. All candidates must submit for examination their

Laboratory and Field Note-books. On the inside of the front cover of the note-book the

Geology teacher should also attach the following certificate,* which must be countersigned by the Head Teacher:—

This note-book contains the original records of exercises and excursions done under my immediate supervision by of the school during the year

(Signed) Geology Teacher a t

('Countersigned) Head Teacher.

* Printed tonus of this Certificate may be obtained at the University office. For other rules in regard to Notebooks see Handbook of Public Examinations.


The note-books must give records of the following:—

(a) Descriptive notes with sections of not less than five geological excursions.

(b) Three diagrams or geological plans representing different areas of diversified geology, with geological sections and descriptions of tlie geology of each area.

(c) Descriptive notes with sketches illustrating the physical characters, etc., of the following Minerals, Rocks and Fossils :—

Minerals—Quartz, Ortboclase, Labradorite, Common Opal, Biotite, Muscovite, Hornblende, Augite-Olivine, Tourmaline, Calcite, Fluorite, Gypsum, Magnetite, Limonite, Pyrite, Chalco-pyrite. Malachite, Sphalerite, Galena, Cerus-site, Cassiterite, Stibnite, Wolfram.

Rocks—Conglomerate, Sandstone, Mndstone, Limestone, Chert, Quartzite, Slate, Mica-schist, Gneiss, Obsidian, Rhyolite, Quartz-porphyry, Granite, Trachyte, Syenite, Dacite, Diorile, Basalt, Diabase.

Fossils—Two specimens of each of the following groups:—

Foraminifera, Sponges, Graptolites, Corals, Echinodenns, Bryozoa, Brachiopods, Lamelli-branchs. Gastropods, Cephalopods, Fossil Plants.

Honours.

As for Pass, but fuller knowledge will be expected.

16. MUSIC— The Certificates of the Music Examination Boards of

the Universities of Melbourne, Adelaide, Tasmania, Queensland and Western Australia will be accepted in accordance with the conditions set out in the Syllabus of Public Exam-nations in Music.

Candidates will be required to pass in Grade II., Theory and Practice, at one Examination.

For details of subjects, fees, dates, etc., see current Syllabus of Public Examinations in Music. The Syllabus may be obtained on application.

SENIOR PUBLIC. 423

17. DRAWING—

1. Practical Geometry as in the Junior Public examination, together with curves other than elliptical; logarithmic, archimedean and volute spirals; isometric projections; simple exercises in graphic arithmetic.

2. Drawing in light and shade from simple models or objects or from casts of ornament or plant forms.

3. Perspective. More advanced than in the Junior Public examination. Treatment including elementary problems in the projections of shadows.

4. Memory Drawing. Work of a more difficult character than that of the Junior Public Examination.

Candidates must take all four sections and must satisfy the examiners in three sections. All candidates must pass in section 4. Candidates for the Senior Cominercial Examination must pass in Practical Geometry.

Honours .

A more advanced Examination in the subjects of the Pass examination together with

5. Drawing plant forms from nature in pencil, brush or pefa, a t the choice of the candidate.

Candidates must take all five sections and must pass iu four of them.. All candidates must pass in section 4. Candidates for the Senior Commercial Examination must pass in Practical Geometry.

The standard and amount of knowledge required in Practical Geometry is such as is contained in Spanton, Geometrical Drawing and Design; Harrison and BaxandalL Practical Plane and Solid Geometry; Davidson, Linear Drawing and Projection.

For sections 2 and 3 monochrome wash may be used for shading. For 1 and 3 an H or H H pencil should be used, for 2 and 4 an H B or B pencil, chalk or charcoal.

424 DETAILS OF 8UBJKCT8

18. ELEMENTARY MECHANICS—

Hectilinear motion with uniform acceleration; composition and resolution of velocities and accelerations ; Newton's laws of motion; composition and resolution of forces in one plane; projectiles; uniform motion in a circle; momentum and impact; principle of work; equilibrium of a particle and a rigid body under forces in one plane; inclined plane; lever; pulley; centroids.

This subject will be treated mathematically.

Books for reference:— S. L. Loney's Elements of Statics and Dynamics. C. M. Jessop's Elements of Applied Mathematics.

Honours.

Simple harmonic motion, together with more advanced treatment of the work prescribed for the Pass examination.

NOTE.

OUTLINES OF HISTORY AND LITERATURE.

The inclusion of " Outlines of the Literature and History " of Greece, Rome, France and Germany, as named under the subjects Greek, Latin, French and German for the Senior Public Examination, is intended to secure only snch a general conspectus or bird's-eye view of the respective literatures and histories as will serve for a first foundation for subsequent study in greater detail. The knowledge of the history is to be understood as incidentally necessary to the knowledge of the literature and its developments. There will be expected only an outline survey including the knowledge of main periods, salient movements, great events and persons. In short, the student is expected to be able to.place the greater names and works of literature in due chronological perspective (though not iu all cases with exact dates), and to realise in a general way the character of the most important productions and also the chief historical circumstances of the times in which they appeared.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS FOK THE SENIOR COMMKKCIAL EXAMINATION. DECEMBER, 1915.

1. ENGLISH— 1. t'omposilinn.

(a) Essay on some commercial subject; with outline of same.

(b) Paraphrasing. (<•) Precis-writing. (</) Commercial correspondence.

2. Literalnre. As for Seuior Public Examination.

2. COMMERCIAL ARITHMETIC, WITH HOOK-KEEPING—

(A.) i'oinmrnint Arithmetic.

Tlie work prescrilied for the Junior Public Examination in Arithmetic, together with the following Freights; rates of exchange and transactions with home and foreign Bills; the coinages, weights and measures of the principal commercial countries of the world. Delientures, preference stock, ordinary stock, profits and dividends; liabilities, insolvency and liquidation. Bankers' interest. The use of logarithms, more particularly for problems on compound interest, insurance and annuities. Methods of calculating rates and taxes. Compound interest with special reference to repayment of loans.

(B.) Hook-keeping.

1. PK1NCIPI .ES :

(1) Single Entry—its meaning—the books used —its incompleteness.

(2) Double Entry—its theory—scientific methods —adaptability to all classes of commercial transactions—superiority to single entry.

http://PK1NCIPI.ES


2. BOOKS EMPLOYED: The uses of the several varieties of cash books—

sales books—purchases books—journals— ledgers—subsidiary books—special books used in particular businesses.

3. T H E 'J'EBMS USED, THEIR MKANINQ AND NATURE : Capital — loans—debentures— mortgages—over

draft—creditors—real, personal and impersonal or nominal accounts—bills payable —bills receivable—discounts—interest— liabilities - assets - debtors— stocks—profit and loss—shares (ordinary, preference and deferred)—rents—royalties—leases—premiums —depreciation — sinking funds — reserves — plant — fixed charges — tillages—crops—consignments—investments —reserve funds, and other terms in common use.

4. T H E BALANCING or BOOKS : Methods of balancing books at stated periods.

The preparation of trading accounts profit aud loss accounts, and balance sheets.

5. T H E VAKIATIONS IN PAUTIOUI.AK BUSINKSSKS; The books required; the methods of keeping

them ; and the form of the presentation of accounts in different enterprises, such as those of shopkeepers, merchants, manufacturers, gas companies, municipal corporations, insurance (fire, life, marine, etc.) companies, shipowners, broker bankers, mining companies, butter factories, building societies and trustee com-ptmies.


Accounts of Limited Companies—principle of limited liability—division of capital into shares or stock (preference, ordinary, deferred)—issue of shares, applications, allotments, and calls — forfeited shares—distribution of profits in dividend—share registers — loans on mortgage—debentures— premiums — redemption of debentures—reserve

SENIOR, COMMERCIAL. 427

funds—investment accounts—sinking funds— revenue account.

Profit and Loss Accounts—trading accounts—gross and net profits—departmental accounts—manufacturing accounts—cost accounts — suspense accounts and special reserves—principles of valuing stock and assets—depreciation of assets.

Methods of reducing labour iu bookkeeping—modification of ordinary system—notes upon common errors—advantages of frequent balancing— treatment of bad and doubtful-debts—insolvency—trade discounts—allowances and reductions— payment of wages — short system for retailers' accounts—interest and foreign exchange—adjustment of partnership accounts.

Financial Administration (bills, drafts, trade credit, etc.)—notes upon bunk, railway, public, municipal and local authorities' accounts.

A separate paper will be set in each of the sections (A) aud (B) . Candidates must pass in each section.

3. GEOGRAPHY —

As for the Senior Public examination—Pass; but with especial reference to commercial geography including a knowledge of the economic products of different areas, trade and cable routes, climate and other factors that control the products of different lands. The distribution of population as dependent on these factors.

Books for reference :— Chisholm's Handbook of Cominercial Geography. W. M. Davis' Physical Geography.

Honours. A more detailed knowledge of the Pass work.

4. ALGEBRA —

As for the Senior Public Examination.


5. THE PRINCIPLES OF COMMERCE AND COMMERCIAL HISTORY—

(«) The Principles of Commerce—The structure, organization and leading features of the modern world of commerce and industry; and the elements of economic theory.

The scope of the work is indicated by the following textbooks :—

Gibbins' Economics of Commerce. ; Marshall's Economics of Industry.

Additional for Honours. Cunningham's Use and Abuse of Money.

(b) Commercial History. Text-book :—

Cunningham and McArthur's Outlines of English Industrial History.

Additional for Honours,

A fuller treatment of the subjects dealt with in Cunningham and McArthur's Outlines.

6. COMMERCIAL LAW—

Nature of contract and principles applicable to contracts generally. The following special contracts—Sale of Goods, including Sales of Goods Act 1896; Agency; Partnerships, including Partnership Act 1891 ; Bills of Exchange, Promissory Notes, Cheques, Bills of Sale, Stock Mortgages and Liens on Crops, including the Instruments Acts 1890-1902, other than Part I. of the Act of 1890, and amendments thereof; the Bills of Exchange-Act 1909 (Commonwealth), and the Bills of Sales Amending Act 1891; Charter-parties, Bills of Lading and Marine Insurance ; Secret Commissions Act 1905 (Commonwealth) ; and Secret Commissions Act 1905 (Victoria).

Text-book:— Steven's Mercantile Law.

SENIOR COMMERCIAL. 42i>

Honours.

A. more advanced treatment of the Pass work.

Reference may be made to the Australian Manual of Accounting and Commercial Law, Victorian Edition (J. P. Elliot, Melbourne), for a synopsis of the Victorian Law in the snbjects enumerated.

7. BANKING ANI> EXCHANGE— The Principles aud Practice of Banking, and the Means,

of Exchange.

Text-books:— Rae's Country Banker; Macleod's Elements of Bank

ing (omitting chapter 10); Hamilton's Australian Banking Law.

Honours. A more advanced treatment of the above, together

with Bagehot's Lombard Street and Goschen's-Foreign Exchanges.

NOTK.—The Official Year Book of the Commonwealth of Australia (1901-1908), by Q. H. Knibbs, Commonwealth Statistician, contains valuable information as to the conditions and progress of industry and commerce in Australia, and reference should be made to it while studying tbe text-books.

8. P H Y S I C S ^ See under Junior Public Examination.

9. CHEMISTRY—

As for the Senior Public Examination.

10. GEOLOGY— As for the Senior Public Examination—Pass, but special

attention will be paid to Economic Geology, including water supply and the circulation of underground water, the determination of useful minerals and ores, and the study of building stones and road-metals.


Honours.

A fuller knowledge of the above.

HI, 12, 13. MODERN LANGUAGES—

(a) Dictation, reading and pronunciation, easy conversation.

(b) Grammar: Accidence and Syntax. (c) Composition, idiomatic sentences aud commercial

letter writing. (</) Translation from the selected language.

Honours.

A more advanced test in the same work.

N.B.—Not more than three languages ore allowed to -count for a Pass. Notice of intention to present for Examination any language other than French, German or Italian must be given at least two mouths before the last clay of •entry!:):.

14. DRAWING— As for the Senior Public Examination, but candidates

must pass in Practical Geometry.

SHORTHAND— Dictation for 10 minutes a t 120 words a minute.

Candidates may be required either to transcribe their notes (70 minutes being allowed for this purpose) or to read them to the examiner.

TYPEWRITING— As for the Junior Commercial Examination, but the

papers will be harder and a higher standard of proficiency will be required.

ARTS AND EDUCATION. 4 3 1

ARTS AND EDUCATION.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

FOR THE ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS TO BE"

HELD IN THE FOURTH TERM. 1915. AND

FIRST TERM, 1916.

FOR NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. CHEMISTRY, ZOOLOGY, BOTANY, AND GEOLOGY—See under Science.

POR CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY AND L A W , PART I. AND PUBLIC INTERNATIONAL LAW— See under Law.

GREEK—PART I.-—

Translation from Attic Greek. Translation into Greek Prose. Greek Accidence and Syntax.

S/ecinl Subjects of E x a m i n a t i o n .

Demosthenes — Private Speeches (Paley and Sandys)-Part If. Nicostratus, Conon, Callicles.

Aristophanes—Progs to line 1118 (Tucker).


Trauslatiou into (Jreek Prose and Iambic Verse. The remainder of Aristophanes—Frogs. . The following Books of Greek Part I I . :

Aeschylus—Seven against Thebes (Paley). Herodotus—Book VI. (Shuckburgh).

L A T I N ^ P A B T I.—

'Translation from Classical Latin. Translation into Latin Prose. Latin Accidence and Syntax.

432 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1915.

Special Subjects of Examination,

Horace—Odes I I I . (Gow) omitting 6, 7, 15, 20, 27. Cicero—Pro Roscio A merino (Nicol).


Translation into Latin Heroic and Elegiac Verse. The following Books of Latin Part I I . :

Tacitus—Annals I. (Furneaux). Luoan—Book VII . (Postgate).

-GREEK—PART II .— Translation from Classical Greek. Translation into Greek Prose. Greek Accidence and Syntax.

Special Subjects of Examination.

Pindar—Pythian Odes (Gildersleeve). Aeschylus—Seven against Thebes (Paley). Plato—Protagoras (Adam) Herodotus—Book VI. (Shuckburgh). Outlines (Primer) of History, Antiquities, and Litera

ture of Classical Greece.


Translation into Greek Verse. More advanced prose composition and uupresci-ibed

translation.

LATIN, PART II.—

Translation from Classical Latin. Translation into Latin Prose. Latin Accidence aud Syntax.

Special Subjects of Examination.

Horace—Epodes and Satires I. (Gow). Lucan—Book VII. (Postgate). Seneca—Select Letters (Summers), pp. 1-67. Tacitus—Annals I , (Furneaux). •Outlines (Primer) of History, Antiquities and Litera

ture of Classical Rome.

AKTS AND EDUCATION. 433

Additional for Honours. Translation into Latin Verse. More advanced prose composition and nnprescribed

translation.

OREEK, PART III.—

° As for Greek Part II., but with the Honours papers on the prescribed books.

LATIN, PART III.—

As for Latin Part II.. but with the.. Honours papers on the prescribed books.

T H E SCIENCE OF LANGUAGE— The general principles of the Science of Language.

Text-book:— Tucker—Introduction to the Natural History of Lan

guage (Blackie).

COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY—

The general principles of Comparative Philology, aud the Comparative Grammar of the Greek and Latin Languages.

ANCIENT HISTORY— The Early History of Institutions. The History of Greece. The History of Rome.

Books recommended iu addition to the various references to other works given in the Lectures :—

W. Warde Fowler—The City State of the Greeks and Romans.

Tylor—Primitive Culture ( So far as referred Frazer—The Golden Bough i to in Lectures. Ramsay—Roman Antiquities, ch. 2-8. Marett—Anthropology (Home University Series).

434 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, wis.

Bury—The History of Greece. Grote—History of Greece, so far as referred to in

Lectures. Mommsen—History of Rome, Book I I I . ; Book IV.;

Book V., exclusive of ch. 2 and 3. Merivale—History of the Romans under the Empire.

ch. 31-33, 39, and 44.

<# Additional for Honours.

Zimmern —Tho Greek Commonwealth. W. Warde Fowler—Social Life in Rome in the Age

of Cicero. Gibbon — Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire

(chapters 1-3, 40-44, 49-51, 58-59, 64-65, 68-71).

HISTORY OF THE BRITISH EMPIRE—PART I.—

The 'General History to 1688.

Books recommended in addition to the various references to other works given in the Lectures:—

Hodgkin—Political History (Longmans) Vol. I., chapters 1-6, and 13, and 24.

Green—History of the English People, Vols. I.-VI-(Eversloy Series).


Pollard—Factors in Modern History. Pollard—Henry VIII .

HISTORY OF THE BRITISH EMPIRE—PART IL—

The General History continued.

Books recommended in addition to the various references to other works given in the Lectures:—

Macaulay—-History of England, chapters 4-25. Grant Robertson—England under the Hanoverians. Marriott—English Political Institutions. Low and Saunders — Political History of England.

Vol. XII.


Rogers, Australasia (in Lucas's Historical Geography of the British Colonies, Vol. VI., Part I.).

Egerton—History of British Colonial Policy. Jenks—History of the Australasian Colonies (chapters

vi. to xi.). Jose—Australasia (Dent). Gyles Turner—History of Victoria (Longmans).

Period for Special Studv (for Honours)— The Reign of George I I I .

Books recommended in addition to the above :— Holland Rose—Pitt and the National Revival. Holland Rose—Pitt and the Great War.

EUROPEAN HISTORY— Modern History.

Books recommended: For the general history. Marvin—The Living Past (Clarendon Press). Acton—Lectures on Modern History. E. J . Payne—European Colonies, MacMasters—History of the American People. Hawkesworth—The Last Century in Europe (Arnold). Fisher—Napoleon (Home University Library).

Period for Special Study (for Honours)— The Napoleonic Empire.

Fournier—Napoleon I. Holland Rose—The Personality of Napoleon.

POLITICAL ECONOMY—

The scope and method of Economics. Outlines of development of Economic theory. Indnstrial Efficiency and Organisation of Industry. Value. The distribution of Wealth between individuals and classes. Causes of variations in wages, profits, interest and rent. Unimproved values. Monopolies. Money. Currency. Banking. Credit. Foreign Trade. Taxation. The Tariff. The New Protection. Consumption. Outlines of Economic development of Great Britain and of Australasia and of industrial legislation. Trades Unionism and the New Unionism. Outlines of some Socialistic theories. Present day tendencies. Elements of Statistics.

.28

436 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, PUS.

Books recommended iu addition to the various references to other works given in the Lectures :—

Gide—Principles of Political Economy. Marshall—Economics of Industry. McGregor—Evolution of Industry. Heam—Plutology. Schloss—Methods of Industrial Remuner-'

tion So far as Sykes—Banking and Currency treated Nicholson—Principles of Political Economy j in Adam Smith—Wealth of Nations | Lectures. Commonwealth Year Book

ENGLISH—PART I.—

Outlines of the History of English Literature. Outlines of the History ot the English Language. Dixon and Grierson—The English Parnassus.

(The selections from Milton, Gray, Collins, Wordsworth, Shelley and Keats)

Shakespeare—Richard I I I . and Antony and Cleopatra. Browne—Religio Medici. Haz l i t t -Tab le Talk (World's Classics).

Ailditional fm Honours.

Cook- First Book in Old English (Ginn .t Co.). (Extracts I. to XII. inclusive).

Chaucer—Tbe Prologue aud The Knight's Tale.

ENGLISH—PAjtT II.—

Shakespeare—Sonnets (as studied in class). Much Ado About Nothing; Antony and Cleopatra; A Winter 's Tale (Oxford Edition).

Dixon and Grierson—The English Parnassus. (The selections from Di-ydeu, Johnson and Gold

smith ; Tennyson and Browning). Johnson—Lives of Milton and Gray. Burke—American Speeches.

. Hazlitt—The Spirit of the Age. Carlyle—Sartor Resartus. Browning—Men and Wonien. Emerson—History of the English Language.

ARTS AND EDUCATION. 437

Additional for Honours. Sweet—Anglo-Saxon Reader. (Selections II . , VI-X.,

XX., XXI., XXVII.). Emerson—Middle English Reader. (Pages 1-13, 75-87,

166-175. 181-191).

ENGLISH. PART 111.—

Shakespeare—as for Par t I I . Minor Elizabethan Drama—(Marlowe— Dr. Faus tus ;

Greene—Friar Bacon and Friar Bungay ; Jonson— Every man in his Humour ; Beaumont and Fletcher— Philaster; Webster—Duohess of Malfi).

English Criticism — (Sydney — Apologie for I'oetrie ; Dryden—Essay of Dramatic Poesie ; Johnson—Lives of Cowley, Pope and Gray ; Coleridge—Literary Criticism, (Edited by MacKail). Emerson—Tlistory of the English Language.

ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND PHILOLOGY—

S weet—A nglo-Saxon Reader (Pages, 1-50,62-87,100-167 ) Emerson—Middle English Reader. Emerson—History of the English Language. Beowulf—Lines 1-1888.

KRKNCH—PART I.—

Theory and Practice of Phonetics (based on Passy's Sons du francais).

Composition and Grammar. Translation a t sight. Reading, writing from dictation, aud conversation. Outlines of the History of French Literature. Outlines of the History of French Language.

{a) Recueil de morceaux choisis des auteurs francais; prosateurs et poetes, par M. M. A. Hatzfeld, A. Darmesteter and N. M. Bernardin, I Verne, vol., (XlXe. Siecle) (Ch. Delagrave).

{b) Moliere - Les Precieuses- ridicules (Pellisson) (Ch. Delagrave), Racine, les Plaideurs N. M. Bernardin (Ch. Delagrave).

{') Anthologie du theatre contemporaiu (1830-1910), par G. Pellissier,(Ch. Delagrave).



Elements of Etymology (based on Brachet's Historical Grammar).

La Fontaine, par Emile Faguet de 1'Academie Francaise (Les Classiques populaires) Ste. francaise d'imprimerie et de libraine.

FRENCH—PART II.—

Composition and Essay Writing. Translation a t sight. Reading, writing from dictation, and conversation. History of French Language. History of French Literature from the beginning of

the XVth. Century to 1850.

!a) La Farce de Cuvier, G. des Brulies (Ch. Delagrave). b) Recueil de morceaux choisis des auteurs francais,

prosateurs et poetes, par Messrs. A. Hatzfeld, A. Darmesteter et N. M. Bernardin ( ler et Seme Vol. (XVIe. and XVIIe. Siecles) (Ch. Delagrave).

(c) Corneille—Polyeucte—F. Hemon (Ch. Delagrave). Racine—Andromaque—N. M. Bernardin (Ch. Dela

grave). Fonsard—Le lion amoureux—(Caiman-Levy). E. Rostand—La Princesse lointaine (£ . Pasquelle).

\ d ) Anthologie du theatre contemporain 1830-1910, par G. Pellissier (Ch. Delagrave).

Additional for Honours,

Etudes etymologiques (based on Brachet's Historical Grammar).

Augustin Thierry (F . Valentin) (les Classiques populaires) (La Ste francaise d'imprimerie et de librairie).

Racine (Faguet) (La Ste francaise d'imprimerie et de librairie).

FRENCH—PART III.—

The History of French Language and Literature from the origines to tho present times.

Le Theatre en France au moyen-age— L. Cledat (les Classiques populaires) (Ste francaise d'imprimerie et de librairie).

ART'S AND EDUCATION. 4 3 9

Drame ancien, Drame modeme—E. Faguet (A. Colin). De Dumas a Kostand—A. Filon (A. Colin). Histoire • des litteratures companies, des origines au

XXe. Siecle—P. Loliee (Delagrave). Recits extraits des poetes e t prosateurs du moyen-age—

G. Paris (Hachette).

GERMAN—PART I.

Phonetics, reading aloud, and writing from dictation Grammar recommended:

Spanhoofd—Lehrbuch. Rippmann—Exercises in German Grammar.

Translation a t sight. Composition. Conversation on German history, geography, and

institutions, after Kron, German Life. Haufl—Marchen. O. Weise—Mosterstilcke. Die Emte der deutschen Lyrik, from page 248. Grillporzer—Das Leben ein Traum.

Addi t iona l for Honours Goethe—Hermann and Dorothea. Schiller—Maria Stuart. Keller—Pankraz.

GERMAN—PART II .

Phonetics (after-Sievers, Grundzilge del- Phohetik.) Grammar (recommended:

Curme—Grammar of the German Language). Translation-at. sight. Composition letter and essay writing. German Institutions, after Paszkowshd, Lesebucb, and

Kron, German Life. Outlines of the History of German Literature from

1748 to 1848, after Robertson. Outlines, and Klee, Litteraturgeschichte.

Die Ernte, from page 159. Wagner—Die Meistersinger. Grimiuelshausen—Simplissimus. Freytag—Soil und Uaben.


. . Additional for Honours. Goethe—Tasso. Schiller—Gedichte.

GERMAN—PART III :

Essay Writing. The History of the German Language, after Loewe,

Germanische Sprachwissenschaft. and Kaufl-mann, Deutsche Grammatik.

The History of German Literature in outline (Robertson), with either a special study of the life and works of Goethe and Schiller, from 1794 to 1805, or the interpretation and translation of selected texts from OHG und MHG writers (Sammlimg Goeschen, Nos. 1, 23, 28, 79, 93).

Methodology, after Breul, The Teaching of Modern Foreign Languages.

PURE MATHEMATICS—PART I. Pass.

Elementary Functions.—The elementary, algebraic, trigonometric, exponential, logarithmic and hyperbolic functions, with their graphs and derivatives maxima and minima ; elementary processes of integration ; the definite integral as the limit of a sum.

Text-book recommended :— Introduction* to the Calculus, Gibson.

A knowledge of the Mathematics prescribed for Junior Public Examination, together with the theory of similar triangles, will be assumed. I t is not advisable to assume the binomial or other infinite series in this course.

Honours. Algebra, including elementary theory of equations. Plane Trigonometry. Elementary Analytical Geometry of two dimensions. Elements of Differential and Integral Calculus,—The funda

mental processes of differentiation aud integration; successive and partial differentiation; the application of Taylor's theorems to the expansion of functions ; maxima and minima of functions of one variable ; the integration of explicit functions of one variable.

ARTS AND EDUCATION. 441

Text-books recommended :—

Treatise on Algebra, Charles Smith. Plane Trigonometry, Todhunter and Hogg. Conic Sections, C. Smith. Infinitesimal Calculus, Lamb.

PURE MATHEMATICS—PART II .

Pass.

Plane Analytical Geometry.—Elementary methods and their application to simple curves.

Calculus.—Expansions, small corrections, approximations to roots, functions of more thau one variable, maxima and minima, plane infinitesimal geometry, single and double integrals, arcs, areas, volumes, moments, differential equations of the first order, linear differential equations with constant coefficients.

Text-books recommended :— Coordinate Geometry, Loney. Infinitesimal Calculus, Lamb.

Honours.

Analytical Geometry of two dimensions. Elementary Analytical Geometry of three dimensions. Differential Calculus. Integral Calculus.—The determination of lengths, areas

and volumes; the differentiation of an integral ; definite and multiple integrals; the differentiation and integration of series.

Text-book recommended :— Coordinate Geometry, Bell.

PURE MATHEMATICS—PART I I I .

Pass.

Solid Geometry. —Elementary methods and their application to simple curves and surfaces.

Calculus.—Solid infinitesimal geometry, multiple integrals, ordinary and partial differential equations.

4 4 2 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1916.

Text-books recommended :— Coordinate Geometry, Bell. Introductory Course in Differential Equations, D. A.

Murray. Honours.

Solid Geometry. Integral Calculus. Functions of a Complex Variable. Fourier's Series and Integrals Differential Equations. Calculus of Variations.

Text-books recommended :— Differential Equations, A. R. Forsyth. Fourier's Series and Integrals, H. S, Carslaw.

MIXED MATHEMATICS—PART I.

Pass.

Kinetics. —Elements of uniplanar kinematics. Elements of dynamics of translation and of rotation about a fixed axis.

Statics.—Algebraic aud graphic transformation of forces ; equilibrium of solid pieces.and simple combinations.

Hydrostatics.—Pressure of fluids under gravity; equilibrium and stability of floating bodies; tension in cylindrical and spherical shells; pressure in rotating liquid and along a stream line in inviscid liquid.

Text-books recommended:— Elementary Dynamics, S. L. Loney. Elements of Statics. S. L. Loney. Elementary Hydrostatics, W. H. Besant.

Honours.

The elements of Kinomatics, Dynamics, Statics aud Hpdrostatics, with the use of Vector Algebra.


Elementary Dynamics, S. L. Loney. Elementary Statics, J . Greaves. Elementary Hydrostatics, J . Greaves. Vector Analysis, Gibbs-Wilson.


MIXED MATHEMATICS—PART II . Pass.

Statics—General theories of equilibrium ahd stability. Flexible and elastic linear systems. Analysis of stress and strain, with simple applications.

Dynamics—The analytical treatment of the motions of particles.and rigid .bodies in two and three dimensions, including the elements of gyrodynamics.


Statics, H. Lamb. Treatise on Dynamics, A. and J. G. Gray.

Honours .

A fuller treatment of the subject for Pass, with the use of Vector Analysis. The elements of the Theory of Potential. The elements of- Hydrodynamics.

MIXED MATHEMATICS—PART I I I .

Pass.

Elements of Potential Theory. Elements of Hydrodynamics and Elasticity. Elements of Theory of Electricity.

Text-book recommended:—

Webster—Dynamics of Particles, Rigid, Elastic and Fluid Bodies.

Honours. Theory of Potential. The Higher Dynamics. Hydrodynamics. Elasticity. Electricity.

Text-books recommended :— Rigid Dynamics, E. J . Routh. Analytical Dynamics, Whittaker. Dynamics, Webster. Mecaniqne Rationnelle, Appell. Hydrodynamics, H. Lamb. Theory of Elasticity, A. E. H. Love.


PSYCHOLOGY. LOGIC AND E T H I C S -

The Pass Course will include the following subjects: — I . Psychology.—Psychological Standpoint and Me

thods. Analysis of Mental life: Sensibility and Purposive Behaviour. Stages of Mental Development : The Perceptual and Ideational Levels. Memory and Imagination, Thought,. Language and Belief.

II . Formal Logic—The Logical Standpoint. The Problem of Definition and Division. The Laws of Thought. Formal Statement and Inference. Fallacies. Limits of Formal Logic.

I II . Ethics—The Psychological Basis. The Problem of Freedom. Stages in Moral Development. Society and the Individual. The Nature of

Virtue. The Moral Judgment.

Books recommended for Pass: — Stout—Manual of Psychology, 3rd ed. (omitting Bk.

I I . and Bk. III. , Part I I ) . Gibson—The Problem of Logic (sect. III. & V.-IX.). MacCunn—The Making of Character.

In addition to the above, "The Government of Man, an Introduction to Ethics and Politics," by G. S. Brett (1913), may be recommended as furnishing a broad historical basis for the further study of Ethico-political problems.


The Theory of Instinct and Emotion. Books recommended: —

James—Text-Book of Psychology (ch. xxiv. and) xxv.).

McDougall—Social Psychology. Lloyd Morgan—Instinct and Experience.

ADVANCED LOGIC -The Pass Course will include the following subjects:—••

(1) The Theory of Scientific Method in general outline.

(2) Analysis of the fundamental concepts and assumptions of Science.

(3) Logical Aims and Principles.

ARTS- AND EDUCATION. 4 4 &

Books recommended: — (a) for study—

Gibson—The Problem of Logic (sect, xi.-xiv.). The Encyclopedia of the Philosophical Sciences

Vol. I. on "Log ic" (Articles by Boyce, Couturat and Losskij).

(b) for further reading or reference— Poincare—Science and Hypothesis (ch.1-6,8,9,11).

Science and Method. The Value of Science (Part I., ch. 1-3,.

and Part I I . Karl Pearson - T h e Grammar of Science (ch. 3-6,

8,9, 10). Young—Fundamental Concepts of Algebra and

Geometry.

Addi t i ona l f o r Honours .

Merz—The History of European Thought in the Nineteenth Century (chs. iv.-xii .) .

HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY—

The History of Modern Philosophy from Descartes to Kant, with special reference to Descartes, Spinoza, Leibniz, Locke, Berkeley, Hume, Reid arid Kant .

Books recommended for reading or reference: Descartes—Philosophical Works (Haldane and

Ross). Spinoza—Treatise on God and Man (A. Wolf). Leibniz—The Monadology, etc. (R. Latta) . Locke—Essay concerning Human Understanding.

Books ii. and iv. (Open' Court Publishing Company.)

Berkeley—Principles of Human Knowledge. (Open Court Publishing Company.)

Berkeley—Three Dialogues between Hylas and ' ' "Philonous. (Open Court Publishing Com

pany.) Hume—Enquiry concerning Human Understand

ing. (Open Court Publishing Company.) Reid—Intellectual Powers of Man (Hamilton's.

edition).


Kant—Watson's Selections. James Seth—English Philosophers and Schools of

Philosophy. A. Seth—Scottish Philosophy. N. Smith—Studies in Cartesian Philosophy.

' AiUlitional. f„r Honours .

Burnet : Early Greek Philosophy. P la to : Phaedo.

For further reading or reference, in addition to the classical treatises of Zeller and of Gomperz, the following are recommended:—

James Adam : The Religious Teachers of Greece. F . M. Corn ford: From Religion to Philosophy—a

study in the Origins of Western Speculation.

ADVANCED ETHICS—

(i) History of Ethical Systems,- with special reference to Plato 's Republic (tr. Davies and Vaughan), Aristotle's Ethics (tr. Peters), Mill s Utilitarianism and the Moral Theories of Butler and Kant .

(ii) Ethical Principles. Theory of the Meral Life. [Recommended Text-Book: Dewey and Tuft's " Ethics."' . For further reading," Development

and Purpose," by L. T. Hobhouse, may be recommended].

A special study will be made of the following: — Sidgwick—Methods of Ethics. Green — Prolegomena to Ethics.

The lectures on Sidgwick and Green will contain :— (a) An e'xamiitationof Utilitarianism and of theat tempt

to establish it on an Intuitional basis. (b) An enquiry into the metaphysical foundation of

Ethics. (c) A consideration of the Moral LifeasSelf-Realization.

METAPHYSICS— Courses will be delivered in the following subjects:—

(i.) Psychological Principles.

ARTS AND EDUCATION. 4 4 T

The lectures will discuss;— (i) Tbe Problem of the Soul's relation to the

Body, (ii) The Structure and Growth ot the Mind, (iii) Special problems arising out of or con

nected with the foregoing discussions (e.g., the aesthetic consciousness, the dream-consciousness, the relation of Psychology to Logic).

Books recommended :— McDongall—Body ahd Mind (Ch. vii.-xxiv.). Mitchell—Structure and Growth of the Mind.

(ii.) The Theory of Knowledge. The lectures will discuss;—

(i) The main stages in the development of Intnitionism, from Descartes to Losskij.

(ii) The rise and growth of Philosophical Criticism,

(iii) The dialectic of Hegel, (iv) The recent developments of Meinong and

Husserl. Books recommended: —

" Epistemology." (Article in Hastings' Encyclo-, pasdia of Religion and Ethics).

Kant's Critique of Pure Reason (in Watson's Selections).

Hegel's Logic (tr. Wallace), ch. i.-vii.

(iii.) Modorn Philosophical Movements. The lectures will embody :—

(a) An enquiry into the nature and function of the Intellect, with special reference to the views of Bradley, Bergson and the Pragmatists.

(b) An examination of Bradley's Theory of the Absolute, and the possibility of man's apprehension of its nature.

(c) A consideration of Bergson's view of tho concept and his metaphysical method of Intuition.

(d) An examination of Neo-Realism, with special reference to the views of Alexander and Perry.


Books recommended: — Bradley—Appearance and Reality. Bergson—Creative Evolution. Stewart—Critical Exposition of Bergson's Philosophy. Perry—Present Philosophical Tendencies.

EDUCATION—

The Pass Course will include the following subjects: —

I. THE BASES OF EDUCATION—

(a) Psychological.- The treatment of the Senses, Perception,-' Memory, Imagination, Reason, the Instincts, the Feelings, the Will (including Attention) from the educational standpoint.

(b) Logical,- Tlie treatment of Inductive and Deductive methods, Observation, Experiment. Division and Classification, Definition, Fallacies, Language from the educational standpoint.

(c) Ethical: The treatment of The Aim of Lite, Motives, Habits, The Virtues, Rewards and Punishments from the educational standpoint.

Text Book: — The Learning Process (Colvin).

Books for Reference :— Logical Basis of Education (Welton). Psychology and the Teacher (Munsterborg).

I I . THE PRINCIPLES OF EDUCATION- -

(rt) Self-activity: The Instincts, Purpose, Unfolding of Personalty, Modes of Expression, The Motives, Love of Nature, Social Instincts, Self-Activity as the leading principle of Modern Education.

(h) Apperception • Herbartian Theory of, Steps of Method. Recapitulation Theories. Content of Child's mind on entering school. Stages of Development (Body ana Mind). Conditions of Apperception. The chief Rules of Method (Prom the Simple to the Complex, etc.). Limitations of theory.


(c). Interest; Doctrine of Effort. Wrong views of Interest. Interest and Feeling. Interest and Self-Activity. Interest and Interests. Evolution of Interests.

(<0 Play and Imitation: Theories of Play. Work and Play. Games Psychological Nature of Play. Play iu Education. Imitat ion: Nature of. Place in Education.

(e) Formal Discipline -. Criticism of Theory.

Text Book — Experimental Pedagogy (Claparede). Unfolding of Personality (Mark).

Books for Reference:— Education of Man (Froebel). Apperception (Lange). The Educative Process (Bagley).

I I I . EDUCATION AND THE STATE—

Older views of their relationship. Education and the Church. Rise of Universities. Endowed Schools. Scottish A^ts. Views in the 16th, 17th and 18th centuries (England). Early Acts in the American colonies and States. Prussian educational system in the 18th and 19th centuries. Education in England in 19th century. Act of 1870. Later Acts. Acts in Overseas Dominions. Relationship as now expressed in civilised countries.

State and Private Schools, Educational Administration, Training of Teachers, Compulsory atten-tendance. Inspection and Examination, Cost of Education, Co-education.

Education and modern democracy; The Creche system, The Free Kindergarten schools. Open-air schools. Free libraries. Evolution of the religious controversy. Education and Crime. Education of the sub-normal. The Blind, The Deaf, The Crippled, The Epileptic. Education and Industry. Education and Apprenticeship, Preventive and Constructive Movements, Child Labour, Housing Problem, Arbour Day, Vocational Education.


Text Book: — State Intervention in English Education (Mont

morency). Books for Reference: —

The Modern School (Hanus). The Making of Citizens (Hughes). Educational Aims and Efforts (Magnus). Educational Problems (Hall).

IV. GRADES OF SCHOOL— The Kindergarten: I t s Theory and Practice—Froe-

bel, Dewey, Montessori methods. The Primary School: Rural and City Types. Cur

riculum- Tendencies (Handwork, Gardens, Agriculture). Home Lessons.

The Continuation School: Day and Evening. Education between the ages of 12 and 16.

The Secondary School. Curriculum and Organisation. •

The Technical School: The University: Girls' Education:

Text Books: — * Education for Citizenship (Kerscbensteiner).

Principles of Class Teaching (Findlay). Books for Keforence ;—

Education of Man (Froebel). The Montessori Method (Montessori). School and Society (Dewey). Report on Continuation Schools (Board). Rise and Early Constitution of Universities

(Laurie). English High Schools for Girls (Burstall).

V. SCHOOL SYSTEMS—

One or more of the following: English, Scottish, German, French, American, Victorian—History, Development, Modern Organisation,

Books for Keforence : -German Higher Schools (Russell). Higher Education of Boys in England (Norwood

& Hope).

AIM'S AND EDUCATION. 4 5 1

German Schools (Winch). The Modern School (Hanus). Report on Education in Europe and America (Tate).

VI . THE HISTORY OF EDUCATION—

Short sketch of the history of educational thought and practice among the Greeks and in Europe since the rise of the Universities. The following thinkers will be touched on:—Pla to , Aristotle, The Humanists of the pre.Renaa-cence period, Tlie Jesuits, Locke, Comenius, Rousseau, Pestalozzi, Froehel, Herbart , Spencer. There will be a more detailed study of some educational classic, e.g., Plato's Republic, Spencer's Education.

Text Books: — Text Book of History of Education (Monroe). Aristotle (Davidson).

The special classical work for 1915 will be The Republic (Davies & Vaughan's translation).

VII . THK PHILOSOPHY OF EDUCATION—

The nature of Man: Industry, Science, Art , Morality, Religion. The body of Man and i ts claims. Man as body, mind and soul. Education and Biology, Education and Physiology, Education and Anthropology, Education and Sociology, Education and Psychology.

Social aiire in Education: Greek and Mediaeval views. Modern Utilitarian views. Education for Social Service; Value of the Individual.

' Individual Aims in Education, Intellectual Aim. Moral Aim, Religious Aim, Idealism in Education, Definitions of Education. Educational values. Cur

riculum. Text Books: —

The Philosophy of- Education (Home). Tlie Evolution of Educational Theory (Adams).

VII I .—EXPERIMENTAL PEDAGOGY—

This course will embrace a series of experiments on Sensation, Perception, Ideation, Apperception. Reaction, Fatigue, Attention,

4 5 2 DETAILS OF SUU.IKI.rrH, 11113. •'

Memory; Observations of pupils at work in class as a study in Emotions, Intelligence Tests, Individual Differences, Attention, Discipline, and Class Management; a detailed study of some branch of the school regime, or the curriculum; statistics and their treatment. Each student will be required to keep a record of his work and present a report on the work carried out.

Text Books recommended; — Experimental Pedagogy (Claparede). Experiments in Educational Psychology (Starch).

Books for Reference:— Elementary Experiments in Psychology (Seashore). Experimental Psychology (Titchener). Text book of Experimental Psychology (Myers). Experimental Education (Pintner). Physical and Mental Tests (Whipple). Physical Nature of the Child (Howe).

IX. SPECIAL METHODS—

1. General Method and Class Teaching. 2. Method of English. 3. Method of History. -4. Method of Geography. 5. Method of Classics. 6. Method of Modern Languages. 7. Method of Mathematics. 8. Method of Physics and Chemistry.

The lecturers on General Method and Class Teaching will make the student acquainted with the chief problems in teaching and class management. Special attention will be given to the drawing up of notes 'of lessons, and the preparation of work. Each lecturer in Special Methods will trace the development of ideas in his particular subject from the beginning of Education to the close of the Secondary School, and will discuss with the students the methods advocated by leading thinkers and teachers, and will also seek to find the method best suited for our Australian schools. The leading problems in connection with method will be dealt with, and the students will be directed to those books or magazines which give the best help on the

http://SUU.IKI.rrH


subjects dealt with. Each student will be required to sit tor the examination in General Method and three of the Special Methods.

X. HYGIENE—

Lectures will be delivered on: — School Buildings, Furni ture , Cleanliness, Physical

Defects in Children, Mental Defects iu Children, The Nervous System, Infectious Diseases, Insect Carriers of Disease, Tuberculosis, First Aid, Physical Training and Anthropometry.

The students will be required to pay visits to schools, and to make observations on some of the foregoing.

Additional Reference Works : — Educational Problems (Hall). Cyclopaedia of Education (Monroe). The Teacher's Encyclopaedia. Special Reports on Education. American Commissioner's Reports. Bernard's Journal and Reports.

Lectures, Tutorials, &c. The course will occupy some thir ty weeks ot the year.

Eight or more lectures will be delivered weekly on some section of theory or method. Besides these one hour each week for at least fifteen weeks will be given to Hygiene, one period each week for at least twenty-four weeks, or the equivalent time, to Voice Production, and at least one hour each week to Experimental Education. At least three periods each week during the first term, and what additional time afterwards is deemed necessary, will be devoted to Blackboard work and illustration': Besides these therj will be one meeting each week for the discussion of essays or a seminar.

There will be a special test in Voice Production, and in Blackboard work. Every student, unless specially exempted, will be required to pass these.

Papers Set for Examination,

Paper A—Bases, Principles, Kindergarten and Prim, a 17 Grades.


Paper B—Education and The State, Systems, The Continuation and Secondary Schools, The University.

Paper C—History, Classic, Philosophy. Paper D--Experimental Education, Hygiene. Paper E—General Method, Special Methods. All students who commenced under Old Kegulations,

if taking Section A. will lie required to pass in Paper A, in Education and the State of Paper B, and in General Method of Paper £ ; and, if taking Section B, in Papers C and E.

All students who are unable to attend lectures should communicate with the Lecturer in Education before the beginning of the University year, when as far as possible arrangements will be made to guide them in Experimental Education,

Honours .

The work in Honours will embrace the Pass work and the following in addition: —

(a) The special study of an educational classic, such as : The study of The Republic in relation to other works of Plato, and in relation to the thought and practice of the Greeks ot the 5th and 4th centuries B.C., or the study of Spencer's Education in relation to his First Principles, and his Data ot Ethics, and in relation to the views of some other contemporary thinker.

(6) The special study of some problem of education, such a s : — Vocational Education. Moral Education. Religious Education. Girls' Education. Adolescence. The History of Education in Victoria or o ther

State, (c) Some special enquiry in connection with Experi

mental Education. In connection with each of these, students will he required to write papers, and to hand in one or more essays. A special thesis may also be set.

The special classical work for 1915 will be The Republic (Davies and Vaughan's translation).


Practical Work. (Pass and Honours).

1. No candidate for the subject of Education is allowed to enter for Examination unless he has completed the practical work prescribed by the Faculty of Arts (Reg. XXIa., Sect. 2).

2. The prescribed Practical Work consists of—

(a) Attendance a t Demonstration lessons, with subsequent discussion (18 lessons).

Attendance at Criticism lessons, with subsequent discussion (18 lessons).

Observation of teaching in such schools as may be directed. Minimum, 26 hours.

(b) Tlie giving of Criticism lessons from time to time as directed by the Lecturer.

(c) Teaching practice in the practising schools at the disposal of the Lecturer, or in other schools approved beforehand by the Faculty of Arts for this purpose. Amount to be determined according to previous experience (if any), and aptitude of student. Minimum, 90 hours; maximum, 120 hours.

In addition to teaching practice during lecture terms there will be three weeks of continuous practice, during which no lectures will be delivered.

(if) Unless the student is specially exempted by the Lecturer, attendance one hour a week for twenty-four weeks at classes in Voice Production, conducted by an approved teacher, and for at least twenty-four hours at the Teachers' College for blackboard writing, and blackboard drawing.

(e) Such attendance at Tutorials (for essays and discussion of method), and for discussion of teaching practice as may from time to time

. be directed. 3. Arrangements will be made for students to do

- some of their practice in approved secondary schools under the following conditions: —

(a) That each student he placed under an experienced form teacher.


(b) That the form teacher write in the student's " log book" a criticism on each day's work, and give oral criticism in addition.

(c) That a monthly report on each student's progress be sent to the Lecturer on Education by the Principal of the school.

(d) That each student be under the supervision of the Lecturer on Education and his staff.

4. Till further notice partial exemption from the practical work prescribed may be granted to the following classes of students, and under the conditions laid down in Sections 5, 6.

A (i.) All State School teachers who hold the Trained Teacher's Certificate of the Teachers' College, and whose reports have subsequently been uniformly " g o o d " or "very good."

(ii.) All State School teachers other than those included under section 4 A (i.) who have been teaching, either as head teachers, or as assistants, not less than five years, and whose record for the last tbree years has been uniformly " good " or " very good."

B All teachers in registered schools— (i.) Who have been registered " by virtue of em

ployment prior to the Act ," and have had five years' experience in teaching;

(ii.) Who, not having passed through a course in any institution recognised by the Council of Education, have been registered " on account of fitness to teach," and have had five years' experience in teaching;

(iii.) Who, not earlier than the first day of January, 1911, have complied with the regulation as to practice in teaching prescribed by, the Council ot Education for the registration of teachers in the Primary or Secondary grade.

5. Teachers under Section 4A, 4B, must— (a ) Be engaged in the full and regular practice of

their profession;

AKTS AND EDUCATION. 4 5 7

(b) Unless they are Head Teachers, be under the supervision of Head Teachers (or ot approved assistant teachers), who are willing to send monthly reports to the Lecturer on Education, as to their progress in the a r t of teaching;

(c) Undergo satisfactorily such tests in the practice of teaching as may be directed by t Lecturer on Education;

(</) Bo supervised regularly by the Lecturer on Education;

(c) Practice in the University High School for such time as is directed in Section 6.

6. Teachers under Section 4A (i.), (ii.), B (i.), (ii.), (iii.), will be required—

(a) If in the metropolitan area, to teach two weeks in the University High School, to attend ten criticism lessons (with discussion), and to spend eight hours in observation of teaching as directed;

(6) If in country districts, to teach one week in the Univerity High School to attend six criticism lessons (with discussion), and to spend five hours in the observation ot teaching, as directed

7. Ail applications for partial exemption under Section 4 must set out clearly in what group the applicant is included.

Applications must be addressed directly to the Regist rar , be accompanied by the necessary forms (form A and certificate of employment), and be sent in before March 31st. No application inade later than March Slst unll he considered.

8. The same theoretical and practical tests shall be passed by candidates working under the provision of Sections 4, 5, 6, as are prescribed for other Diploma students, but candidates under Section 6 (6) will be required to present two lessons for their final practical test.

9. Students who take the full course of practical t raining may be exempted from a final practical test if the quality of their teaching during the year has been satisfactory. All other candidates must present them-


selves for the practical tests iu teaching us a part of their examination, and must hand in to the Examiners Lesson Notes drawn up on approved principles. A Declaration—''I declare that the notes of tbe lesson which I am handing in to the examiners have been prepared entirely by myself, and tha t I have not given this lesson to any class at any time during the last twelve months, nor ever as a criticism lesson, or final lesson for the Diploma of Education "—must be sent in with the notes. The lesson presented for the practical test must he given to the middle or upper forms of a secondary school, or to the V U I t h grade ot a primary school.

Tlie University High School (Principal, Mr. L. J . Wrigley, M.A., Dip. Pedag. Lond.), in Lygon Street, Carlton, is the official secondary practising school. The Criticism lessons. Demonstration lessons, and us much of the secondary practice as possible are (iiken in this school.

TWO SUBJECTS CONCESSION.

Students engaged in the full and regular work of a calling or profession may, with the permission of the Faculty of Arts previously obtained, enter for and pass the subjects of each year of the Arts and Education courses two at a time. Applications for permission must be made before the end of the First Term in each year and must be accompanied by a full statement of the work in which the student is engaged and the hours during which he is occupied. The statement should be supported by a certificate by employer or head of public department.

ARTS. 459

SUBJECTS OF EXAMINATIONS FOR FINAL HONOURS AND SCHOLARSHIPS TO BE HELD IN THE FIRST TERM, 1916.

( A ) . — S C H O O L OV CLASSICAL PHILOLOGY.

Translation from Greek and Latin. Translation into Greek and Latin Prose and Verse. The History of Greek and Latin Literature. The Outlines of Greek and Roman History, The Chief Greek and Roman Antiquities, with Classical

Geography. The General Principles of Comparative Philology. The Comparative Grammar of the Greek and Latin Lan

guages. Questions on the following books :

Aristotle—Poetica. Longinus—De Sublimitate. Cicero—De Oratore, I. and II . Horace—Are Poetica.

The following books are suggested, but not prescribed, Those marked with an asterisk are specially recommended for practical use in the first instance—

For Comparative Philology and the Greek ami Lntin Languages—

Hrugmann—Kurze Vergleiclieude Grammatik der I. G. Sprachen.

Roberts—Introduction to Greek Epigraphy. Thompson-Greek and Latin Paleography. Rutherford—New Phrynichus.

•Gildersleeve and Lodge—Latin Grammar. Lindsay—The Latin Language. Riemann and Goelzer—Gramumire Compare* du grec

et du latin (especially the ' syntax) .

Fur Greek and Roman Literature—

'Murray—Ancient Greek Literature ) j . . 'Mackail—Latin Literature j

Mahaffy—History of Greek Classical Literature.

4 6 0 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1B18.

•Haigh—The Attic Theatre. Haigh—The Tragic Drama of the Greeks.

•Tyrrpll—Latin Poetry. Jebb—Growth and Influence of Greek Classical Poetry. Butcher—Aristotle's Theory of Poetry and Fine Art.

For History and Antiquities—

•A Companion to Greek Studies (Whibley). •A Companion to Latin Studies (Sandys). Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiquities (Smith). Gilbert's Greek Constitutional Antiquities. Ramsay (and Lanciani)—Manual of Roman Antiquities Becker's (Becker and Grill) Gallus (1883),and Charikles.

•Zimraern—The Greek Commonwealth. •Fowler—Social Life at Rome in the Age of Cicero. 'Tucker—Life in the Roman World of Nero and St.

Paul. Dill—Roman Society from Nero to Marcus Aurelius.

•Man—Pompeii: I ts Life and Art. •Qulick—The Life of the Ancient Greeks. . •Tucker—Life in Ancient Athens. Gardner—Grammar of Greek Art.

•Bnry's History of Greece > M , •Pelham's Outlines of Roman History ) fl,K,l,"i,8•

(li.)-NCHOOL OF HISTORY.

Ancient History. The History ot the British Empire. European History. The Principles of Political Economy. Industrial History. Constitutional History and Law, Part I., and Public

International Law. Subject for special s tudy: The Napoleonic Empire.

Books recommended :—

The books and references mentioned under Ancient History, History of the British Empire, Parts I. and II., European History, Political Economy, Constitutional History and Law, Part I., and Public International-Law.

ARTS. 461

Mominsen—History of Rome, Book I.; Book II. , ch. 1, 2, 3, 8, 9.

Dicey—The Relations of Law and Public Opinion in England.

Brown—The Underlying Principles of Modern leg is lation.

Cunningham—Growth ot English Industry and Commerce in Modern Times, parts 1 and 2.

Toynbee—Industrial Revolution. Armitage Smith—The Principles and Methods of Tax

ation. Hobson— The Industrial System. Ingram—History of Political Economy. The articles Economics and Sociology in the eleventh

edition of the Encyclopaedia Britannica. Books recommended for the subject for special study, in

• addition to those mentioned under British History, Part IL, and European History :—

Cambridge Modern History, Vol. IX. Holland Rose—Making of Modern Europe.

Constitutional History and Law, Part I. Candidates will be expected to extend their reading so as

to include the substance of Lowell's Government of England and Anson's Law and Custom of the Constitution, a general view of the Constitution of the Commonwealth of Australia such as is to be found in Bryce's Studies in History aud Jurisprudence, and a special knowledge of the Organisation of the Commonwealth Government, as contained in Moore's Commonwealth of Australia, Part IIL, chapters i.-vi. Candidates should also have a general acquaintance with the principal modern systems of government, such as may be obtained from "Modern Constitutions in Outline," by Leonard Alston.

Public I liter national-Law. ' ' Au advanced study .of the Pass work.

(C).-BCHOOI. OK PHILOSOPHY.

Papers will be set in the following subjects: — I. FORMAL LOGIC.

Descartes—Begulae (Ed. Haldane and Ross, Vol,

4 6 2 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1«1«.

The Logic of Hegel (tr. Wallace),—ch. i.-vi.. and ch. vii., §§84-98.

The Encyclopaedia of the Philosophical Sciences (Vol. 1. on Logic. Articles by Royce, Couturat and Losskij).

2. IHHTJCTI-VB Looic.

Sigwart—Methodology (Logic, Par t I I I . , Introduc-. tion and §§72, 73, 78, 96-97a, 100, 105).

McDougall—Body and Mind, ch. vii.-xxiv. Merz—The History of European Thought in the

Nineteeth Century. Vol. I. and II .

3. PSYCHOLOGY.

Stout : Analytic Psychology (Bk. I I . , ch. i.-vi.). James : Principles of Psychology (ch.'xxi.-xx.vi.). Mitchell: Stnicture and Growth of the Mind.

4. HISTOBY OF PHILOSOPHY.

VVindeiband: History of Philosophy (Introduction, Part I. and Part IV., ch. 2—Part VI., ch. I).

In addition a general acquaintance with the third volume of Merz's History will be assumed.

5. MOBALCPHILOSOPHY.

Plato—Republic. Green; Prolegomena to Ethics. (Hks. I-111 ) Bosanquet: The Philosophical Theory of the State. Hobhouse— Development and Purpose.

ii. METAPHYSICS.

K a n t : Critique of Pure Reason. Bradley: Appearance and Reality. Bergson: Creative Evolution (ch. i.-iii.). Eucken: Main Currents of Modern Thought. (Sect.

A and B).

(D).-SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICS.

The subjects prescribed for Honours in Pure Mathematics Parts I., I I . , I I I . , and in Mixed Mathematics, Parts I., II., I I I .

A UTS. 463

(E).-SCH0OL OK ENGLISH.

The Examination in 1913 will include : — (1) Essay. (2) Translation from Old and Middle English. (3) History of tbe English Language. (4) History of English Literature and Criticism. (o) Shakespeare. (tt) Special Author—Milton.

The following books are prescribed in Old and Middle English, and the History of the English (language :—Sweet's Anglo-Saxon Reader (as for English Language and Philology); Emerson's Middle English Reader; Beowulf (lines 1-1888) Emerson : History of the English Language.

The following plays ot Shakespeare are set for texl.ua-study :—Romeo and Juliet, Hamlet, Macbeth.

In the History of English criticism candidates will be examined niiiinly on ' the work ot Sidney, Ben Jonson, Dryden, Johnson, Coleridge and Arnold.

(F).-SCHOOL OK MODERN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURES.

The Examination for 1016 will include two of the following :—

(o) ENGLISH— As for (E), (1), (3), (4), (5) above.

FRENCH— Composition and Essay Writing. Translation from French. Viva voce Examination in French, including Phonetics. History of French Language and Literature. Histoire de la Litterature francaise (Pet i lde Julleville). A Special Period of French Literature: La Poesie

lyrique de Villon a E. Rostand.

GERMAN— A German Essay. Translation ot unseen passages. General History of German Literature in outline. German History, Geography, and Institutions. A Special Period ot German Literature: Goethe and

Schiller, 1794-1805. Outlines of the History of the German Language.

http://texl.ua

464 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, HUB.

EXAMINATIONS FOR 'I'HE DEGREE OF MASTER

•OF ARTS TO BE HELD IN THE FIRST TERM, 1916.

(A).-SCHOOL OF CLASSICAL PHILOLOGY.

The papers for Final Honours in Greek and Latin Literature , Greek and Roman History and Antiquities; two papers with passages tor translation and explanation from portions of Greek and of Latin authors at the option of the Candidate, viz. -.—

One iu List A, or

Two in List B,

) itii j One in List 0,

or Two in List 1).

'The Kditiotu recommended for nut are : Aristotle Kthirs (Grant, or Stewart).

Politics (Jowett, or Susemiht and Hick-). Rhetoric (Cope and Sandys).

Plato Republic (Admn, or Jowett). (Jorpins (Thompson).

Thucydides (Poppo, or the several books in Macnitllnn Series).

Demosthenes De Corona (Goodwin). De Falsa Legutione (Shflleto). And lotion and Ti moo rates (Wayte). Private Speeches (Paley mid Sandvs). Olynthiacs (Sandys).

/Ksdiylus Prometheus Vinctus (Sikes and Willson). Seven against Thebes (Tucker). Choephori (Tucker). Supplices (Tucker). Agamemnon (Headlam). Kumenides (VerrnH).

Sophocles The several plays (Jebb). Aristophanes The several pta.» s (HlaydeM).

Achurnians (Uennie). Wasps (Starkie). KroK» (Tucker).

Homer ' Iliad (lêal). Odyssey (Merry, or .Munro).

Xenophon Hellenica I. and II. (Kdwards). Tacitus Annals (Furneaux).

Gerniania and Ajrricola (Furneaux). . Histories (Spooner).

Cicero He Oratore (Wilkins). The separate speeches named (Pitt Prem •. De Officii* (llolden). De Senectuto, De Amicitia (Reid). Dc Finihus (Reid). Tusculan Disputations (KUhner).

DKliKKK OF M.A. 465

Virgil .ttneid (Coiiington), Horace (Wickhain). Juvenal (Mayor, or Hinaller work by Duff). Persius (Conliiyton). Lucretius (Munro, or separate books by Duff). Plautns Mostellaria (Soniienschein).

Captivi (Lindsay, larger edition). Miles Oloriosus (Tyrrell). Trinuminus (Pitt Press).

Terence Adelphi and Heautontiiiiorunienos (Ashmore).

Translations recommended: Arintotle Politics and Rhetoric (Welldon).

Ethics (Williams), Plato (Jowett). Thucydides (Jowett). Demosthenes (Kennedy). .-Eschyliis (as rendered in the editions mentioned). Sophocles (in Jebli's editions). Homer Iliad (l.anx, I.eal und Myers).

Odyssey (Itntcher and I^n^). Tacitus Annals (Kamsay).

Histories, Gerniania and Agricola (Fyfe). Juvenal (Leeper). Persius (in Coninyton'ri edition). Lucretius (Munro).

A. A ristotle. E t h i c s , w i th P la to ' s Gorg i a s . Aristot le . , Po l i t i c s , with any. one Book of Thucy-*

d ides . A r is tot le . Rhe to r i c , w i th Demosthenes d e Corona

a n d AEsc/iines in C t e s i p h o u t e m , or o t h e r O r a t i o n s of Demos thenes of e q u a l l e n g t h in t h e a g g r e g a t e .

Pla to . Repub l i c . Thucydides. Books I . - I V . Thucydides. Books V . - V I I I . , wi th Xeiiophon, H e l l e n -

ica. Books I. a n d I I .

H. ASschylns. T h e O r e s t e a n Tr i logy a n d one o t h e r I ' l ay . Sophocles. ( E d i p u s Coloneus , ( E d i p u s T y r a n n u g ,

An t igone , a n d one o t h e r P l a y . A n y four p lays . I l i a d . Books I . - X I I . I l i a d , Books X I I I . - X X I V . Odyssey , Books I . - X I I . Odyssey , Books X I I I . - X X I V .

Aris tophanes Homer. Homer. Homer. Homer.

Livy. Livy. Livy.

Books I.-V. Books VI.-X. Books XXI.-XXVI1.

466 DKTAILS OF S r i U K C T S , 1910.

Tacitus Tacitus Cicero.

Cicero.

Cicero. Cicero. Cicero. Virgil. Horace. Juvenal. Lucretius Plautns.

A rtnals. Histories, Germauia and Agricola. De Oratore, with either In Verreu*

Divinatio, Actio I. and Actio I I . r lib 2, or in Catilinam, in Pisonemr and in Vatiuium, or pro I'lancio, pro Murena, and pro Milone.

lie Officiis, de Senectute, de Ami--) citia.

He Kepublica and de Legibus. Tusculanee Disputationes. De Finihus Ronorum et Malorum.J jEne id . The whole. Satires (except 2, (5. 9) aud Persius. The whole. Miles Gloriosus, Mostellaria, Captivi,.

Trinummiis, with Terence—Adelphir Heautontimoi'iimenos.

Any two.

( I i ) . -SCHOOL OK HISTOKV.

The History of France. British Colonial Policy. The Principles of Political Economy and their Pnicticai

Applications (as stated by the principal Economic Writers).

Constitutional History and Law, and Public International Law (as for Final Honours).

Books recommended : — Mill—Political Economy, Books III . , IV., V. Kitchin—History of France. Fournier—Life of Napoleon. Bodley—France. * Professor Bastable—I'ublic Finance. Professor Smart—The Return to Protection. Lord Avebury—Free Trade. Macgivgor—Industrial Combination. Egerton—History of British Colonial Policy Webb—History of Trade Unionism. Smart—Economic Annals ot 19th Century. Hobhouse—Social Evolution and Political Theory Soager—Social Insurance. Clark—Labour Movement iu Australasia.

DEGRRK OF M.A. 4 6 7

(C).-8CHOOL OF PHILOSOPHY.

Any four of the Papers set for the Final Honour Examination in the same Term.

(D).—SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICS.

Candidates may present either of the two following groups : —

1. PIIRK MATHRHATICS—

. Differential and Integral Calculus. Differential Equations. Analytical Geometry.

2. MIXED MATHEMATICS —

Theory of Potential. Hydrodynamics. Sound. Elasticity.

1'ext-book recommended:—

A. G. Webster.—Dynamics of Rigid Elastic and Fluid Bodies.

(E).—SCHOOL OF MODERN LANGUAGES AND I.ITKRATURE.

ENGLISH ; The Examination in 1916 will include— The Papers on the subjects (1) (3) (4) (5) set for t he

Final Honours Examination in the same term. FKENCH OB GERMAN—

The papers on the subjects set tor the Final Honour Examination in the same term together with the viva voce Examination.

.80

46& DETAILS OK SUBJECTS, IMla.

F AC U I /J'Y OF SCJ ENC K.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDA

TIONS FOR THE ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS

TO BE HELD IN THE FOURTH TERM 1913,

AND FIRST TERM lillo.

For PUBK MATHEMATICS, MIXED MATHEMATICS, PSYCHOLOGY LOGIC and ETHICS, ENGLISH, FRENCH, GERMAN, LATIN, GREEK—see under Faculty of Arts.

HONOUR WORK.

Except in the cases of subjects where special details are published, the Examination for Honours will be on the lines indicated for Pass, but candidates will require to have read more advanced work than for Pass, and to attain a higher standard and show more detailed knowledge.

For Subjects of Examination f..r FINAL HONOURS AND

SCHOLARSHIPS—FIRST TERM, 191(5. see Now

Regulation VII., Sections 1(1 and II.

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY—PART 1.

Natural Philosophy, subject matter of. General methods and principles.

Measurement of space, mass, and time. Position. Displacement. Vectors. Vector quantities

and their geometrical representation. Motion. Velocity. Acceleration. Simple kinematic

formula;. Newton's laws of motion. Inertia. Force. Momentum.

Impulse. Stress. Weight. Falling bodies. Atwood's machine. Work and Energy. Kinetic and potential energy.

Storage and transfer of energy. Power.

SCIENCE. 469

Composition and resolution of displacements, velocities, accelerations, and forces.

Moment or Torque. Couple. Centre of Gravity. Equilibrium. Friction of solids. H e simple machines.

Uniform rotation round a fixed axis. Centrifugal Force. The conical pendulum. The simple pendulum. Properties of matter. Law ot Gravitation. Density and Specific Gravity. Fluid pressure and its measurement. Barometers,

manometers. Simple Hydrostatic machinery. Capillary phenomena. Elasticity ot gases. Boyle's law. Air pumps.

The general effects of Heat. Temperature. Thermometry. Expansion of solids, liquids, and gases. The gaseous laws. Absolute temperature. The gas

thermometer. .Specific heat. Calorimetry. Mechanical equivalent of

heat. First law ot Thermodynamics. Fusion, evaporation, and ebullition. Latent heat.

Vapour pressure. Production of low temperatures.

Hygrometry. Conduction, convection, and radiation of heat.

General properties of magnets and laws of the mutual action of poles and magnets.

The magnetic field. Lines of force. Induction. Magnetisation. Terrestrial magnetism.

Fundamental phenomena ot Friclioual Electricity. -Laws of electric action. Quantity of Electricity. The electric field. Lines of force. Potential. Electromotive force. Distribution of electricity on conductors. Capacity of

a conductor. Energy of a charged conductor. .30A

4 7 0 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 11>1S.

Leydeus. Machines. The quadrant electrometer.

Current electricity. Simple galvanic cell. Practical cells and batteries. Current and its effects. Measurement of current.

Electromotive force aud its measurement. Standard cells.

Ohm's law. Resistance and its measurement. Measurement <>f electric power. Heating of conductors by current. Joule's law. Mutual action of currents. Electrolysis. Storage cells. Electro-magnets. Electro-magnetic iudiictiou. Leii/.'s aud Maxwell's

laws. Self and mutual induction. Transformer; induction coil; high frequency coil.

Electric discharge. Riintgen rays. Alternating and direct cun-ent dynamos und direct

current motors.; elementary treatment. Arc aud incandescent lamps. Electric furnace. Telegraph and Telephone.

Vibration. Wave motion. Their graphic' representation. Transmission ot wave motion. Longitudinal and transverse vibrations. Relation between wave length, frequency, and velocity.

Light. Velocity of light. Intensity of light. Photometry. Reflection anil refraction. Mirrors, prisms and lenses. Dispersion. Spectrum analysis. Microscopes and telescopes., The eye as an optical instrument. Colour of light and of natural bodies. Sound.—Nature of sound. Noise and musical note. Sources of sound. Strings and organ pipes. Sympathetic Resonance. Velocity of sound. Reflection ot sound waves. Inter

ference of waves. Beats. Measurement of pitch ; the siren. Musical intervals. Diatonic scale.

Lnhnrntory Work.—The various measurements involved in the above course.

SCIENCE. 471

For Honours. Text Books recommended:—

Elementary Mechanics—Lodge. Hydrostatics—Sanderson.

Heat (for Pass)—Glazebrook or Wright or Edser; (for Honours), Edser.

Magnetism and Electricity—Brooks and Peyser. Light and Sound (for Pass)—Gregory and Hadley,

Classbook of Physics, Parts IV. and V.; (for Honours) Topliam, Light and Stewart, The new Matriculation Sound; or Stewart and Satterle.v, Senior Sound and Light.

Practical Physics—Glazebrook and Shaw.

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY—PART II.—

Properties of Matter ; Heat; Geometfieal and Experimental Optics : Sound ; Electricity and Magnetism.

Practical Work.—The experiments and measurements relating to Parts 1. and I I . eoui-aes.

Text-books recommended:— Properties of Matter—Wagstaff. Heat—Edser. Light—Emtage—Advanced Science Text Book. Sound—Catch pool. Magnetism and Electricity—Brooks and Poyser. Technical Electricity—Davidge and Hutchinson. Practical Physics—Glazebrook and 84iaw.

, For Honours,

A fuller treatment of the subjects specified aliove for tbe Pass Examination, together with

Elementary Electrical Theory.

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY—PART III.—

Heat. Thermodynamics. Light. Electricity and Magnetism, experimental and theore

tical, including tbe theory and construction of Dynamos, Motors, Transformers and Storage Batteries.

4 7 2 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 11)15.

Spherical and Practical Astronomy. Elementary Physical Astronomy. Astronomical Instruments.

Practical IVonfc.—Experiments aud measurements relating to Parts I., II . , and I I I . courses.

For Honours.

A fuller treatment of the subjects specified aliove for the Pass Examination, together with

General Physics.

Text.-hooks recommended;— Heat—Poynting and Thomson. Light—Emtage. Electricity and Magnetism —J. J. Thomson. Dynamo-Electric Machinery — S. P. Thompson

(selected portions). Physical Measurements—Kohlrausch or Watson. General Physics—Edser. (For Honours). Introduction to Astronomy—Moulton. Astronomy—Godfray. Astrophysics (selected portions)—Frost.

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY— Final Honours.

Additional Text-books:— Theory of Light—Schuster. Theory of Heat—Preston. Absolute measurements in Electricity and Mag

netism (for reference only)—Gray. Modern Electrical Theory—Campbell. Radio-active Substances and their Radiations—

Rutherford.

CHEMISTRY.—PART I.—

INORGANIC.—Elementary Chemical Physics and Inorganic Chemistry.

ORGANIC—The constitution and chemical relations of the chief hydrocarbons and their simpler derivatives containing halogens, oxygen, sulphur, and nitrogen.

SCIENCE. 473

Laboratory Work.

The laboratory work will include simple qualitative analysis, exercises to illustrate the principles discussed in the lectures, and simple exercises in volumetric analysis, including acidimetry and alkalimetry, oxidizing and reducing actions, etc.

Text-books ;—

Alex. Smith's or Hollenmuu's Inorganic Chemistry I.upton's or Dobbin's Chemical Arithmetic Clowes's Elementary Practical Chemistry Cohen's Organic Chemistry.

For consultation—

Roscoe and Schorlemmer's Treatise on Chemistry Vols. I. and II.

For practical work student* are required to provide themselves with apparatitN in ufr-ordimc-e with n lint which will be pouted in the Laboratory

CHEMISTRY.—PART II .

Advanced Inorganic and General Chemistry.

Text-books: —

Walker's Introduction to Physical Chemistry; and Alex. Smith's or Mellor's Inorganic Chemistry.

For consultation:—

The volumes in the Physical Chemistry Series edited by Sir W. Ramsay.

Roscoe and Schorlemmer's Treatise on Chemistry, Vols. I . and I I .

Laboratory Work.—Simple quantitative analysis, volumetric and gravimetric. The qualitative examination of alloys and of mixtures containing compounds of the more common metals and inorganic radicles.

Hooks recommended :—

Treadwell's Analytical Chemistry; and (for consultation)—Ostwald's Foundations of Analytical Chemistry; Treadwell's Analytical Chemistry;


Sutton's Volumetric Analysis; Fresenius's Qualitative Analysis; Fresenius's Quantitative Analysis, Vol. I.

CHEMISTRY.—PART III .—

Organic and General and Advanced Inorganic Chemistry.

Text-books:— Those recommended for Par t I I . , aud also the following: Bernthsen's or Hollemann's Organic Chemistry.

Laboratory Work.—Qualitative and quantitative analysis, inorganic and organic. Preparations of pure substances. Physico-chemical measurements,?.^., determinations of melting and boiling points, specific gravity, vapour density,vapour pressure, heat ot neutralisation, conductivity, etc,

Books recommended:—

Those recommended for Part II., aud Sudborough and James's Practical Organic Chemistry and Pring's Laboratory Exercises in Physical Chemistry. Also the following (for consultation) — Fresenius's Quantitative Analysis, Vol. II.; Dittmar's Quantitative Analysis; Crookes's Select Methods in Chemical Analysis; Washington's Rock Analysis; Mitchell's Manual of Assaying; Traube's Fhysico-Chemical Methods; Schellen's Spectrum Analysis; and Spencer's Experimental Course in Physical Chemistry.

ZOOLOGY—PART I.

(") Lectures.

The elements of vertebrate and invertebrate morphology.

The structure and life history of the Frog in detail The structure, life history and functions of uni

cellular animals to illustrate important points in the function and structure of the cell.

The ovum and the sperm. Maturation and fertilisation.

\ \

SCIENCE. 475

General account of the following phyla with descriptions of the structure and life history of typical examples, Protozoa, Porifera, Ccelenterata, Platodes, Nematodes, Annnlata, Arthropoda, Mollusca, Echinodermata, Chor-data. The examples will be chosen so as to illustrate, as far as possible, the Zoology and Natural History of Australia. •

The outlines of development of the bird, and of the foetal membranes in Mammalia.

The elements of vertebrate histology.

(b) Laboratory work and Demonstrations—

The examination by means ot dissections and preparations of examples of the chief types of animals and of the stiwctures dealt with in the lectures.

Text-books— Lloyd Morgan—Animal Biology. Marshall—The Frog (not earlier than eighth edition). Marshall . and Hurst—'Practical Zoology (Sixth

edition).

Keference books—

The Biology of the Frog—S. J. Holmes. Comparative Anatomy of Animals—G. C. Bourne. Outlines of Zoology—Thomson.

Students must be provided with the following :—

Microscope, with low and high powers, magnifying at least 60-450 diameters; to be approved by the Professor.

Note books. Box of coloured crayons.

Z O O L O G Y - P A R T II —

One of the following two courses :—

Section A.—Comparative Anatomy and Embryology of the Vertebral a.

The structure of the following systems in vertebrate animals, treated from a comparative point of view: (a) Integument and structures associ-


ated with it, (b) skeleton, (c) muscles (in outline), (d) organs of nutrition, (e) organs of respiration, ( / ) organs of circulation, (g ) urino-genital organs, (A) nervous system and sense organs.

In the laboratory typical vertebrates illustrative of the lecture course will be examined.

A course of vertebrate organogeny, in which the development of the various organs in a frog, a bird, and a mammal, will be dealt with so far as possible in the laboratory.

Text-books:— Comparative Anatomy of Vertebrates, Kingsley. Structure of Man, Wiedersheim. Development of _ the Human Body—McMurrich, 4th

edition. Development of the Chick—Lillie.

For reference:— Atlas d'Embryologie, Duval.

Section B.—Comparative Anatomy of the Inverteliratu.

In the lectures the morphology and life histories of typical examples of the chief divisions of the Invertebrata will be treated, with special reference to the Australian Fauna. In the Laboratory a series of forms illustrating the lectures will be studied.

Text books :— Text Uook of Zoology—Parker and Haswell, 2nd edit.

,. „ ,, Sedgwick.

Books for reference :— Traite de Zoologie Concrete, etc.—Delage et Herouard. Treatise on Zoology—ed. by E. Ray Lankester. Cambridge Natural History.

ZOOLOGY—PART III .—

One of the following two courses :—

Section A.—Comparative Anatomy ot tho Invertebrata, and Distribution of Animals.

Section B.—Comparative Anatomy and Embryology of the Vertebrata, and Distribution of Animals.

SCIENCE. 477

These courses will consist of a fuller treatment of Sections A and B, as dealt with in Zoology II . , together with a course of lectures on the distribution of recent and fossil animals, with special reference to Australasia.

Candidates take one Section only in each year.

Candidates who have taken Section A in the.second year must take Section A in the third year, and similarly with Section B.

I t is to be distinctly understood that the second year's work will depend upon a knowledge of the first, and t h e third year's work upon a knowledge of tha t of both the first and second years, and tha t any papers set will of necessity include questions requiring sucn knowledge.

Text books (in addition to those of the Second Year):— Distribution of Animals. Heilprin ( Int . Sci. Series).

Books for reference (in addition to those of Second Year): Embryology. Korschelt and Heider, English Transla

tion . Atlas d'Embryologie. Duval. Island Life. Wallace. Distribution of Animals. Wallace. Geographical History of Mammals., Lydekker. General Physiology. Verworn (English Translation

by Lee). The Origin of the European Fauna. Scharf.

BOTANY—PART I.—

Chemical aud physical constitution of the plant-cell,. Cell-division. Osmosis and osmotic pressure.

Culture, reproduction, morphology and nutrition of bacteria (parasitic, saprophytic, nitrifying, etc.). Ferments and fermentation.

The structure, reproduction and life history of an alga (Spirogyra, Hormi/sira or Funis).

The structure, reproduction and life history of Yeast, Mucor, Penicillium, Eurotium, or Aspergillus.

The origin of Parasitism. The structure, reproduction and life history of

Marchantia, Pteris, and Selaginella.

4 7 8 DETAILS OP SUBJECTS, 1915.

Chlorophyll and photosynthesis. Nutrition. Respiration and the gaseous exchanges in green and non-green plants.

Seed and seedling. Germination. Translocation. Growth. Irritability.

Origin of organs. Structure and function of Leaf, Stem and Root.

The flower and fruit.' Pollination and seed dispersal.

Text-books:— Scott's Structural Botany ot Flowering and

Flowerless Plants. Ewart 's Matriculation Botany.

Laboratory work :— The structure of the above types. Elementary plant

anatomy and histology. The structure of the flower, fruit and seed.

B O T A N Y - P A R T I I .

(1) P lan t Physinlitgy (section A or B) (see below). <2) P l an t Pathology.

General outlines ot: (a) diseases and defects not due to parasitic organisms. (6) diseases due to parasitic organisms—(i.) Bac

teria, (ii.) Myxoniycctes, (iii.) fungi— Phycomycetes, Ascomycetes, Basidiomy-cetes. Fungi imperfect!.

i.'A) Systematic Botany. Comprises the general classification of plants and a

systematic account ot the more important natural orders, paying special attention to—

(a) Cultivated, medicinal, food, pasture, and poison plants.

Weeds, their nature, dispersal and eradication. Plant Distribution.

(6) (o)

BOTANY—PART H I . —

(1) P l an t Physiology (section A or B) (see below). <2) P lan t Geography.

SCIENCE. 4 7 ^

(3) Cryptogams and Gymnosperms. (a) Schizophyta—Cyanophyceae (Bacteria dealt with

under P lan t Pathology). (b) Thallophyta—(i.) Algae—Chlorophyceae, Diato-

mnceae, Characeae. Phaeophyceae, Khodophy-ceae; (ii.) Fungi (see Plant Pathology).

(o) Bryophyta—Hepaticae, Musci. (d) Pteridophyta—Filicineae, Hydropterideae, Equi-

sitineae, Lyconodincae, Isoetineae. (e) Pteridnspermae-(f) Spermaphyta.—(i.) Gyumosperras—Cycadineae,

Coniferineae, Cordaitineae; (ii.) Angiospermae (Systematic Botany, 2nd year).

Details of P l an t Physiology— Section A,—Absorption, osmosis and osmotic pres

sure, nutrit ion, translocation, food storage, metabolism, transpiration, respiration, gain and loss of energy, excretion.

Section B.—Growth, reproduction and regeneration, the mechanics of tissues, resistance to extremes, the various forms of noetic, tropic and tactic irritability, heredity, variation andT evolution.

Practiced Work in 2nd and 3rd years includes: — (a) Experiments in Plant Physiology on absorption,

nutrition, translocation, transpiration and flow ot sap, respiration, growth of seedlings, effect ot poisons, and ot extreme conditions, mechanics of tissues, heliotropism, geotrop-ism, and chemotaxis. Experimental plot methods.

(b) Structure ot types of Schizophyta, Thallophyta, Bryophyta, Pteridophyta, Pteridospermae and Spermaphyta.

(c) Examination of commoner weeds, pasture, medicinal, poison and food plants.

(d) Field excursions will be held at times arranged throughout the course.

4 8 0 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, WIS.

Text Books: — Text Book of Botany—Strasburger. Physiology of Plants—Reynolds-Green. Weeds of Victoria—Ewart.

For Reference: — Goebel's Outlines; Pfeffer's Physiology of P lan ts ;

Schimpers Plant Geography; Fossil Botany by Solms-Laubach, Scott or Seward; Goebel's Organography; Massee's Diseases of Cultivated Plants and Trees.

<JEOLOGY—PART I

This course has been arranged to suit the requirements of students of Science, Arts, Agriculture, Architecture and of Civil and Mining Engineering.

Tectonic Geology-—The study of rock masses in the Held. Folds and faults. Mountain stnicture, Isostasy.

Dynamical Geolony.—The forces operating upon and below the earth's surface. Wind, water, aud ice as geological agents; chemical and mechanical agents of denudation. Earth movements, volcanoes.

Cosmical Geology.—The earth as a mass- its origin, shape, relation to the heavenly bodies, etc.

Physiographic Geology.—Including the origin of land forms, etc

The Geology of Water Supply. The Elements of Mineralogy, Petrology and Palteontn-

Zoji/.-.-Iucluding the study of common minerals, rocks and fossils.

The Elements of Stratigraphy.—Illustrated mainly by the geology of Victoria.

Laboratory Work—The work in the laboratory will include the study of geological maps and the construction of geological sections; the examination and determination of hand specimens of crystals, minerals, rocks, and fossils.

SCIENCE. 481

Field Work-—There will be seven field excursions in geology. These will be held on Saturdays during the session.

Apparatus.—Students must supply themselves with a geological hammer, pocket lens and specimen bag.

Text Books: — W. B. Scott—An Introduction to Geology.

For Reference: — A. R. Dwerryhouse—Geological Maps and Their

Use (Edward Arnold). J. Geikie—Structural aud Field Geology (Macmillau). Chamberlin and Salisbury—Geology, Vol. I . Pro

cesses (John Murray).

GEOLOGY, PART I I .— Cri/staliof/rapny.—The characters of crystals, their

•{eometrical and optical properties, their symmetry and classification.

Mineralogy-—Tho physical, chemical, crystallo-graphic and optical character of minerals, their classification and the description of the more important species.

Petrology—The microscopic characters of rocks. The classification ot rocks. The principles that control tbe solidification of rocks from a molten state.

Stratigraphy.—The principles of stratigraphical geology. The interpretation ot the evidence of fossils. The Archaean and Palaeozoic rocks and their general distribution throughout the world. '

Physiography, Palaeontology, etc.—More advanced work than that dealt with in Par t I .

Laboratory Work.—The laboratory work will be arranged so that the student may gain a practical knowledge of the subjects dealt with in lecture.

Field Work-—Nine excursions will be held during the year, of which three will be.held during the last two days of the third term and the Monday following, and the remaining six will be held on Saturdays during the session.

4 8 2 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, li»lf,.

Apparatus-—In addition to the apparatus required for Geology, Par t I . , students must supply themselves with a blowpipe and six inches of platinum wire and a petrological .microscope, to be approved by the Professor.

Text Books: — Hatch—Text-book of Petrology (George Allen). Dana, E. S.—Text-book of Mineralogy (Wiley). Chapman, F.— Australasian Fossils (Geo. Robertson

and Co.). For Reference: —

Hatch and Bastall—Petrology ot the Sedimentary Bocks (Geonre Allen).

Chamberlin and Salisbury—Geology, 3 vols. (John Murray).

Geikie—Text-book of Geology, 2 vols. (Macmillan). Lake and Rastall—Text-b5ok of Geology (Arnold).

GEOLOGY, PART I I I .—

The lectures and laboratory work will deal with: — Advanced Optical Miiteralogy. Advanced Petrology, including the origin and dif

ferentiation of rock magmas. Advanced Palaeontology. Stratigraphy.—The Mesozoic and Kainozoic rocks

and their general distribution throughout the world.

Mining Geoloiry-—The character, formation and distribution of mineral, coal and oil deposits. The chief features of the principal mining fields of the world. The mining fielos of

' Australia in more detail. Field Work—Twelve- excursions will be held during

the year, of which three will be held during the first three days of the third term, aud three during the last two days of the third term and the Monday following. The remaining six excursions will be held on Saturdays during the session.

Text Books:

Harker—The Natural History of Igneous Rocks (Methuen).

Iddings—Rock Minerals (Wiley).

SCIENCE. 483

Thomas and McAlister—Geology of Ore Deposits. Chapman, F.—Australasian Fossils (Geo. Robertson

and Co) .

For Reference: — Miers—Mineralogy (Macmillan). von Zittel—Text-book of Palaeontology (Macmil

lan). Beck and Weed—The Nature of Ore Deposits, 2

vols. (Engineering and Mining Journal). Posepny—Genesis of Ore Deposits (A.I.M.E.). Ore Deposits—A Discussion (Engineering and

Mining Journal). Kemp—Ore Deposits ot the United States and

Canada (Wiley). Pittman—Mineral Resources of New South Wales.

Books for reference describing special mining fields will be announced during the lecture course.

PHYSIOLOGY—PART I.—

Practical Hio-cliemistry—The reactions of carbohydrates, fats, lipoids and proteins

The composition of the chief tissues, organs and body fluids and the reactions ot their more important constituents.

The composition of foods. Simple experiments on digestion and respiration. Practical Biophysics—The response of muscle and

nerve to stimulus, alterations in the response produced by physical and chemical, agents.

The nature of the heart-beat; the influence on the heart and arteries of physical and chemical agents.

Reflex action. Systematic Physiology—The standard is that given by

the lectures. Students are advised to read Osborne's Elements of Animal Physiology.

For practical work students are required to provide themselves with apparatus in accordance with a list which will be posted in the Laboratory.

.81

4 8 4 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, lltl.i

PHYSIOLOGY—PART II.—

Practical Biochemistry—Quantitative estimation of tbe chief components of the body and of the chief ingredients of food and excreta.

Practical Hiophysirs—The subjects of the second year, but more advanced and with graphic records.

Experiments on respiration with analyses of air.

Experiments on special senses.

Systematic Physiology—Maiuiualian physiology, including the central nervous system, of the standard indicated by Starling's Principles of Human Physiology.

SCIENCE. 485

DETAILS OP SUBJECTS FOR DIPLOMA OF ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY.

F I R S T EXAMINATION.

Details the same as for the Final Honour Examination in Chemistry for the B.Sc. degree.

FINAL EXAMINATION.

The Candidate will be required to show a general acquaintance with the problems and methods of technical analysis, and will be subjected to a more stringent examination in one branch selected by himself, and approved by the Faculty of Science. Such selection must be notified in writing' to the Registrar not less than three months before the time ot entry for the examination.

Candidates may, when entering for this examination, submit any original chemical work which they have published or propose to publish; and such work shall be taken into account by the examiners, but shall not be accepted in lieu'of the Examination.

4 8 6 ' DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 11)15.

FACULTY OF LAW.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD IN THE FOURTH TERM, 1915, AND FIRST TERM, 191C.

For Subjects of First and Second Years see under Arts.

• NOTK.—A consolidation of the statutes ot Victoria is now proceeding. When the consolidated statutes are brought into operation references to existing Victorian statutes must be understood to apply to the corresponding provisions in the Consolidated Statutes.

CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY AND LAW, PART I., AND PUBLIC INTERNATIONAL LAW—

Pass. s-.

CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY AND LAW, PART 1.— The Government of the British Empire, including a

comparison ot British Institutions with those of other countries. The subject will be treated historically so far as is necessary to establish and demonstrate the principles of Constitutional Law and Practice.

. Students are recommended to read— Dicey's Law of the Constitution. Bagebot's English Constitution. Low's Governance of England. Hearn's Government of England. Maitland's Constitutional History ot England,

For reference— Anson's Law and Custom of the Constitution. Lowell's Government of England. Jenks's Government of Victoria. Moore's Commonwealth ot Australia.

LAWS. 487

Reference should also be made to some work on Constitutional History, e.g.—

Maitland's Constitutional-History of England; and for Australia—

Jenks's History of the Australasian Colonies.

Students will find it useful before beginning the course to read Marriott's English Political Institutions.

PUBLIC INTERNATIONAL L A W —

1. A general survey of the growth of International Law in Europe.

2. The Principles ot International Law as treated in Lawrence's Principles, or Walker's Science of International Law.

CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY AND LAW, PART II.—

The material and formal sources of English and Australian Law, including the application of Case Law and the construction of Statutes.

Students may refer to— Pollock's First Book of Jurisprudence, Part I I .

= Blackstone's Commentaries, Introduction, sec. 3. Holdsworth's History of English Law, Vol I. Jenks's History of English Law. Webb's Imperial liaw.

CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY AND LAW, PART III.—

The Constitution of the Commonwealth of Australia

Students are recommended to read Moore's Commonwealth of Australia (Students' Edition).

For a general view of the subject they should also read (if possible before lectures begin) Bryce's Studies in History and Jurisprudence, Vol. I., Essay 8.

JURISPRUDENCE, INCLUDING ROMAN LAW—

The history, nature aud classification of law and legal phenomena, with reference principally to Roman and English Law.

4b8 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, IDIS.

• Students are recommended to read— Sohui's Institutes of the Roman Law (Ledlie'

. translation with Grueber's Introduction). Salmond's Jurisprudence.

Pollock's First Book of Jurisprudence, Part I., should be read if possible before attending lectures.

The following works will lie referred to in Lecture and should be consulted—

Maine's Ancient Law. Maine's EarlyiHistory Cit Institutions (especially

Lectures IX.. X., XII., and XIII.) . Markby's Elements of Law. Brown's Austinian Theory of Law. Holland's Elements of Jurisprudence. Moyle's Institutes of Justinian. Poste's Institutes of Gains.

Honours.

In addition to the Pass work, candidates should read: — The Austinian Theory of Law, by W. .letbro

Brown. -Dicey's Im.w and Opinion in England.

PRIVATE INTERNATIONAL LAW—

Pass a n d Honours .

Students are referred to— Foote's Private International Jurisprudence. Westlake's Private International Law. Dicey's Conflict of Laws.

ADMINISTRATIVE LAW—

Pass and Honours.

(a) External Relations— Immigration and Aliens. Naturalisation. Extradition and Fugitive Offender.-'. Foreign Enlistment.

LAWS. 489

(b) The classification and distribution of administrative functions.

A diuiniatrati ve action—the competence of authorities and officers; methods of action, and enforcement of orders.

(c) Central government—the principal administrative departments, their organisation and functions. The Public Service.

(d) Local government—functions, organisation and control (legislative, executive, judicial). Relations of central and local government.

(e) The Executive and the Judiciary—the Courts as aiding and controlling the executive. The legal relations of the citizen with (1) the State, (2) its servants.

Throughout this course a knowledge of Dicey's Law of the Constitution will be assumed. Students who liave not read this work in an earlier part of their course should read i t before lectures in this subject begin.

T H E LAW OF PROPERTY IN LAND AND CON-VEYANCING—

Legal Estates and Interests in Laud considered with regard to their nature, commencement, duration and enjoyment

Equitable Estates and Interests iu Land considered with regard to their nature, commencement and duration.

Assurances by way ot purchase, including leases and assignments of . leases; assurances by way of settlement, assurances by .way of mortgage, and assurances by will.

The rights of creditors against the property ot their debtors, not including the rights ot the creditors of deceased persons against their estates in the hands of their executors or administrators, or the rights of the creditors of insolvents against their estates in the hands of their assignees or trustees, or tbe rights of creditors in the liquidation of companies.-

490 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, WIS.

The Law relating to the Alienation of Property iu fraud of creditors.

Fur information upon these topics Students are referred to the following text books and Statutes:— Real Property, by A. F. Topham.

Students are recommended to read this book before lectures begin.

Joshua Williams on Real Property, except ch. 3 and 9 of Part I., ch. 5 of Part If., Par t III . , and Part VII.

Leake's Digest of the Law of Property in Land, cl). 1, 3 and 4 of Part I.; Par t II., ch. 1, ch. 2, sections 1, 2, 3, 4 (i), 5, 6 (i).

Leake on the Uses and Profits of Laud, except ch. 6, 9, 10, 11, 12 of Part I.; sec. 2 of ch. 1, and ch. 2, sub-sect. 3 of sect. 1, and sect. 3 of ch. 3, sub-sects 3 and 4 of sect. 1, and sect 2 of ch. 4 of Part II.

Sti-ahan's Introduction to Conveyancing. The Real Property Act 1890, Part II., and sects 108,

109, 125,145,169 to 173 inclusive, 180, 181,189, 197. I9S, 200, and 204 as amended by tho Act No. 1236.

The Real Property Act 1907. The Transfer of Land Act 1890, by Guest, except

sects 5 to 10 inclusive, 12 to 18 inclusive, 22 to 25 inclusive, 27 to 3fi inclusive, 39, 42 to 49 inclusive, 82 to 87 inclusive, and Parts VI., VIII. , IX.. and XIII .

The Transfer of Land Act 1904. The Conveyancing Acts, 1904, 1912. The Partnership A-ct 1891, sects. 24 to 26 inclusive. The Insolvency Act 1890, by Duffy and McHugh.

sects. 59 to 03 inclusive, 70 to 76 inclusive, 81, 84, 92, 131, 132, 133, 150.

The Insolvency Act 1897, sects. 100, 103, 104, 105, 106, 115, 116, 119.

The Administration and Probate Act, 1890 sects. 5-10. The Married Women's Propei-tv Acts 1890 and

1896.

LAWS. 491

Trusts Act 1890, sections 34 and 36. Trusts Act 1896, sections 4, 5, 7, 10 and 13. Voluntary Conveyances Act 1896. Settled Estates and Settled Lands Act, 1909, so far

as dealt with in Lectures. The Victorian Acts which refer to the. subjects

above dealt with, together with the cases referred to in the notes in the edition of the Consolidated Statutes published by the Government Printer.

Whether any Imperial Statute applies to or has been copied in Victoria can be found by reference to the Tables in Webb's Imperial Law, 2nd edition, so far ns these Tables extend.


Leake's Digest of the Law of Property in Land, Parts I., II . , except eh. 2 of Part I

Leake on the Uses and Profits of Land, sect. 2 of ch. 1 of Part II .

Smith's Leading Cases:—Twyne's Case, Spencer's Case.

Tudor's Leading Cases in Real Property:—Rouse's Case, Richardson v. Langridge, together with the Notes on these Cases.

T H E LAW OF CONTRACT AND PERSONAL PROPERTY— Anson's Principles of the English Law of Contract. Joshua Williams's Principles of the Law of Personal

Property (except chapter 3 of Part I., chapters 1, 4, 6 and 7 of Part H.,and- chapters 3 and 4 of Part I I I . ) .

The Law relating to Bills of Sale, Stock Mortgages and Liens on Wool and on Crops—The Instruments Act 1890, Parts VI., VII., and VIII . The Bills of Sale Amending Act 1891. The Instruments Act 1896, Part II . The Instruments Act 1902. The Stock Mortgages Act 1910.

Tho Book Debts Act 1896.

492 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, i»if>.

The Victorian and Commonwealth Statutes which refer to the subjects dealt with in the text books.


An advanced study of the Pass Work. The Partnership Act 1891.

THE LAW OF W R O N G S -Crimes and Punishments. Civil Wrongs.

The Victorian and Commonwealth Statutes which refer to these subjects will be dealt with by the Lecturer.

Books recommended :— Kenny's Outlines of Criminal Law. Kenny's Cases on Criminal Law (so far as dealt with

by the Lecturer). Salmond's Law ot Torts. Kenny's Cases on the Law of Torts. Radcliffe and Miles—Cases on the Law of Tort.

And for reference :— Stephen's Digest of the Criminal Law.


An advanced study of the Pass Work.

THE LAW OF PROCKDURE AND EVIDENCE—

Extra Judicial Remedies General Principles ot the Law of Evidence. Civil Procedure in the Supreme Court. Civil Procedure in. the High Court relating to

Appeals from the Supreme Court. Criminal Procedure—

Procedure before Magistrates in and out of Sessions.

Proceedings by Presentment and in a Criminal Trial.

The Victorian and Commonwealth Statutes and Rules of Court which refer to these subjects will be dealt with by the Lecturer.

LAWS. 4 9 5

Books recommended:— Blake Odgers' Principles of Pleading. Powell on Evidence, 9th edition, by Blake Odgers. Cockle's Leading Cases and Statutes on the Law of

Evidence.

Additional for Honours, An advanced study of the Pass work.

EQUITY—

Equity, so far as assigned to the-. Chancery Division of the High Court by the Supreme Court of Judicature Act 1873, section 34, subsection <H and so far as ertprtisive equitable jurisdiction is created by any Statute.

An Outline of the Law of Public Companies. An Outline of the Law of Insolvency.

Books recommended:— Strahau and Kenrick's Digest of Equity. Underbill's Law of Trusts and Trustees, so far ns

dealt with in Lectures. .Joshua Williams on Personal Property, 17th edition.

Part I I I , chs. 3 and 4. The Victorian Statutes which refer to the subjects

above dealt with, together with the cases referred to in lectures.

References will be made in the Lectures to Story's Commentaries on Equity Jurisprudence (English Edition by Grigsby), Tudor's Leading Cases in Equity, Lewin on Trusts, Seton on Decrees, Brett 's Leading Cases in Equity (Fifth Edition), and Ashburner's Principles of Equity.


An advanced study of the Pass work.

494 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, una.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS FOR FINAL HONOURS IN LAWS AND THE LAW SCHOLARSHIP FOR T H E EXAMINATION TO BE HELD IN THE FIRST TERM, 1916.

1. PRIVATE INTERNATIONAL LAW

•2. ADMINISTRATIVE LAW | T h e Subjects above 3. THE LAW OF WRONGS

4. T H E LAW OF PROCEDURE 5. EQUITY

prescribed for Honours.

THE LAW OF PROPERTY IN LAND AND CONVEYANCING— The subjects prescribed for Examination in the Law

of Property in Land and Conveyancing for the Third Year Laws, both for Pass and Honours, with the following in addition:—

Smith's Leading Cases:—Clayton v. Blakey, Doe d. Rigge v. Bell, Dovaston v. Payne, Keech v. Hall, Moss v. Gallimore, Nepean v. Doe, Taylor v. Horde.

Tudor's Leading Cases in Real Property:—Lewis Bowie's Case, Morley v. Bird, Tyrrel's Case. Shelley's Case, Cadell v. Palmer, and the Notes to these cases.

THE LAW OF CONTRACT AND PERSONAL PROPERTY— The subjects prescribed for Examination in the Law

of Contract and Personal Property for the Third Year Laws both for Pass and Honours, and the following cases, with the notes thereto, in Smith's Leading Cases, viz: Birkmyr v. Darnell, Coggs v. Bernard, Cumber v. Wane, Paterson v. Gandasequi, Addison v. Ganda-sequi, Thomson v. Davenport.

LAWS. 495

SUBJECTS OF THE EXAMINATION FOR T H E

DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF LAWS TO BE

'HELD IN THE FIRST TERM, 1916.

[N.B.—Csndidates who were Graduates of the University before 23rd June, 1890, may proceed either by Thesis or Examination. Candidates who have graduated since that date can proceed by'Thesis only. See Regulation XII.]

ROMAN LAW—

(I). A general acquaintance with the History aud Principles of Roman Law (Public and Private) to the death of Justinian.

(2). The Lex Aquilia.

JURISPRUDENCE—

(1). A general acquaintance with the views of the leading English writers on Jurisprudence.

(2). The following special subject:— The Theory of Law and Justice.

PRINCIPLES OF LEGISLATION—

The Utilitarians and their successors.


FACULTY OF MEDICINE.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

FOR THE ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS TO BE

HELD IN THE SECOND AND FOURTH TERMS,

1915, AND FIRST TERM, 1916.

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, PART I. See under Science

•CHEMISTRY, PART I. (including Inorganic and Organic Chemistry), See under Science.

BIOLOGY (Medical Course).

The elements of vertebrate and invertebrate morphology, including the characters of the chief divisions ot the animal kingdom, illustrated by reference to typical examples of each.

The structure, life-history and functions of unicellular animals.

The more important points in the structure and life-history of the following parasites: Trypanosoma, Plasmodium, Coccidium, Distomum, Taenia, A scaris, Oxyuris, Ancbylostoma, Film ia, Trichina.

Brief account of the structure of the crayfish and a typical insect. The life history of flies and mosquitos.

The structure of the shark, with special reference to the circulatory and respiratory systems.

The structure, development and life-history of the Frog in detail.

The structure of the rabbit. Outline of the development ot the bird and of the foetal

membranes in mammalia.

The elements of the Morphology aud Physiology of plants. Nine lectures and demonstrations.

MEDICINE. 497

Laboratory Work.— Examination by means ot dissections and preparations

of examples of the chief types dealt with in lectures. The types studied include the following :—Amoeba, Paramecium, Hydra, Parache-raps, Hyla, Lepus. Dissection of the mammalian eye. The examination ot specimens and sections illustrating- the organogeny of the fowl and frog.

The examination of specimens illustrating the lectures in Botany.

For text-books, reference liooks, etc., see Zoology, Part I. (Science).

Students must be provided with the following:— Microscope, with low and high powers, magnifying at

least 60-450 diameters; to be approved by the Professor.

Note books. Box of coloured crayons.

ANATOMY (INCLUDING HISTOLOOT)—

Lectures iu Anatomy will be distributed over the Third Term of the First Year, the three Terms of the Second Year .and the first two Terms ot the Third Year as follows:—

First Year— Third Term. Osteology.

Second Year— First Term. Embryology and Histology. Second Term. Central Nervous System, and Histo

logy. Third Term. Regional Anatomy, Head and Neck.

Third Year— First Term. Regional Anatomy. Second Term. Regional Anatomy and Special Senses.

PRACTICAL ANATOMY.

Each student must dissect the five parts of the human ibody twice. The work must be completed in the Second Year and the First and Second Terms ot the Third Year. 'Certificated evidence must be produced that all dissections have been satisfactorily performed.

498 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, I»IS-

HISTOLOOT AND EMUKYOLOOY.

Practical Classes in Histology will be conducted by the Lecturer in Histology twice a week during the First Term and once a week during the Second and Third Terms of the Second Year.

A Practical Class in Embryology will be conducted for Third Year Students.

Books recommended :—

For Osteology:

Upjohn—Elementary Osteology.

As a Text-Hook : Cunningham—Text-book of Anatomy. Fourth edi

tion.

For Practical Anatomy :

Berry—Practical Anatomy.

For Surface Anatomy: Berry—Surface Anatomy.

As ait Atlas .-Spalteholz—Hand Atlas of Human Anatomy. Last

English or German edition.

For Histology— Schiifer—Essentials of Histology. Last edition.

For Embryology: MaoMurrich—Development of the Human Body.

Second edition. For Sectional Anatomy.

Berry—Clinical Atlas of Sectional and Topographical Anatomy.

PHYSIOLOGV—

A course of lectures, some seventy-five in number, on Systematic Physiology (excluding Special Senses) is given by the Professor of Physiology. The lectures extend through the Second Year and through the First Two Terms of the Third Year of medical study. The aim of tbe lectures is to present the subject objectively by means

MEDICINE. 499

of experiments and demonstrations, and the student is expected to keep pace with the lectures by reading the appropriate chapters in the prescribed text-book.

Lectures on the Special Senses, some ten in number, and illustrated with experiments and demonstrations, are given by Dr. J. W'. Barrett. Students are supplied with a printed synopsis of these lectures, aud are expected to carry out simple experiments on the subject as indicated in printed directions supplied.

Practical Classes in Biochemistry, some thirty-two in number, are conducted by the Professor, assisted by Dr. Rothera. Type-written sheets giving theory and detailed practical directions arc supplied before each class. These sheets should be shielded from injury during class work, and filed tor future consultation. Each student is expected to provide himself with a set of apparatus, a description of which is posted in the lalioratory at the beginning of the Course.

Practical Classes, ten iu number, in Experimental Biophysics are conducted during the Third Term of the Second Year by tbe Professor, assisted by the Lecturer in Physiology. For this course dissecting instruments are necessary.

A course of practical exercises in Clinical Biochemistry, ten in number, is given iu the First Term of the Third Year by Dr. J. F. Wilkinson. In this course both chemical apparatus and microscope will be required.

A course ot lectures with experiments and demonstrations, ten in number, on Physiological Pharmacology, is given in the Second Term of the Third Year by Dr. Rothera.

Honour Classes in Practical Biochemistry and Practical Biophysics are held during Two Terms of the course if suitable candidates present themselves.

Books recommended (latest editions):—

For Practical work— Hawk—Practical Physiological Chemistry.

Far Systematic work— Halliburton—Handbook of Physiology

.32

500 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, IH15.


Alcock and Ellison—Practical Physiology. Starling—Principles of Human Physiology.

PATHOLOGY AND BACTERIOLOGY—

In the Course of Lectures on Pathology about twelve hundred specimens from the University Museum of Pathology are demonstrated to the class. Complete notes of the ' Lectures are supplied in advance to all members ot the class, and contain numbered references to all specimens shown.

Post-mortem demonstrations are conducted at the Melbourne Hospital as far as possible daily, at 11.30 a.m. (Saturdays, 11 a.m.). These demonstrations are given by the Professor of Pathology on Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays during the First, Second and Third Terms, and on other days by the Stewart Lecturer and the Beaney Scholar in Pathology.

In the Laboratory Class of Pathological Histology, in the First and Second Hospital Terms of the Fourth Year, each student prepares and mounts a series of St sections, which are fully described in the Laboratory Handbook.

A Laboratory Class in Pathological Histology for advanced Students (optional) is conducted once a week, in which sections from current post-mortem demonstrations are dealt with.

The Laboratory Class iu Elementary Bacteriology completes during the Third Term of the Third Year a course which is set out in the Bacteriological Laboratory Handbook, embracing the usual and more valuable methods, and the practical study of the chief pathogenic organisms. The course of instruction includes demonstrations, varying from year to year, of important subjects beyond the scope of the Handbook.

Text-Books recommended :— Green—Pathology aud Morbid Anatomy. Adami—Inflammation. Muir and Ritchie—Manual of Bacteriology. Wassermanu—Immune Sera. Hutchison and Rainy—Clinical Methods.

MEDICINE. 5 0 1

F O R G E N E R A L P U R P O S E S O F R E F E R E N C E t h e fol lowing

works a r e r e c o m m e n d e d :— A d a m i — G e n e r a l P a t h o l o g y . A d a m i — S y s t e m i c P a t h o l o g y . Z i eg l e r—Genera l a n d Special Pa tho logy . S t e r n b e r g — T e x t - b o o k of Bac te r io logy . H i s s a n d Z insse r—Text -book of Bacter io logy. W e l l s — C h e m i c a l P a t h o l o g y .

T h e Pa tho log ica l Sec t ions of t h e Tex t -books in Medicine, S u r g e r y , a n d Obs t e t r i c s a n d G y n e cology.

M A T E R I A M E D I C A A N D P H A R M A C Y —

(a) W e i g h t s a n d M e a s u r e s of t h e Impe r i a l and M e t r i c Sys tems .

(b) T h e gene ra l n a t u r e a n d composi t ion, a n d t h e more i m p o r t a n t phys ica l a n d chemica l c h a r a c t e r s , ot t h e Pha rmacopoe i a l subs t ances n a m e d in t h e a n n e x e d schedu le , a n d of t h e more i m p o r t a n t non-official d r u g s .

{<•) T h e composi t ion of t h e Pha rmacopoe ia l p r e p a r a t i ons ot t h e s e d r u g s , a u d t h e processes employed in t h e i r m a n u f a c t u r e .

(</) T h e doses of t h e s e d r u g s a n d ot t h e i r p r e p a r a t i o n s . (e) Chemica l a n d P h a r m a c e u t i c a l incompat ib i l i t i e s . ( / ) T h e c a n d i d a t e will be r equ i red to recognise d r u g s

i nd i ca t ed by i ta l ics iu t h e a n n e x e d schedu le . ( g ) T h e C a n d i d a t e will be r e q u i r e d t o wr i t e p resc r ip t

ions with a n d w i t h o u t abb rev i a t i ons . N O T E . — C e r t i f i c a t e s ot h a v i n g acqu i r ed , a t t h e M e l b o u r n e

C o l l e g e of P h a r m a c y , a p rac t i ca l knowledge of t h e p r e p a r a t i o n of medic ines will be g r a n t e d t o t h o s e s t u d e n t s only who h a v e g iven ev idence by p rac t i ca l work ot proficiency i n t h e ope ra t ions of c o m p o u n d i n g a n d d i spens ing .

S C H E D U L E OK P H A U M A C O P O K I A L S U B S T A N C E S .

Ara i i ae Gummi , A c e t a n i l i d u m , t h e Official Mine ra l Acids, Ac idum Ace t i cum, A c i d u m Arsen iosum, Acidum Heneoicum, Acidum Carbolicum, Ac idum Citr icul l l , Acidum Gal l icum, Acidum Hydrocyanic-inn Di lnl i im, Ac idum Sa l icy l icum, Acidum Tan-

0 .32A


n icum, Ac idum T a r t a r i c u m , Aconit i Radix, A d e p s L a n a e H y d r o s u s , M t h e r , Alcohol , Aloe, A m m o n i i Ace ta t i s L iquor , A m m o n i i B r o m i d u m , Ammoni i Carbonas, Ammoni i Chloridum, A m y g d a l a A m a r a , Amyl N i l r i s , A n t i m o n i n m T a r t a r a t u m , Apomor-p h i n a e Hydroch lo r idum, Argen t i N i t r a s , Asafet-ida.

Ba lsamum Toltitaiiiim, Be l l adonnae Fol ia , Bel ladonnae Radix, Ben to inum, B i s m u t h i C a r b o n a s , B i s m u t h i S u b n i l r a s , Borax , Bucliu Folia, Butyl-chloral Hydras .

Caffeina, Calx , Calunibae Radix, Cambogia, Camphora , Cannabis Indica , Can tha r i s , Catechu P a l l i d u m , Celaceum, Chloral Hydras , Chloroformum, Cin-chonae Rubrae Cortex, Cocae Folia, Cocculus Indictis , Colchici Cormtis, Colchici Semina, Calory nth idis Pii/fia. Conii Fol ia , Conii F ruc tus , Copaiba, Creosolinn, C r e t a P r a e p a r a t a , Cro ton i s O l e u m , Ciibehne Fruc tus , Cupri Sulphas.

Dig i t a l i s Folia. E la te r ium, Ergota. E u c a l y p t i G u m m i , Eucalypt i Oleum. Fel B o v i n u m Pur i f i ca tum, Fer r i et Ammonii C i t r a s ,

Fe r r i el Quin inae Ci t ras , F e r r i Pe rch lo r id i Liquor , Fer r i Sulphas, F e r r u m T a r t a r a t n m , F i l ix Mas.

Galla, Gelsemii Radix, Gent ianae Radix, G l t l s idum, G lyce r inum, Guaiaci Resina.

H a m a m e l i d i s Cor t ex , H a m a m e l i d i s Fol ia , Homat rop inae-H y d r o b r o m i d u u i , H y d r a r g y r i lod idum Rubrum, H y d r a r g y r i Oxidum Flavum, H y d r a r g y r i Oxidum Rubrum, H y d r a r g y r i 1'erchloridum, H y d r a r g y r i Subchloridnm, H y d r a r g y r u m , H y d r a r g y r u m A m -inoniatum, Hyosryami Folia,

lodoformum, lodtim, Ipecac tin nhne Radix . J a b o r a n d i Folia, Jn l apn . Kino. L i th i i Ca rbonas , l .upnlns , Lupu l inum. Magnes ia , Magnesi i Sulphas . Menthol, Morrhune Oleum,

Myrrha .

N u x Vomica,

Opiu m.

MEDICINE. 503

Pancreatis Liquor, Paraffinum, Pep'sinum, Phenacetin-um, Fhenazonum, Phosphorus, Physostigmatis Stntiiin, Pix Cafbonis Praepanrrk, Plumbi Acetas, Plumbi Oxidum, Plumbi Subaoetatis Liquor, Podophylli Rhieoma, Potassa Canstica. (and the more important salts of Potassium), Pruni Virginian! Cortex, Pyroxylinum.

Quassiae Lignum, Quillaiae Cortex. Rhei Radix, Rhamni Purshiani Cortex, Ricini Oleum. Saecharum Lactis, Salol, Santonica, Santoninum, Scam

moniae Radix, Scammonium, Scilla, Scoparii Cacumina, Senegae Radix, Senna, Sinapis, Soda Tartaxata, Sodium (and the more important salts of Sodium), Spiritus Ammoniae Aroma-ticus. Spiritus AEtheris Nitrosi, Stramonii Folia, StramoniiSemina, StrophanthiSemind,Sulphonal, Sulphur Praecipitatum, Sulphur S^blimatum.

Terebinthinae Oleum, Thymol, Thyroideuui Siccum, Trinitrini Liquor.

Zinci Chloridum, Zinci Oxidum, Zinci Sulphas. N.B.—This List is to be taken as a means of assistance

to students in their reading, and not as an absolute guide for tbe examinations.

Text-book recommended:— Whitla—Elements of Pharmacy, Materia Medica

and Therapeutics.

THERAPEUTICS, DIETETICS, AND HYGIENE—

(i.) Hygiene— (n) Personal.—Inheritance. Vulnerability. Develop

ment. Functional Activities. Exercise. Education. Environment. Special Factors. Australian conditions.

(A) Public. — Topographical position. Ventilation. Water Supply. Excreta and Refuse. House Construction. Disinfectants. Tropical Requirements. Australian characteristics and needs.

(<) LegaU—Public Health Acts. Laws relating to Children. Special State Enactments. Vital Statistics. Birth and Death Bates. Expectancy of Life, etc. Statistical Opportunities and Duties.

5 0 1 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 19lfi

(ii.) Dietetics— Digestion. Classification. Requirements. General

Considerations. Milk. Beverages. Australian Wines and Dietetic Customs. Dietary of infancy. Youth and Age. Temperament. Disease and Convalescence. Recipes, etc.

(iii.) Therapeutics— Principles of Treatment. Basis. Means. Relation

ships. Psychotherapy, its use and abuse. Pharmacology. Solubilities and Incompatibilities. Toxicology. Prescription Writing. Therapeutic Classification. Drugs, their composition, modes of action, uses, preparations, etc. Disinfection and Asepsis. Anaesthesia. Hydrotherapy. Springs and Mineral Waters. Climate-therapy, general and local. Serum and Vaccine Therapy. Organo-therapy. Physio-therapy. Massage. Electro-therapy. Ionic Medication. Light. Radio-therapy. Therapeutic Memorabilia. Treatment of Individual Cases and Diseases. Pharmacopoeial and other selected Prescriptions.

All, so far as possible, from the Australasian standpoint, and with Australasian illustrations.

Text-book:— Springthorpe—Therapeutics, Dietetics aud Hygiene r

An Australian Text-book (1914). During the Third Term: —

Practical instruction is given in Prescription Writing, Methods of Treatment of Cases, Massage, Electro-therapy, Hydro-therapy, Medical Gymnastics, Public Hygiene, etc.

-OBSTETRICS AND GYNECOLOGY— For the pass examination there will be a written paper in

Obstetrics, and a written paper in Gynaecology, ah Oral Examination in Obstetrics, and any candidates may be called upon to undergo a.practical clinical examination in Gynecology.

Books recommended :— On Obstetrics —

Dakin's Midwifery. Eden's Manual of Midwifery.

MEDICINE. 505

On Gynacology— Dudley's Diseases of Women.

Por reference:— Handler—Medical Gyneecology.

Practical demonstrations in Obstetrics are conducted with the phantom at least once a week during one Term.

MEDICINE—

Books recommended:— Osier1—Principles and Practice of Medicine. Allchin—Manual of Medicine. Hutchison and Rainy—Clinical Methods.

For reference ;— Allbutt—System of Medicine.

FORENSIC MEDICINE—

Relation, of medical men to Courts of Law. Appearance's in the dead body. Identity. Sudden death. Wounds and Injuries. Asphyxia. Sexual questions. Questions connected with the new-born child. Life insurance. Toxicology. Exauiination of stains.

Text-books recommended : — Luff—Text-book of Forensic Medicine and Toxi

cology. Guy and Ferrier—Forensic Medicine. Dixon Mann—Forensic Medicine.

Books of reference ;— Tidy—Legal Medicine. Taylor—Principles and Practice of Medical Juris

prudence. Peterson and Haines—Legal Medicine and Toxi

cology.

SURGERY— The Examination includes the whole subject. Text-books recommended:—

Rose and Carless—Manual of Surgery. Waring—Manual of Operative Surgery. Treves—Surgical Applied Anatomy, Spencer & Gask—Surgery.

5 0 6 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, l»lt.

A s works of reference:— Treves—System of Surgery. Binnie—Operative Surgery (New Edition). Choyoe—System of Surgery,

SPECIAL SUBJECTS— Books recommended:—

Ophthalmology— Swanzy:—Handbook of the Disease's of the Eye.

Diseases of Children— Goodhart and Still - Diseases of Children.

And for reference :— Holt—Diseases of Infancy aud Childhood.

Diseases of the Skin— Norman Walker—An Introduction to Dermatology. Sequeira—Diseases of the Skin.

And for reference :— Crocker—Diseases of the Skin.

Menta l Diseases— Stoddart—Mind and its Disorders.

MEDICINE. 507

ANNOUNCEMENTS.

These Announcements are liable to variation as the

circumstances may demand.

HOSPITAL PRACTICE POR THE DEGREES OF BACHELOR OF MEDICINE AND BACHELOR OF SURGERY.

The First Hospital Term in 1915 will begin on the first day of February.

The Third Hospital Term in 1945 will end on December 14. The Special Long Vacation Hospital Term will extend

from the 8th January to the end of February, 1916.

Scheme proposed by the Staff of the Melbourne Hospital and approved by the Faculty of Medicine for 1916-16.

1. That, unless otherwise specified, the attendances of students upon hospital practice be from 9 a.m. six days a week, and tha t an attendance book lie kept in the hall for the daily signatures of students, such book to he removed daily at 9.15 a.m., and placed by the hall porter in the custody of the Medical Superintendent.

2. That the Resident Medical Officers commence duty a t 9 a.m. and also keep a roll ot attendances of students, to be initialled weekly by their honorary physician or surgeon.

3. The certificate of satisfactory attendance upon hospital practice to require not less than three-quarters of the total number, unless the Staff accept the excuse presented for the deficiency.

4. That the Clinical arrangements for the ensuing year he as follows:—

(a) During the third term of the third year each student to attend Out patient Surgical Practice tour days a week including tutorial instruction- for one

5 0 8 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1IM5.

hour twice a week under one of the Surgical Tutors, and to attend tutorial instruction for one hour twice a week under one of the Medical Tutors.

(h) During the first and second terms of the fourth year students to attend In-patient Surgical Practice ux days a week, acting as Surgical Dressers to one of the In-Patient Surgeons and to attend his morning operations.

(/•) During the third term of the fourth and the first and second terms of the fifth years, students to attend In-patient Medical Practice six days a week, acting as Ward Clerks under some one of the In-patient Physicians during the third term of the fourth year, and under some one other In-patient Physician for the first and second terms of the fifth year; also to attend one day a week for one term the practice of one of each of the other In-patient Physicians.

' ' / ) From the end of the third term of the third year to the end of the third term of the fourth year students to be balloted tor in groups of four, each group to act as Dressers in the Casualty Department five mornings a week for a period of four weeks continuously.

(e) During the first (or the second) term of the fifth year half the students to attend Out-patient Medical Practice one day a week, and the other half to attend Out-patient Surgical Practice one day a week during the second (or first) term of the fifth year, acting as Clinical Assistant to an Out-patient Surgeon during that term.

(/') During the third term ot the fifth year, students to attend In-patient Surgical Practice with Ward Dressership daily, and ' Out-patient Medical Practice with Clinical Assistantship to an Outpatient Physician two days a week, and to attend surgical operations one afternoon a week.

(tr) During the Special Long Vacation Term students to attend the Medical and Surgical Practice of the Hospital.

MEDICINE. 509"

(//) Students to attend clinical lectures in Medicine and Surgery according to a t ime table to be drawn up by the clinical lecturers.

(/) Except when otherwise ordered by the physician or surgeon in charge ot the case, all post-mortem examinations to be performed daily a t 11.30 a.m.

(j) Students to attend post-mortem demonstrations., except when specially excused, daily in the first,, second and third terms of the fourth year and the first term ot the fifth year, and not less than three times a week in tbe remaining terms of the fifth year.

-SPECIAL SUBJECTS.

The Melbourne Hospital is also recognised for the teaching of the following special subjects :—

1. Gynaecology. 2. Ophthalmology. 3. Diseases of the Skin. 4. Diseases of the Throat, Nose and Ear. 5. Anaesthetics.

Scheme proposed by the Staff of the St. Vincent's Hospital and approved by the Faculty of 'Medicine for 1915-16.

I. Third year students shall during the Third Term (a) attend out-patient Surgical practice four days a

week, including— Tutorial Surgery two days a week

(b) attend Tutorial classes in the out-patient Medical Department two days a week.

II. Fourth year students shall: — (1) during the First and Second Terms (a) at tend om

two days a week in-patient bedside instruction in Clinical Surgery ; ( t) ' attend the wards daily and act as surgical dressers to one of the inpatient surgeons ; (c) attend post-mortem

' examinations. (2) during the Third Term (o) attend ou two days a

week in-patient bedside instruction in Clinical Medicine; (b) at tend the wards daily and act as ward clerks to one ot the in-patient physicians ; (c) attend post-mortem examinations.


I I I . Fifth year students shall:—

(1) during the First Term (a) attend on, two days a week in-patient bedside instruction in Clinical Medicine; (b) attend the wards daily and act us ward clerks to one of the in-patient physicians; (e) at tend on one day a week out-patient instruction in Clinical Medicine [or in Clinical Surgery]; (d) attend Clinical Lectures in Medicine and Surgery; (e) attend post-mortem examinations.

{2) during the Second Term (a) attend on two days a week in-patient bedside instruction in Clinical Medicine; (b) attend the wards daily and act as senior ward clerks to one of the in-patient physicians : (c) attend on one day . a week out-patient instruction in Clinical Surgery [or in Clinical Medicine] ; (d) attend Clinical Lectures in Medicine and Surgery; (e) attend post-mortem examinations.

^3) during the Third Term (a) attend on two days a week in-patient bedside instruction in Clinical Surgery; (6) attend the wards daily and act as senior surgical dressers to one of the in-patient surgeons; (c) attend on two days a week outpatient instruction in Clinical Medicine; (d) attend Clinical Lectures in Medicine and Surgery; (e) attend post-mortem examinations

(4) during the Special Long Vacation Term following the Fifth year attend the Medical and Surgical practice of the Hospital.

IV. Fifth year students shall act (a) as Clinical assistan t s to an out-patient physician during one term ; (b) as Clinical assistants to an out-patient surgeon during one term.

V. There will be thirty Clinical Lectures in Medicine .-and thirty in Surgery delivered by tire Clinical Lecturers dnring the year according to a schedule posted at the beginning of each term.

MEDICINE. 51?

SPECIAL SUBJECTS.

St. Vincent's Hospital is also recognised for the teaching-of the following special subjects: —

1. Gyneecology. 2. Ophthalmology. 3. Diseases of the Skin. I. Diseases of the Nose, Throat and Ear. 5. Anaesthetics.

Scheme proposed by the Staff of the Alfred Hospital, and approved by the Faculty of Medicine for 1915-16.

I. Third year students shall during the Third Term

(1) attend four days a week out-patient Surgical practice, including Tutorial classes on two days a week.

(2) attend Medical Tutorial classes in the out-patient department two days weekly.

II . Fourth year students shall :— (1) during the First and Second Terms (a) at tend

daily in-patient Surgical practice acting as dressers to one of the in-patient surgeons, and attending the practice of one other in-patient surgeon ; (b) attend weekly a Clinical lecture to-be delivered by the lecturer on Clinical Surgery ; (c) attend post-mortem demonstrations ; (d) for-four weeks to act as dressers in the casualty department for six mornings a week.

(2) during the Third Term (a) attend on six days a week in-patient medical practice, acting as junior ward clerks to one of the in-patient physicians and attending the practice of one other in-patient physician ; (b) attend weekly a Clinical lecture to be delivered by the lecturer on Clinical Medicine; tc) attend post-mortem examinations.

I I I . Fifth year students shall:— (1) dnring the First Term (a) attend on five days a

week in-patient Medical Practice acting as ward clerks to one ot the in-patient physicians, and a t -

- 5 1 2 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 11)19.

tending the practice of one other in-patient physician; (6) attend on one day a week outpatient medical practice and act us Clinical assistant to an out-patient physician : (c) attend weekly a Clinical lecture to be delivered by the lecturer on Clinical medicine; (</) attend postmortem examinations.

(2) during the Second Term (a) attend on five days a week in-patient medical practice, acting as senior ward clerks to one ot the in-patient physicians, and attending the practice of one other in-patient physician; (6) act on one day a week as Clinical assistant to one of the out-patient surgeons; (c) attend weekly a Clinical lecture to be delivered by the lecturer on Clinical Medicine; ((() attend post-mortem examinations.

(3) during the Third Term (a) attend ou four days a week in-patient surgical practice acting as dresser to one in-patient surgeon and attending the practice of one other in-patient surgeon ; (b) act on two days a week as clinical assistant to one of the out-patient physicians ; (c) attend . weekly a Clinical lecture to be delivered b.v the lecturer ou Clinical Surgery; (d) attend postmortem demonstrations.

IV. During the special long vacation term following the fifth year students shall attend the practice of a t least one physician and one surgeon.

V. (1). Students arc expected to be in attendance at the Hospital from 9.30 a.m., and on arrival to sign their names in the attendance book which will be kept in the entrance hall.

(2) Students attending the in-patient practice of the hospital are expected to take the histories aud notes of such cases as may be allotted to them. They shall be present a t the visit of their honorary physician or surgeon on two mornings a week at the time fixed for his visit.

.(3). An attendance of not less than three-fourths of the total number of days available shall be required for certificates of hospital attendance.

MEDICINE. 513

(4). Post-mortem examinations will be conducted by the Honorary Pathologist (Mr. Brett) a t 11.30 a.m.

(5). The Clinical Pathologist (Dr. Trinca) will be in attendance from 9.30 a.m. daily.

SPECIAL SUBJECTS.

The Alfred Hospital is also recognised for the teaching of the following special subjects—

1. Ophthalmology. 2. Diseases of the Nose, Throat aud Ear. 3. Amesthetics. 4. Diseases of the Skin.

HOSPITAL AND PHARMACY FEES.

Iu addition to the University Fees, Medical Students pay the following Fees, in advance, for Hospital and Pharmaceutical Instruction -.—

Third Year - College of Pharmacy, J£6 16s. 6d. Third Year - Melbourne, Alfred or St. Vincent's Hos

pital ; Entrance Pee, .£10 10s. Melbourne, Alfred, or St. Vincent's Hos

pital ; Clinical Fee, .£6 6s.

Fourth Year - Melbourne. Alfred or St. Vjncent's Hospital ; Clinical Fee, £]'.i 13s.

Fifth Year - Melbourne, Alfred or St. Vincent's Hospital ; Clinical Fee, £14 l i s .

Fourth or Fifth Women's Hospital, Gynaecology Year (it taken a t this Hospital) - £2 2s.

-,, Women's Hospital, Obstetrics, - £& 8s. „ „ Caution Money .£3 3s.

Gynaecology (if taken at the Melbourne or St. Vincent's Hospitals)- - - - - £2 2s.

Anaesthetics - - . - - £1 Is. Diseases of Children - - - £1 Is. Ophthalmology - - - - £1 Is. Diseases ot Skin - - - - £ 1 Is. Mental Diseases - - - - i i i Is. Fever Hospital - - - - £ 1 Is. Diseases of Throat, Nose, Ear - 10s. 6d.

5 1 4 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1DIS.

The Pharmacy Pee must be paid to the Registrar of the College of Pharmacy.

The Clinical Fee must be paid to the credit of the Uni versity a t the Bank of Victoria, Collins Street, and a duplicate pay-in slip forwarded to the Registrar. The Entrance Fee in the case of the St. Vincent's Hospital must be paid to the credit of the University in like manner.

Third year students should enter a t the Hospitals and pay their entrance and clinical fees one week before t he commencement of the Third Term.

The Fees payable to the Women's Hospital must be paid to tbe Secretary of that Hospital. The Fees for Gynaecology a t the Melboui'ne or St. Vincent's Hospital, and those for Diseases ot .Children and Fever Hospital, must be paid to-the Secretaries or other officers specially notified of the corresponding Hospitals. The other Fees for instruction in Special Departuients must be paid to t h e credit of the University in the same manner as the Clinical Fees, and in two equal instalments of £2 7s. 3d. with the Lecture Fees for the Third Term of the Fourth Year,, and £2 7s. 3d. with the Lecture Fees for the First Term of the Fifth Year. In respect of the Fees so paid for Anaesthetics, Ophthalmology, Diseases of the Skin, and Diseases of the Throat, Nose and Ear, students shall through their representatives lodge a t the office of the University Registrar a return showing for each student t be Hospital and the Instructor selected. Certificate books shall be lodged with the University Registrar in September of the Fifth Year for signature by the Instructors in these departments.

SPECIAL DEPARTMENTS.

GYNAECOLOGY.

Clinical Instruction in Gynaecology is given at t he Women's Hospital under the direction of the Honorary Medical Staff.

Also a t the Melbourne Hospital by Dr. R. H. Fetherston. Also at St. Vincent's Hospital by Dr. T. Murphy (In

patient) and Dr. E. A. Spowers (Out-patient) acting as one unit, and by Mr. A. N. McArthur (In-patient) and Dr. J. H . McGee (Out-patient) acting as one unit.

MEDICINE. 5 1 5

OPHTHALMOLOGY. Clinical instruction in Ophthalmology will be given a t

the Eye aud Ear Hospital by the following instructors:— Dr. Percy Webster, on Mondays, a t 2 p.m. Dr. W. P. Orr, on Tuesdays, a t 2 p.m. Mr. J. P. Rudall, on Wednesdays, at 2 p.m.

The class will be divided into sections as may be found necessary.

I t will also be given a t the Melbourne Hospital by Dr. J . W. Barrett on Tuesdays and Fridays at 2 p.m.

And at the Alfred Hospital by Mr. E. L. Gault, on Mondays and Thursdays, a t 2.30 p.m.

And at St. Vincent's Hospital by the following instructors :—

Mr. E. Ryan, on Tuesdays, at 2.30 p.m., and on Wednesdays, at 2.30 p.m. (Operations).

Dr. J. M. Baxter, on Fridays, at 2 p.m. Dr. F . A. Newman, on Thursdays, 2.30 p.m.

DISEASES OP CHILDREN.

Clinical instruction in Diseases of Children will be given a t the Children's Hospital by the members of the Medical and Surgical Staff. Particulars of hours of attendance are to be obtained from the Secretary of the Hospital.

DISEASES OF THE SKIN.

Instruction,in Diseases of the Skin will be given by Mr. A. W. Finch Noyes, as follows:—

Lectures and Demonstrations at the Medical School, on Thursdays, at 1 p.m.

Clinical instruction a t the Melbourne Hospital, on Wednesdays and Saturdays at 9 a.m.

The relative number of Lectures and of Clinical meetings will be subject to notification from time to time.

Clinical Instruction iu Diseases of the Skin will be given a t St. Vincent's Hospital by Mr. Herman Lawrence, on Tuesdays and Fridays, a t 3 p.m.

Clinical Instruction in Diseases of the Skin will be given a t the Alfred Hospital by Mr. C. G. Crowley, on Tuesdays and Thursdays, at 2.30 p.m.

.83

5 1 6 DETAILS OF SUBJKCTS, WIS.

MENTAL DISEASES.

As arranged by the Inspector-General of the Hospitals for the Insane, the majority of the lectures and demonstrations will be given a t the Receiving House, Royal Park, where Mr. Godfrey will give the preliminary lectures, demonstrate cases of recent mental disorder, and give instruction in certification for all classes ot cases. At the Kew Hospital for the Insane Mr. Gamble will demonstrate cases of General Paralysis, Epilepsy, Idiocy, etc. Mr. W. A. T, Lind will lecture on the Pathology of Mental Disease.

FEVERS.

Clinical instruction in Fevers will be given at the Queen's Memorial Infectious Diseases Hospital by the Medical Superintendent on Tuesdays and Thursdays, at 2.30 p.m. Not more than about twenty students can attend together. The class is divided as found necessary. Each student must provide two white overalls, which will be washed and disinfected at the Hospital, and must bo left at the Hospital during the currency of.the class.

DISEASES OF THE THROAT, NOSE AND EAR.

Instruction in Diseases of the Throat, Nose and Ear will be given at the Melbourne Hospital by Mr. W. Kent Hughes, on Mondays and Thursdays, a t 2 p.m.

Instruction will be given at St. Vincent's Hospital by Dr. J. Murphy, on Tuesdays, at 2.30 p.m.; and by Dr. H. Barry Thomson, on Thursdays, a t 2.30 p.m.

Instruction will be given a t the Alfred Hospital by Mr. S. A. Ewing, on Tuesdays and Fridays, a t 2.30 p.m.

Instruction will be giveu at the Eye and Ear Hospital by the following instructors :—

Dr. E. E. R. Saw rev, on Thursdays, a t 2 p.m. Dr. M. A. Reid, on Fridays, a t 2 p.m. Dr. R. E. Shuter is also a recognised instructor.

MEDICINE. 517

ANAESTHETICS.

The following Instructors in Anaesthetics have been recognised by the Faculty of Medicine:—

Melbourne Hospital—Dr. E. H. Embley (Chief Anesthetist), Mr. Hornabrook, Dr. Trinca, Dr. J. S. Yule, Dr. M. D. Silberberg and Mr. W. A. Andrews.

;St. Vincent's Hospital—Mr. P. L. Davies, Mr. N. L. Speirs and Mr. S. J. Newing.

Alfred Hospital—Mr. C. L. Lempriere, Mr. M. C. C. Seaton and Mr. P. G. Shelton.

Women's Hospital—Mr. Hornabrook, Mr. B. Milne Sutherland, Miss Janet L. Greig and Miss M. H. McLorinan.

. 3 3 A


DETAILS OF SUBJECTS FOR EXAMINATIONS FOR FINAL HONOURS AND SCHOLARSHIPS IN MARCH, 1916.

As far as practicable Honour Examinations will be held a t the same time as Pass Examinations. Further Oral Examinations may be held for purposes ot a Pass. The relative weight of subjects is:—Medicine, 3 ; Surgery, 3 ; Obstetrics and Gynaecology, 2.

MEDICINE. The examination in Medicine will include a written '

paper, a commentary, a clinical and oral examination.

SURGERY. The Examination in Surgery will include a written paper,

operative surgery, a commentary, a clinical and oral examination.

OBSTETRICS AND GYNECOLOGY. The examination in Obstetrics will be by one written

paper including, a commentary. The Examination in Gynaecology will be by one written

paper, including a commentary.

BEANEY SCHOLARSHIP IN PATHOLOGY. Facilities will be afforded to candidates tor this Scholar

ship who desire, during the fifth year of the course or thereafter, to pursue their practical studies in pathological histology and bacteriology.

ANNOUNCEMENT. APPOINTMENT OF RESIDENT MEDICAL OFFICERS.

The Committee of the Melbourne Hospital appoints as resident medical officers for one year from amongst the students who have received their clinical training in tha t Hospital the first twelve in the combined marks on the honour papers at the Final Honour Examination.

MEDICINE. 519

The Managers of St. Vincent's Hopital appoint tour resident medical officers for one year from amongst the students who have received their clinical training at tha t Hospital, according to their places in the combined honour marks; provided tha t if there are notsufficientof St. Vincent's students in . the class lists, specially selected pass students may be appointed to supply the deficiency.

The Committee of the Alfred Hospital appoints four resident medical officers for one year, according to their places in the combined honour marks.

The Committees of the Colac, Kynetou, Wangaratta, and Warmambool Hospitals and of the Children s Hospital, Perth, W.A., appoint resident medical officers according to their position in the combined honour marks a t the next preceding Final Honour Examination.

5 2 0 DETAILS OF SUaiECTS, 1915.

DETAILS OP SUBJECTS POR EXAMINATIONS FOB DEGREES OF DOCTOR- OF MEDICINE AND MASTER OF SURGERY TO BE HELD IK DECEMBER. 1915.

DOCTOR OF MEDICINE.

Por Candidates proceeding by Examination.

MEDICINE, INCLUDING MEDICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY—

Candidates, will be required, as part of the examination, to show practical acquaintance with the methods of Medical Ophthalmoscopy, and may be required to show practical acquaintance with the methods

* of examining the various secretions, including the gastric and intestinal contents.

Books recommended in addition to those prescribed for the course of Medicine:—

Swanzy—Handbook of Diseases of the Eye, latest edition (Text-book).

For reference:— Gowers—Medical Ophthalmoscopy. Poese and Spiller—The Eye and Nervous System.

OBSTETRICS AND MEDICAL GYNECOLOGY—

The Examination will include a written paper in Obstetrics, a Commentary in Medical Gynaecology, and an Oral Examination in both subjects. Medical Gynaecology shall mean the pathology, etiology, diagnosis, prognosis and treatment otherwise than by surgical operation of diseases peculiar to women.

Books recommended.-— Dakin—Handbook of Midwifery. Williams—Obstetrics. Webster—Text-book of Midwifery. Dudley—Principles and Practice of Gynaecology. Herman—Diseases of Women. Handler—Medical Gynaecology.

MEDICINE. 521

DISEASES OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. INCLUDING INSANITY—

The Examination will consist of two parts—

(a) Diseases of the Nervous System. (A) Insanity.

The Examiners in the two parts will confer, but Candidates must pass in both parts.

Books recommended -.— For Diseases of the Nervous System—

Starr—Organic and Functional Nervous Diseases. For Insanity—

Stoddart—Mind and its Disorders. Berkley—Treatise on Mental Diseases. Kraepelin—Clinical Psychiatry (trans. Johnstone) Maudsley—Pathology of Mind.

DISEASES OF CHILDREN, INCLUDING INFECTIOUS DISEASES—

Books recommended:— Holt—Diseases of Infancy and Childhood. Ashby and Wright—Diseases of Children. Taylor—Nervous Diseases in Childhood aud Early

Life. Still—Common Disorders of Childhood.

The term "Diseases of Children" will include both Medical and Surgical Diseases, but Candidates will not be examined in operative technique.

For Candidates proceeding by Thesis.

Resolution of the Faculty ot Medicine, 22nd July, 1914—

" That in the opinion ot the Faculty a Thesis (1) Should not he any ordinary compilation from

hooks (2) Nor a mere compendium of cases (3) Nor merely observational


(4) But should be a substantial contribution to knowledge and

(5) Should be in fit form for publication or be already published in approved form and

(6) Should show work a t least equal to that involved in preparation for the examination in Medicine for the Degree of M.D. by written questions."

MASTER OF SURGERY.

SURGICAL ANATOMY—

Cunningham—Manual of Practical Anatomy. Taylor, E. H.—A Treatise on Applied Anatomy. Berry—Clinical Atlas of Sectional and Topograph

ical Anatomy.

SURGICAL PATHOLOGY—

Green—Pathology and Morbid Anatomy. Bowlby—Surgical Pathology. Muir and , Ritehie^-Manual of Bacteriology (the

. surgical portions).

In addition to the surgical-text-books and current surgical periodical literature.

The examination will include examination ot macroscopic and microscopic specimens.

SURGERY—

Treves—System of Surgery (last edition). Cheyne and Burghard— Manual of Surgical Treat

ment (last edition). Burghard—A System of Operative Surgery. Choyce—System of Surgery.

PUBLIC HEALTH 523

DIPLOMA OF PUBLIC HEALTH. •

DETAILS OP SUBJECTS FOR 1915.

LABORATORY PRACTICE IN CHEMISTRY—

(1) Air analysis: Humidity, carbonic acid, oxygen, carbonic oxide, etc.

(2) Water analysis : Total solids and main ingredients thereof, acidity or alkalinity, hardness, chlorides, nitrates and nitrites, free and albumenoid ammonia, reducing power.

(3) Food analysis -. Such typical foods as milk, bread, meat; alcoholic and non-alcoholic beverages.

(4) Poisons, preservatives and disinfectants : Detection and determination.

LABORATORY PEACTICE IN PHYSIOLOGY— Determination of physical properties of physiological

fluids—specific gravity, viscosity, rotation ot polarised light, osmotic pressure, etc.

Detection and estimation of air impurities. Effects on the animal body of oxygen starvation, of carbon dioxide and of carbon monoxide. Vitiation of air by breathing, by combustion of fuel and illuminants, and by scorching of dust.

Thermometry in physiology. The relation of the body to hygrometric conditions and velocity of the air. Rate of evaporation of sweat. Estimation of the heat-retaining properties ot clothing materials. Microscopy of clothing materials. Action on the body of over-clothing, of'baths, of hampered respiration and of exercise.

Calorimetry of foods. Microscopy of foods. Prepara-. tion of food diagrams.

LABORATORY PRACTICE IN BACTERIOLOGY, Ac— The Bacteriology of Air, Water, Soil, Sewage and Food. i. Methods for determining numbers and characters

of micro-organisms present in air, water, soil,

5 2 4 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, IMS.

. food (fresh and preserved), with special reference to milk and milk products,

ii. Detection of pathogenic organisms: tubercle, typhoid, diphtheria, streptococci.

iii. Ptomaines. iv. Indications bt excremental contamination. Colon

teat, R. enteritidis sporogenes test, streptococcal test.

Disinfectants, Antiseptics,, and Preservatives, their Action and Bacteriological Efficacy.

Bacteriological standardisation of disinfectants.

The General Pathology of Infection and of Infectious Diseases, Including Diseases of Animals transmis ' sible to Man,

Tubercle, leprosy, actinomycosis, anthrax, malaria and blood parasites, typhoid, dysentery, cholera, diphtheria, plague, pneumonia, cerebrospinal meningitis, septicaemia and pyaemia, hydatids, intestinal parasites, etc.

Immunity and Protection from Infectious Diseases. This will include demonstrations on the following: —

(1) Diagnosis of infectious diseases (agglutination tests').

(2) Blood tests by precipitin methods. Blood tests by hemolytic methods.

.(31 Phagocytosis and opsonin determinations in health aud disease.

(4) Bactericidal action ot serum. (5) Toxins and antitoxins. (6) Small pox vaccination, examination ot calf

lymph. (7) Preparation and standardisation of vaccines

(for plague, typhoid, tubercle, coccal and other infections).

METEOROLOGY AND CLIMATOLOGV—

The course of instruction will include

(1) Meteorological Instruments. — Ordinary types. Standards and apparatus for continuous registration ; their installation, use, verification and adjustment.

PUBLIC HEALTH. 525*

(2) Methods of making, reducing and tabulating meteorological observations.

(3) Climatology.—Mean and extreme values of climatic elements; their periodical variations and range; their representation by tabular and. graphic methods. Prevailing seasonal direction of winds.

(4) Weather changes. Synoptic weather charts-Types of distribution of atmospheric pressure. High and low pressure systems, and their relation to wind, rain and temperature.

FIELD AND OFFiCE WORK.— 1. Investigations into the general and particular

sanitary conditions, circumstances and administration of typical centres of population. The preparation of reports on sanitary investiga-

" tions.

2. The sanitation ot dwellings, schools, hospitals and other public buildings ; factories and ships. The principles of construction, arrangement and regulation of public buildings for tbe purposes of public safety. Sanitary fittings and drains.

3. The sanitary conditioning of food-stuffs and their preparation. Dairy and abattoir construction and administration. The sampling of articles of Food. Meat inspection (local and export).

4. The conditions and processes of offensive, noxious and dangerous trades.

5. The detection and remedying of nuisances and other dangers to health.

6. The procedure adopted to ensure the early detection of the .grouping,ot cases of infectious disease.. The measures adopted to prevent the spread of infectious diseases and to stamp out such disease.

Administrative details in connection with the exclusion of and tbe stamping out'of exotic disease.

8. The preparation of Vaccine Lymph. 9. Methods ot disinfection and vermin destruction.

10. Methods of refuse collection, removal and disposal- -Drainage and sewage works.

-526 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1915.

EXAMINATION, PART I.

•CHEMISTRY—

The Practical Examination will follow the lines laid down for Laboratory work.

The Written Examination will test the candidate's knowledge of tbe subjects dealt with in the liaboratory, .of food analysis generally, and of the physics and chemistry of soils and sewage. Evidence of reading beyond the limits of t h e Laboratory course will he required.

PHYSICS (including Meteorology, Geology, etc.)— Gases.—Pressure, volume, temperature, solubility in

liquids, absorption by solids, diffusion, movements of air in relation to ventilation; instruments employed in relation thereto.

Liquids.—Effects of variation of temperature, pressure, capillarity, osmosis, solution, vapour, movements of liquids. The elements of dynamics of solids and fluids.

Heat.—Temperature, latent heat, specific heat, fusion, boiling, evaporation, radiation, conduction, convection.

Fleclricity,—Elementary facts regarding electrical currents, development of currents by galvanic cells or by induction, with their chief effects. The dangers and action of currents of high voltage, electrolysis.'

Meteorology and Geology.—Meteorological instruments . and their use, topographical, atmospheric and climatic.. influences in their, relation to health and disease. Geological formations. Soil and subsoil (temperature, humidity, permeability and chemical composition). Influence of soil on climate. Ground air, its nature and movements. Ground water, its nature and movements. Geology in relation to drainage and water supply.

PHYSIOLOGY— See Details'of Laboratory Practice.

PUBLIC HEALTH. 527

MICROSCOPE —

The microscopy of food-stuffs, water deposits,- sewage, air (dust) and clothing. The common parasites ot man and other animals. Common moulds.

ENGINEERING AND BUILDING CONSTRUCTION—

(1) Water Supply and Conservancy—Quantity per head r relative eligibility of available sources of supply ; estimation of yield; method of utilising and protecting various sources of supply ; storage, subsidence and filtration and other methods of purification ; conveyance and distribution ; method of tapping a main under pressure; causes, detection and treatment of contaminated supply.

(2) Excreta, Refuse and Sewage.—Character and quant i ty in- rural and urban distr icts ; collection and removal from tbe dwelling, village, o r town. Nature, practical details and maintenance of the several methods employed. Disposal— sanitary and insanitary methods. Sewage-Treatment Works—Clarification, Precipitation, Biological treatment. Filtration, Irrigation ; Outfall. General principles of design ot necessary works. Street cleansing.

(3) Sanitary Planning and Construction of Buildings. —Hospitals, Schools and other Public Buildings, Factories (inclusive ot noxious or offensive t r ade premises), Establishments connected with Food Supplies, Dwelling Houses, Barracks, -Camps, Ships. Causes and prevention of dampness in buildings. Lighting, Warming and Ventilation —the characteristics and fitness of various means and methods in use.

(4) Materials used for Buildings and Sanitary Work.— Character, qualities and fitness of materials-. Brick, Stone, Sand, Lime, Cement, Concrete, Earthenware, Stoneware, Metals, Wood.

PRACTICAL PATHOLOGY AND BACTERIOLOGY.— See details under Laboratory Practice in Bacteriology etc.

•528 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 11116.

EXAMINATION, PART II .

AETIOLOGY, DIAGNOSIS AND PREVENTION OF DISEASE.—

Infectious, Endemic, and Epidemic disease, and those Epizootics which affect Man, and all Morbid Processes induced by environment.

The causes, clinical history, diagnosis, and prevention of endemic, epidemic, and epizootic diseases, and of morbid processes incidental to particular trades, or otherwise induced by environment.

•GENERAL HYGIENE—

(<i) Site and Environment of Dwellings and Other Premises.—Influence on health of position, aspect and climate, geological and meteorological conditions, soil and drainage.

(A) Food Supplies and Establishments connected therewith.

(c) Disposal of the Dead.—Burial and Cremation. (d) Effects of Insanitary Conditions.—Insufficient

house accommodation, vitiation of air, impure water, bad or insufficient food.

(e) Unhealthy Occupations.—Means ot mitigating or removing their unwholesomeness.

( f ) Nuisances Injurious or Dangerous to Health.— Modes of preventing or abating same.

SANITARY LAW AND ADMINISTRATION-(a) A general knowledge of English health laws, their

scope and extent. (A) Victorian Acts.—Health Act 1890 and Amending

Acts; Pure Food Act; Meat Acts ; Wine Acts ; Milk and Dairy Supervision Act ; Cemeteries Ac t ; Commerce Act (Commonwealth) in relation to Food, Drugs, and Clothing; Infant Life Protection Acts ; Local Government Act in relation to matters affecting H e a l t h ; Federal Quarantine Act ; and the Navigation Act as concerning Accommodation, Provisions and general Sanitary measures.

PUBLIC HEALTH. 529

(c) Powers, Duties and Responsibilities of Medical Officers of Health and ot Sanitary Inspectors, under the Health and allied Acts.

VITAL STATISTICS AND STATISTICAL METHODS

Calculation of Population, Birth Rate, Marriage Rate and Death Rate, Mortality from Zymotic Diseases, Sickness Rates, Relation between Occupation and Mortality ; Lite Tables, their construction and interpretation; the Value of statistical facts, averages, and methods.

NOTE.—The details prescribed for examination in Part I. and Par t I I . are intended for the assistance of candidates, and are not to be construed as limiting the power of the examiners to test the knowledge of candidates in any branch of Sanitary Science.

Books recommended :—Latest editions ot Kenwood—Public Health Laboratory Work (H. K.

Lewis, 130 Gower Street, London, W.C.). Notter and Firth—Theory and Practice of Hygiene

(J. A, A. Churchill, 7 Great Marlborough Street, London).

Rosenau—Preventive Medicine and Hygiene (Apple-ton).

Springthorpe—Therapeutics, Dietetics and Hygiene, Vol. I. (James Little, Melbourne).

Thresh and Porter—Preservation of Food and Food Examination. (J. & A. Churchill, 7 Great Marlborough Street, London).

Johnston—Australian Meat Inspection. (Geo. Robertson & Co. Pty. Ltd.).

Mansfield Merriman—Elements of Sanitary Engineering. (Wiley & Sons).

Nicholson—Smoke Abatement. (0. Griffin & Co. Ltd., Strand, London).

Reference may be made also to:— Ballard's Report as to Effluvium Nuisances (Knight

& Co., 90 Fleet Street, London). Stevenson and Murphy—Treatise on Hygiene and

Public Health (J. & A. Churchill, 7 Great Marlborough Street, London).

Victorian Year Book. Wiley—Foods and their Adulteration.


Candidates are also advised to study the current periodical literature of the subjects in such journals as the monthly " Journal of the Royal Sanitary Ins t i tu te" (Offices: 90 Buckingham Palace Road, London, 8.W.), the quarterly " Journal of Hygiene " (Cambridge University Press Warehouse, Fetter Lane, London), and publications issued by the Victorian Public Health Department.

RECOMMENDATIONS AND ANNOUNCEMENTS.

RECOGNISED HOSPITALS, INSTITUTIONS AND TEACHERS.

The Queeu's Memorial Infectious Diseases Hospital is recognised by the Council. The Faculty hag fixed the term of attendance a t one month. Instruction is given on Mondays, Wednesdays and Saturdays at 10 a.m. Such attendance must be supplemented at other recognised institutions during two additional months.

Facilities for instruction in Meteorology are given by Mr. H, A. Hunt , Commonwealth Meteorologist, a t t he Bureau of Meteorology.

RECOGNISED INSTRUCTORS IN FIELD AND OFFICE WORK.

Instruction will be given mainly by the following Officers of the Melbourne City Council:

The Health Officer of the City (Dr. T. W. Sinclair) and under him.

The Assistant Health Officer with the assistance of other officers ot tbe Health

Department of the City Council.

The Chief Medical Inspector of the Board of Public Health (Dr. E. Robertson) will provide instruction in Inspection ot Meat for Export, and facilities for inspection of sewage works and farms.

The Commonwealth Director of Quarantine (Dr. Cump-ston) will provide instruction in connection with the exclusion and stamping out of exotic disease, including Quarantine; and also in the preparation of vaccine lymph.

PUBLIC HEALTH. 631

SUGGESTED ORDER OF WORK.

March and April—Chemical Laboratory. Field and Office Work.

May—Field and Office Work. Infectious Diseases Hospital.

June and July—Chemical and Physiological Laboratories Field and Office Work.

August 2 to 16—Field and Office Work. Meteorological Course begins.

August 16 to October 16—Bacteriological Laboratory.

October 16 to November 3 0 - F i e l d and Office Work.

FEES. For Instruction :

Laboratory Work at the University during six months (3 terms) ... ... .£15 16 0

Practical Instruction in Field and Office Work during seven months ... 15 15 0

Attendance and Instruction in Meteorology and Climatology and the use of Instruments ... ... 2 2 0

Attendance at the Queen's Memorial Infectious Diseases Hospital during one month ... ... tee to be fixed

Fees for Laboratory Practice and for Field and Office Work to be paid to the University; other fees to be paid to the institution concerned.

For Examination .-For each part (I. and II.) ... J 5 6 0 For Sanitary Investigation and Reporting

alone ... ... ... ... 2 2 0

.84


FACULTY OF ENGINEERING.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD IN THE FOURTH TERM, 1915. AND FIRST TERM, 1910.

HONOUR WORK.

Except in tbe cases of subjects where special details are published, the Examination tor Honours will be on the lines indicated for Pass, but candidates will ri.'quire to have read more advanced work than for Pass, and to attain a higher standard and show more detailed knowledge.

PURE MATHEMATICS > , , . „ „, > see under Arts. MIXED MATHEMATICS ) NATURAL PHILOSOPHY) , „ . ,., i see under Science. CHEMISTKY )

MATHEMATICS (Diploma ot Architecture)—

Such Mathematics as will enable the student to follow the work of the Diploma Courses.

CHEMISTRY (Diplomaof Architecture)—

The nature ot matter. 'The solid, liquid, aud gaseous states. The atmosphere. Nature of combustion. Oxygen and nitrogen. Water : its com-position, occurrence, properties, purification and uses. Hydrogen. Carbon ; carbon oxides. Respiration ; Ventilation. Fundamental laws of chemical combination ; chemical notation, calculations and equations.

Sal t ; chlorine and hydrochloric acid ; Sodium and its compounds.

Sulphur. Ozone. Phosphorus. Silicon. Arsenic. Nitric acid ; ammonia. Destructive distillation of coal

and wood.

ENGINEERING. 533

The metals; alkalies, alkaline earths, ea r ths ; Aluminium, iron and the heavy metals ; some of the useful alloys.

Sal ts : . chlorides, carbonates, sulphates, nitrates, silicates.

Valence, double decomposition, reversible actions, velocity of reactions, equilibrium.

Electrolysis, electro-plating, ions. Organic compounds: hydrocarbons; alcohols, alde

hydes and acids : fats and soaps ; carbohydrates. Applications of chemical principles to :—

Hardness and the softening ot water. Building materials ; clay, mortar and cements ;

Bricks, wood and stone; Glass, asbestos and fireproof fabrics.

Rusting of iron and its prevention. Paints and varnishes.

Length of Course : — ' 2 lectures (with experiments) per week for 2 terms

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY (Diploma of Architecture)— An elementary treatment of subjects ot Natural

Philosophy, Par t I.

MIXED MATHEMATICS, PART II . (Engineering Course)—

The analytical treatment of the motions of particles and rigid bodies in two and three dimensions, including the -elements of gyrodynamies.

(About half a full course.) 'Text-book :—

Treatise on Dynamics—A. and J. G. Gray.

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, PART I I . (Engineering Course)— ...

LECTURES. Properties of matter. Heat. Electricity and Magnetism.

(As in Natural Philosophy, Par t II . , Science Course).


LABORATORY WORK.

In the Physical Laboratory during each of three terms, candidates for B.C.E., B.M.E., B.Mech.E. or B.E.E., and for Diplomas of -Mining and Metallurgy, four hours a week.

'Text-books:—

Wagstaff—The Properties of Matter. Edser—Heat. Brookes and.'Poyser — Magnetism and Electricity.

THERMO-DVNAMICS—

(As in Natural Philosophy, Part I II . , Science-Course).

Text-book :—

• Poynting and Thomson—Heat.

GEOMETRICAL AND MECHANICAL D R A W I N G -PLANE GEOMETRY—

Proportional division of a straight line. Making, figuring, and the use of plain and diagonal

scales. Geometrical problems connected with lines, rectilineal

figures and circles. Construction and graphical development of the ellipse

parabola and hyperbola. Cycloidal curves, involute spirals, and logarithmic

curves.

PROJECTIVE GEOMETRY—

Properties of similar figures. Principles of orthographic projectiou aud definition of

terms in use. Representation of points, lines and planes in space. Use ot indices. Projection of plane figures on inclined planes. Projection ot cube, prism, pyramid, tetrahedron, cylinder, cone and sphere resting on inclined planes and in given positions ou to the standard planes of reference.

ENGINEERING. 535

Isometric projection. Polar projection. Construction of sections ot conical and cylindrical sur

faces, and of surfaces of revolution. Interpenetration and development.

MECHANICAL DRAWING—

Hand sketching of machine or building details with working dimensions.

Making drawings of machine or building details. Simple tooth gearing. Inking, colouring, lettering, and finishing drawings. Tracing and sun printing.

Text Books :— Spooner—Geometrical-Drawing. o Angel—Plane and Solid Geometry. Low—Introduction to Machine Design and Draw

ing. Mitchell—Building Construction.

ENGINEERING DRAWING (for Diploma Courses).—

F I R S T YEAR.

Au elementary treatment of "Geometrical and Mechanical Drawing,"

SECOND AND T H I R D YEARS.

As in the corresponding classes for Engineering Design and Drawing.

Students must provide themselves with drawing instruments and materials ot a class approved by the lecturer.

ORAPHICS— The theory and application of graphic methods to:—

Addition, subtract ion, multiplication, division, powers, roots.

Curves. Slope of a curve. Sum curve. Contours and volumes. Moments, first and second derived areas, moments of

inertia, radius of gyration.

536 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, WIS.

Thrust. Bending and shear diagrams for fixed and rolling loads.

Stresses in simple structures. Motion diagrams connecting time, space, velocity and

acceleration.

Books recommended for reference:— Cathcart and Chaffee—Elements ot Graphic Statics. Henrici and Turner—Vectors and Rotors, Andrews—The Theory and Design of Structures (selec

ted portions). Morley—The Theory of Structures (selected portions). Goodman— Mechanics Applied to Engineering (selec

ted portions).

SURVEYING, PART I.—

Principles of construction, adjustment, and use of the surveying instruments—chain, steel band, clinometer, compass, barometer, thermometer., level, theodolite, and sextant. Chain surveying. Ranging of straight lines. Spirit and barometric levelling. Measurement of angles. Traversing. Survey and subdivision of land. Re-determination of boundaries. 'Titles Office surveys, including written descriptions of boundaries. Reduction of traverses with adjustment of discrepancies. Areas, including such as have curved and irregular boundaries. Deduction of formula; used in mensuration. Measurement of earthwork. Plotting from field notes and by co-ordinates.

Preparation and finishing ot plans. NOTE.—Candidates are required to submit plan and field

notes of a survey; reduced notes and drawing of a level section, and specimens ot lettering, drawings and tracings as required by the Lecturer.

Text Books :— Baker—Engineer's Surveying Instruments. Johnson—Theory and Practice of Surveying. Tracy—Plane Surveying.

Books for reference:— Instructions to Mining Surveyors, Victoria. Instructions to Surveyors, Queensland. Transactions of,the Victorian Institute of Surveyors.

ENGINEERING. 537;

SURVEYING, PART II.—

Setting out curves—circular, transition and vertical. Measurement of heights. Stadia and topographical surveying, including theory

of stadia instruments, plane tabling, photographic surveying, tacheometry and contouring.

Route traversing by mid-latitude method, and by Mercator's method. Map projections.

Determination ot latitude, azimuth, time and longitude with the use of ephemerides.

Introduction to geodetic surveying, trig, stations, laying out of base lines, spherical excess, convergence, declination of needle.

Calculation of probable error by method of least squares.

Adjustment of minor triangulation. Trial and permanent surveys for engineering works.

Selection ot roads and railroads in flat, undulating and mountainous country. Determination of gradients. Hydrographic surveying with tide gauging, ami preparation of charts.

Underground surveying ; connection and reduction of bearings to datum ot surface survey; the survey of vertical and inclined shafts, drives and workings ; mineral veins, lodes, leads, and drifts;

• with the measurement ot ore bodies.. Preparation and finishing of plans. Construction of

mine plans.

NOTE.—Candidates are required to produce plan and field notes of an original traverse and subdivisional survey, and a topographical contour map of the area surveyed during the summer camps to the satisfaction of the Lecturer.

Caudidates tor the Diploma iu Mining are not required to puss in the following branches of the subject, viz.:

Measurement of heights, Route traversing, Map. projections, Determination of time and longitude. Introduction to geodetic surveying, Hydrographical surveying and tide gauging;

but they are recommended to attend lectures on the complete course:


Text-books:— Nagle—Field Manual for Railroad Engineers. Johnson—Theory and Practice of Surveying. Baker—Engineer's Surveying Instruments, Young—Navigation and Nautical Astronomy. Brough—Treatise on Mine Surveying.

Books for reference:— Qannet—Manual of Topographical Methods. Reed—Topographical Drawing and Sketching. The Regulations for the guidance of Surveyors,

issued by the Surveyors' Board and by the Mining Department of Victoria.

'llie Transactions of the Victorian Institute of Surveyors.

Middleton and Chad wick—A Treatise on Surveying. Chauvenet—Spherical and Practical Astronomy. Clarke—Geodesy. Reports of U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. Wellington—Railway location. Wharton—Hydrographical Surveying.

STRENGTH AND ELASTICITY OP MA'TERIALS (Applied Mechanics)—

Determination of strength and elasticity of materials by testing machines and their accessory apparatus.

Forces acting on structures, including gravity, fluid pressure, earth pressure, pressure due to liquids and gases in motion.

Stability of piers, cliiiuneys, dams, retaining walls and floating bodies of simple form.

Bending moments, shearing forces, moduli of sections, and moments of resistance of beams.

Stresses in framework structures determined by calculation and by'graphic statics.

Strength and proportions of tension members, columns, and their connections, the design of girders and • roofs. Factors of safety.

Stresses in arches, domes, suspension bridges, and hollow shells exposed to internal or external pressure.

Elastic behaviour of structures.

ENGINEERING. 539

Text-books:— Morley—Strength of Materials. Wood—Strength and Elasticity of Structural Mem

bers. Andrews—The Theory and Design of Structures.

Books for reference:— Ewing—Strength of Materials. Johnson—Materials of Construction. Kernot—Common Errors in Iron Bridge Design. Marten—Handbook of Testing Materials. Popplewell—Experimental Engineering. Warren—Engineering Construction.

CIVIL ENGINEERING, PART I.—

'J'he financial aspect of engineering problems. Effect of rate of interest on money upon design of works.

'Timber: The properties of the various kinds of timber used in construction, and the defects they are liable to; seasoning;.file-driving; jbints.

Masonry, and brickwork: The properties, defects, and mode of quarrying various kinds of stone. The properties, defects, and mode of manufacture of bricks; definitions of the various classes of masonry and brickwork ; precautions necessary to secure gixxl work. The manufacture and mode of testing limes and cements. The preparation and properties of mortar und concrete.

Reinforced concrete. 'The design and construction of bridges iu timber, steel,

stone, brick, concrete, and reinforced concrete, including deep and difficult foundations. Sett ing out. Coffer dams.

Text-books:— Rivington—Building Construction, Vol. I I I . Rankine—Civil Engineering; selected portions. Warren—Engineering Construction in Steel and

Timber. Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure—Modern Framed

Structures. Turneaure and Maurer—Reinforced Concrete Con

struction.


Books for reference :— Mann—Australian Timbers. Warren—Publications for the Government of New

South Wales on Australian Timbers. Julius—Publications for the Government of West

ern Australia on Western Australian 'Timbers. Fatten—Foundations. Vernon Harcourt—Civil Engineering. Marsh—Reinforced Concrete. 'Taylor and Thompson—Concrete.- Plain and Rein

forced. Papers on Reinforced Concrete, Concrete-steel,

and Ferro-concrete, read at the St. Louis Congress, published in Par t E, Vol. LIV. Transactions ot American Society of Civil Engineers (1905)

Current numbers of the journal, " Concrete and Constructional Engineering."

Proceedings ot the International Association for testing materials.

DESIGN AND DRAWING—

Original designs and drawings, with specifications and quantities, for simple structures such as a small timber, composite, steel, reinforced concrete, or brick bridge, or a roof truss, of a kind approved by the Lecturer, are to be completed by the Student and submitted for examination.

Designs will be based upon work done iu Civil Engineering, Part I., and in Strength and Elasticity of Materials.

CIVIL .ENGINEERING. PART II.— The design and construction ot more important struc

tures than those dealt with in Civil Engineering, Part I.

Railways: Conditions governing methods of transport; > location of standard gauge railways ; gradients

and curves; earthworks, including tunnelling, together with setting out and selection of appliances; culverts ; permanent way; arrangement of junctions and station yards; signals; interlocking and electrical equipment, &c.; gauges ; narrow gauge mountain and mono-rail railways; rolling stock; brakes; railway management and finance.

ENGINEERING. 5 4 1

Roads: Clearing, grading, and forming. Macadam's and Telford's systems of road making. Selection and preparation ot materials. Roads in sandy ground and on wet clay. Maintenance of roads.

Streets: Metalling, pitching, asphalt and wood paving,, kerbing, channelling, and footpaths. Cleaning and maintenance.

Tramways: Horse, steam, cable, and electric tramways-Marine Works: Waves and their destructive power,

littoral drifts, bars. Tidal and non-tidal harbours, training walls, jetties, breakwaters, piers,, wharves, docks, graving docks -and their accessories. Lighthouses, lightships, beacons, buoys-Dredges. Dredging. Reclamation with dredged material.

Text books:— Rankine—Civil Engineering (selected portions). Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure—Modern Framed

Structures. Mill—Railway Construction. Copperthwaito—'Tunnel Shields. Tratman—Railway Track and Track Work. Byles—Railway Signalling. Coane—A ustralasian Roads. Mountain—Wood-paving and Road-making in Aus

tralia. R. H. Smith—Electric Traction. Shield—Harbour Engineering. Cunningham—Dock Engineering. Chance—Modem Lighthouse Practice.

Books for consultation :— Langdon — The Application of Electricity to^

Railways. Rayuar Wilson—Railway Signalling. Aitken—Road Making and Maintenance. J. Walker-Smith—Dust less Roads and Tar-mac

adam. Vernon Harcourt—Civil Engineering as applied to-

Construction. Fairchild—Street Railways. Ashe and Keely—Electric Railways.


Wilson and Lydall—Electrical Traction. Vernon Harcourt—Harbours and Docks. Stevenson—Construction of Harbours. Vernon Harcourt—Rivers and Canals. Wheeler—'Tidal Rivers. Colson—Notes on Docks and Dock Construction. Stevenson—Canal and River Engineering. Proceedings of the Permanent International

Association of Navigation Congresses. Proceedings ot the Institution of Civil Engineers. Transactions of the American Society of Civil

Engineers. Each student is required to submit at the examination of

t he fourth year the plans, etc., prescribed under the heading -" Civil Engineering, Design and Drawing."

Candidates for the degree, of M.C.E. and for final honours Are required to submit designs of a structure of advanced type, the subject of the design to be chosen by the candidate submitting it.

•CIVIL ENGINEERING DESIGN AND DRAWING— Approved original designs and drawings, with complete

specifications, estimates and quantities (together with a fair copy ot all computations), are to be completed by the Student and submitted for examination: (I) of a work such as a steel bridge with brick, stone or concrete abutments, -or of a wharf, dock or lighthouse; and (2) for a scheme ot water supply or sewerage; or of offtake works for channels, or of a pump or turbine.

Designs will be based upon work done iu Civil Engineer ing Parts I. and II. , Hydraulic Engineering, and Strength And Elasticity of Materials.

Books of reference will be recommended.

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING, PART 1.—

Electrical and magnetic measurements, units and standards.

Lines of force. Magnetic properties of iron. Magnetic circuits and design of electromagnets. Electrical measuring instruments.

ENGINEERING. 545-

Types of ammeters and voltmeters, their sources of error and relative advantages for different classes of service. Ohmmeters, Wattmeters, Watt-hour and Ampere-hour meters.

Direct cun-ent.—Dynamos and motors. Characteristics of shunt, series, and compound machines. Outlines of design. Energy losses. Efficiency and rating.

Alternating Currents,—Generation of alternating E.M.F-Wave forms, sine wave, R.M.S. value and maximum value. Current and E.M.F. waves, clock diagrams. Effects of inductance and capacity.. Power in an alternating current circuit. Power factor. Transformers, construction and theory, connections for different voltages, use in power-transmission and distribution.

Polyphase systems. Types of alternators, parallel running. Synchronous motor. Induction motors and other A.C. motors. Rotary converters and motor generators.

Electric IJJuminoiton— Photometry and standards of light. Candle power, mean horizontal, and meant

spherical. Efficiency of electric lamps. Incandescent lamps. Variations of C.P. with

voltage of supply. Light distribution, efficiency, and useful lite of different types.

A re lamps. Regulating mechanisms for different systems. Light distribution and efficiency-

Electric heating, with applications.

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING, PABT II.—

A. Tlie Oeneration, transmission and distribution of electrical

energy and its applications— Direct and alternating systems, applications of

storage batteries, direct current dynamos and alternators, arrangement of machinery and switchgear in power bouses, choice o f

5 4 4 DETAILS-OF SUBJECTS, 11)15.

capacities of generating sets, load curves, potential regulation and automatic regulators.

Calculations for Transmission lines and distributing systems.

Cables, Interior Wiring. Electric Meters and tariffs. Installation and Testing of electrical machinery.

Applications of electric energy, including— Illuminating and heating, motive power for machinery, electric windings, elevators and cranes, electric furnaces, welding and brazing, and electrochemical processes.

Electric Traction—

Systems in use. Trolley wire, Third rail. Conduit and autocar systems. Motors and controllers, multiple unit control, braking systems, overhead and track construction, rail bending and welding.

Design of Electrical Plant and apparatus.

•Calibration and testing of electrical measuring instruments. Magnetic measurements and Iron testing, Ballistic Galvanometer and Flux Meter.

Testing of Insulating Materials and insulators for resistivity and dielectric strength.

Types of Oscillograph and Wave tracers. Harmonic analysis of wave forms.

Theory of Alternating current apparatus. (Transformers, Potential Regulators, Alternators, Synchronous and Asynchronous Motors, Rotary and Motor Converters, and Alternating Current Measuring Instruments, etc.).

Forced and free vibrations in electric circuits, Production of electric oscillations and Propagation and detection of electric waves. Radio-telegraphy and telephony.

ENGINEERING. 5 4 5

Fourth Year Electrical students to take parts A and B. Fourth Year Mechanical students to take part A. Work in the laboratory will be arranged to illustrate the

subjects of lectures given in parts I. and I I . Research work will be encouraged, and advanced Electri

cal students are recouimended . to undertake some during their final year.

Text and Reference Books will be recommended to tbe classes by the lecturer, during the year.

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING DESIGN AND DRAWING—

Design as applied to electrical underta kings.

Approved original designs and drawings relating to the above, with specifications and estimates (together with a fair copy of all computations), are to be completed by the s tudent and submitted tor examination, a t such times during the year as may be notified.

Books for reference will be recommended.

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING, PART I.—

Theory of machines and mechanism. Mechanical transmission ot power. Manufacture of iron and steel. Machine tools. Wind motors. Water motors.

'Text-books :— Kennedy—Mechanics of Machinery. Dunkerley—Mechanism. Greenwood—Manufacture of Iron and Steel. Lineham—Mechanical Engineering. Other references will be quoted by the Professor.

.MECHANICAL'ENGINEERING, PART 11 —

Heat engines and generators. Refrigeration machinery. Pumps and Turbines. Mechanical handling of materials.

5 4 6 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 191!..

'Text-books:— Ewing—Steam Engine. Ewing—Mechanical production of cold. Neilson—Steam turbine.

Books for reference :— Cotterill—Steam Engine. Peabody—Thermodynamics of the Steam Engine. Pullen—Experimental Engineering. Davey—Pumping Machinery. Donkin—Gas Engines.

Other references will be quoted by the Professor.

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING, PART III.— A.—The work of Parts I. and I I . on a higher stand

ard, together with some work on Balancing of Engines, Central Power Stations, Generation and Distribution of Energy; Testing of Power Plants.

B.—Marine Engines and Accessories; Principles of Design and Propulsion of Ships. Mechanics of the Aeroplane.

In this class the work will be guided largely by the work the student will follow on completion ot his course. Reference works will he recommended by the Professor.

ENGINEERING DESIGN AND DRAWING, PART I. Joints and Fasteners. Joints for fluid and gas pressure. Transmission Mechanism. Steam Boilers and fittings. Proper use of materials-Specifications. Drafting.

Approved original drawings and designs selected from the above list with brief specifications are to be completed by the students, and submitted for examination a t such times during the year as may be notified.

Text-books :— Unwin—Machine Design, Part I . Any recognized Mechanical Engineer's Pocket Book,

ENGINEERING. 547

Books for reference :— Spooner—Machine Design Construction and Drawing.

.Low and Bovis—A Manual ot Machine Drawing and Design.

Handbook for Machine Designers and Draftsmen— Halsey.

ENGINEERING DESIGN AND DRAWING, PART I I .

Steam Engines and other Prime Movers. Auxiliary Steam Machinery. Lay out of Power Plants, Piping systems, Ac. Cranes, Hoists, Conveyors. Machine Tools. Blowers. 0 General examples of Machine Design, including

simple Electrical appliances. Approved original drawings and designs selected from

the above list with specifications are to be completed by the student and submitted for examination at such times during the year as may be notified.

Text-books :• — Unwin—Machine Design, Part II. Haeder and Powles —Handbook of the Steam Engine

Books for reference will be recommended from time to time.

MACHINE DESIGN AND DRAWING—

Steam turbines Oil and gas engines The distribution of power by mechanical, electrical and

hydraulic methods Air compressors and machinery Hoisting and conveying machinery Ropeways Refrigerating machinery Machine tools for special work Lay out of power plants and mills

Approved original designs and drawings selected from such machines as appear in the above list, with specifications and estimates (together with a fair copy of all

M


computations), are to be completed by the Student and submitted for examination, a t such times during the year as may be notified

Books for reference will be recommended.

HYDRAULICS AND HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING, PART I.—

Hydraulic computations. Storage Reservoirs.—Earthen, masonry, concrete,

and other dams; waste-weirs, by-washes, outlet works; valves and valve towers.

Weirs and outlet works in concrete, masonry and « timber.

Pumping plants for high and low lifts. Location and general arrangement.

The hydraulics of pumps and turbines. Offtake channels, sluice gates, flumes and inverted

siphons ; cast iron, wrought iron, steel, wooden-stave and reinforced concrete pipe lines; air valves and scour valves.

'Text-books :— Parker—Control of Water. Fidler—Calculations in Hydraulic Engineering,

Part II . Lea - Hydraulics. Rankine - Civil Engineering; selected portions. Turneaure and Russell—Public Water Supplies. Greene—Pumping Machinery. Loewenstein and Crissy—Centrifugal Pumps.

Books tor reference :— Humber—Water Supply. Hamilton Smith—Hydiaulics. Merriman—Hydraulics. Bellasis—Hydraulics. Kennedy—Hydraulic Diagrams. Schuyler—Reservoirs. Turner and Brightmore—Waterworks Engineering. Wegmann—Masonry Dams. Innes—Centrifugal Pumps and Turbines. Church—Hydraulic Motors.

ENGINEERING. 549

HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING, PART II.—

Service reservoirs; settling tanks and filter beds; water towers and tanks.

Town reticulations; valves, fireplugs, hydrants, meters, etc.; cleaning pipe lines.

River improvement and flood prevention. Stream gauging. Irrigation works. 'The sewerage of towns and isolated buildings, sew

age disposal, sanitary services and refuse destructors.

Determination of waterways for bridges and culverts.

Text-books:— Burton—The Water Supply of Towns. Thomas and Watt—The Improvement of Rivers. Haicourt—Rivers and Canals. Johnson—Surveying; portions relating to Hydro-

graphic Surveying. Wilson—Irrigation Engineering. Moore—Sanitary Engineering. Raikes—Sewage Disposal.

Books for reference:—

• Mackenzie—Notes on Irrigation Works. Hanbury Brown—Irrigation. Willcocks—Egyptian Irrigation. Buckley—Irrigation Works of India. Mansergh—Report on Sewerage of Melbourne. Staley—The Separate System.

Each student entering for examination in both parts of Hydraulic Engineering is required to submit at the Examination of the fourth year the plans, etc., prescribed under the heading " Civil Engineering Design and Drawing."

Candidates for the degree of M.C.E., and tor-final honours are required to submit designs of hydraulic works or appliances, the subject of the design to be chosen by the candidate submitting it.

550 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, IBIS.

GEOLOGY, PART I. (Engineering Course).—

This course will be taken by third year Civil and Mining Engineering students. I t will include all the work set out under Geology, Part I. (See under Science.)

In addition students in Mining Engineering will do some additional economic geology ; and students in Civil Engineering will do work on the geology of building stones and road metals, and geological considerations affecting tbe location of sites for dams, reservoirs, etc.

Students will be expected in addition to attend a field excursion to be' held during the last two days of the third term and the Monday following.

GEOLOGY, PART II., AND MINING GEOLOGY— This course will be taken by fourth year students in

Mining Engineering. I t will include the work set out under Pa r t I I . , together with the Mining Geology given in the details for Geology, Par t I I I . (see under Science). Students will perform additional laboratory work illustrative of Mining Geology.

Students will be expected to at tend an excursion in Mining Geology, to be held during the first three days of the third term.

GEOLOGY OF BUILDING STONES (Diploma of Architecture)—

The occurrence of rocks in the field and the structures they present.

The influence of weathering on the mineral constituents ot such rooks; their texture and structure so far as they affect the usefulness of materials.

The physical character and chemical composition of rock-forming minerals occurring in building stones and road-metals.

The geological and mineralogical causes which determine the quality, colour, durability and strength of building stones.

Book for Reference: — Howe—The Geology of Building Stones.

ENGINEERING. 551

GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. PART I. (Diploma Course).—

This course is equivalent to Geology, Part I. (Engineering Course.)

CHEMISTRY AND GEOLOGY OP ORE DEPOSITS— This course will include selected portions of Geology,

Par t II . , and Mining Geology.

MINING ENGINEERING AND MINING—

1. Prospecting. Boring methods and appliances. 2. Breaking ground. Mining tools. Explosives.

Drilling and blasting. 3. Development and working. 'Tunnels, shafts, levels.

Open-working, stoping, panelling, and other systems.

4. Support of mine excavations—by timbering, masonry and iron, pillars and stowing.

.5. Ventilation. Lighting. «5. Haulage—tramways, serial ropeways. 7. Winding appliances. 8. Mine drainage, pumping appliances, underground

dams. 9. Ore dressing—Reduction, sorting, sizing, concentra

tion. 10. Hydraulic sluicing. Elevating and dredging.

Puddling. 11. Examination and survey of mineral properties.

Sampling and contents of lodes. Construction of mine maps.

12. Preparation of specifications. Design of mine plants. 13. Mining Acts. Mine labour. Administration.

Text-books:— Le Neve Foster—Ore and Stone Mining. Storms—Timbering and Mining. Richards—Ore Dressing,

Works for reference:— Transactions of the Australasian Insti tute of Min

ing Engineers. Transactions of the Institution of Mining and

Metallurgy.

5t>2 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1915.

Transactions ot American Institute of Mining Engineers.

The Annual Reports of the States' Mining Departments.

Students in Mining Engineering and Mining will be expected to hand in original designs of Mining Plant of a kind approved by the Lecturer.

METALLURGY, PARI' I.—

METALLURGY.

The physical and chemical .properties of metals and the common alloys. Classification of fuels. The calorific power and intensity of fuels. The preparation of fuels and their application to metallurgical processes. Refractory materials. Slags and fluxes. Furnaces and appliances used in the processes of extracting tin, copper, mercury, from their ores. Copper smelting in reverbera-tory furnaces. The extraction of mercury from its ores by dry methods. The smelting of tin concentrates in shaft and reverberatory furnaces.

The treatment of gold ores hy amalgamation, chlorina-tion and cyanidation. Methods of cleaning up. The retorting, smelting and refining of gold bullion.

Books recommended:— Fulton—Principles of Metallurgy. Schnabel and Louis—Handbook of Metallurgy. Louis—Handbook ot Gold Milling. Rose—The Metallurgy of Gold. Julian and Smart—'The Cyaniding of [Gold and Silver

Ores. ASSAYING.

Construction and use of furnaces for assaying. Manufacture and use of crucibles, roasting dishes, scorifiers, cupels. Character and use of fluxes and reagents. Sampling ores by manual labour. The use of the assay balance, weights and scales. Dry methods for the assay of tin ores, copper

BNGINEEBING. 553

ores, lead ores, silver ores, gold ores. Volumetric methods for the estimation of iron, copper and lead ores. Simple cases of cyanide determinations. 'The determination of free chlorine in chlorine solutions. Partial analysis of easily decomposable blast furnace slags. Proximate analysis of coal. Simple methods of partial gas analyses.

Books recommended:— Beringer—Text-book on A assaying. Presenilis—Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis

(Cohn). The Examination will be in part written and in par t

practical.

METALLURGY, PART II.— METALLURGY.

Special attention will be devoted to. the methods for the extraction of lead, gold, silver and copper from their ores. The metallurgy of iron, nickel, cobalt, antimony, bismuth, arsenic, platinum, zinc, aluminium, sodium. Design of metallurgical plants. General principles of ore dressing!

- The chief appliances used tor the crushing, sizing, classification and concentration of ores.

Calculation of furnace charges. The use of calorimeters and pyrometers.

Hooks recommended:— Roberts Austen—Introduction to the Study of Metal

lurgy. Peters—Principles of Copper Smelting. Peters—Practice of Copper Smelting. Hofman—The Metallurgy of Lead. Collins—The Metallurgy of Silver and the Metallurgy,

of Lead. Lang—Matte Smelting. Turner—The Metallurgy of Iron. Hai-bord and Hall—The Metallurgy of Iron and Steel.' Schnabel—Metallurgy. The Mineral Industry. Transactions of various Metallurgical Societies-.and

current literature.


A S S A Y I N G .

Samples of ores, metals and metallurgical products Sampling machines. Gravimetric and volumetric methods required in technical operations for the determination of lead, silver, mercury, bismuth, copper, antimony, arsenic, tin, iron, cobalt, nickel, manganese, chromium, aluminium, platinum, calcium, magnesium, potassium, sodium, tungsten, silica, sulphur, phosphorus. Electrolytic methods, including separations for the determination of copper, nickel, chlorine. Gold and silver bullion assay. Preparation of pure gold and silver. Testing cyanide mill solutions.

Books recommended:— Furman—Manual of Practical Assaying. Treadwell—Analytical Chemistry. Classen—Quantitative Analysis by Electrolysis. Blair—Chemical Analysis of Iron. Clennel—The Chemistry ot Cyanide Solutions. Lunge and Keane—Technical Methods of Chemical

Analysis. The Examination will be in part written aud in part

practical. Studente in Parts I. and 11. will he required to attend at

the Laboratories for at least twelve hours per week during the lecture terms, such attendance to be within the hours set apart in the 'Time 'Table for Practical Metallurgical work.

Students will also be required to record their hours of attendance in a book provided for that purpose.

Written reports, showing the results of assays or analyses completed, must be handed in to the lecturer at the close of the day during which such results were obtained, together with the final precipitates or assay buttons, upon which the reported results are based.

ARCHITECTURE (Historical and Practical)—

The lectures in Historical and Practical are delivered in alternate years to students for the Diploma in Architecture.

ENGINEERING. 555

Students in Civil Engineering will require to do selected portions of the subject in their Fourth year.

Drawing and Planning lectures are delivered in each .year, and include the planning of private houses, business premises, churches, public buildings, hospitals, government and mnnicipal buildings, theatres, etc.

Examinations on Planning for Diploma Students may be held in each year.

Diploma students in their Second Year and Fourth Year students in Civil Engineering will be expected a t the Pass or Honour Examination to hand in drawings, with brief specification, of a design to lie set or approved by the Lecturer.

Diploma Students in their Third year will be expected to hand in at the Pass or Honour Examination drawings, together with a specification, of a more advanced subject of design, to be set or approved by tbe lecturer.

Students entering for Honours will be expected to hand in drawings of an original design with, specifications and •estimates.

HISTORICAL.

Historical sketch of Egyptian, Assyrian, Greek, Roman, Romanesque, Byzantine, Gothic, Renaissance, and Modern architecture, illustrated by reference to existing buildings, analyzing their plans, construction, and decoration, and the influences of material, climate, tools, religion, race, etc., upon these elements.

PRACTICAL.

The materials used by architects. Building calculations and factors of safety. The constructive details ot buildings; specifications

and contracts; arrangements for lighting, warming, ventilation, and drainage.

'The requirements of the Board of Public Health, of the Building Acts, and the Metropolitan Board of Wbrks.


Text-books. —

Planning—The Principles of Planning (latest edition), by Percy L. Marks.

Practical. — Australian Building Practice, by J'. Nahgle.

Modern Drainage Principles and Practice, by A. M. Henderson.

Fletcher's Architectural Hygiene. Historical.—Short Critical History of Architecture,

by H. H. Statham. Introduction to Gothic Architecture,

by J. H. Parker. Gothic Architecture, by Ed. Corroyer.

Books for consultation :— History of Architecture, by Banister Fletcher. Architectural Drawing, by Phene Spiers. Fergusson's History, Ancient and Modern, 4 vols. Building Construction (Rivington's), 4 vols.

ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING (Elementary)— Use of drawing instruments, simple lettering and

coloring, drawing of simple architectural plans, sections, and elevations from figured sketches, simple freehand drawing from ornament, geometrical and graphic methods of working out problems.

Book for consultation :— Architectural Drawing,—R. Phene Spiers.

RECOMMENDATIONS AND ANNOUNCEMENTS.

REQUIREMENTS AS TO WORK.

1. Lectures in the Engineering School commence on the 13th Monday of the year. All Engineering Students are required to devote the three weeks of the First Term before the beginning of Engineering lectures, to Office work a t the University.

ENGINEERING. 55T

The Second and Third Year Civil and Mining Students, Second Year Mechanical and -Electrical Students aud Second Year Diploma Students (see Regulations), are required, before the beginning of lectures, to devote-three weeks to practical. Survey work in the field. During the First Term the office work and plotting con-, nected therewith must be done to the satisfaction of the-Lecturer in Surveying. If this work is not done at the University Survey Camp and in the University' Drawing Office, a satisfactory certificate from a competent surveyor must be produced. Every student must attend one University Survey Camp, and do the Office work in connection therewith during his course for the Degree.

Mechanical and Electrical Students are required to spend five weeks, before the beginning of lectures, in acquiring a practical knowledge of Engineering in an office or works previously approved by the Faculty. Arrangements have-been made by which this work may be done in the workshops of the Victorian Railways.

The Dean of the Faculty of Engineering is empowered to excuse the attendance of Third or Fourth Year Students who may be engaged during the above period in obtaining practical experience, and to authorise the substitution of Office work for Practical or Field work or vice versa in. such cases as he may deem expedient. Students engaged in Public Offices to be exempt from these requirements.

2. Students shall sigu the attendance book and remain-in attendance during the hours notified in the Time-Table ; shall keep note books, report books, and calculation books fully aud neatly; and conduct themselves as it they were in an office doing responsible work and shall not absent themselves except for attendance on the Lectures, Laboratory, Field work or Excursions of the year without consent of the Lecturer concerned, And no Student sliall be admitted to Examination unless his report and calculation books be approved by the Dean, in consultation with the Lecturer concerned, unless he produce a Certificate showing that he has fulfilled this condition as to Office work, or has similarly attended in some Office approved by tbe Dean.

The Dean shall have power to grant remission in case-ot illness or for other sufficient reason.


UNIVERSITY SURVEY CAMP.

To enable students to obtain practical experience in Surveying, as required by the Regulations, a students camp is formed in the long vacation in each year, ami three •clear weeks are devoted to the practising of various surveying operations in the field, under the direction of the lecturer. The site of the camp is'decided upon by the lecturer, who may ascertain what sites are preferred by a majority of intending members.

Practical work at the camp includes the performance -of most of the operations of land—and engineering— .surveying, including topographical, hydrographical, and astronomical work. 'The instruments used are provided by the University.

Computations and Office work in connection with the •camp will be required to be done during the first three weeks of the First 'Term.

Members of the camp defray their own travelling and other expenses, including the provision of tents. The University possesses a limited number of tents, which may be hired by members of the camp at a rate sufficient to -cover wear and tear and renewal.

Students in single subjects may be admitted by the lecturer to the camp.

Details as to commissariat, travelling fares, etc., are Atteniled to by a committee elected by intending memliers At a meeting held for the 'purpose during the second or th i rd term of the year preceding that in which the camp is formed.

AMBULANCE CLASSES.

Classes for instruction in Ambulance Work (First Aid) will be held during the Second 'Term if there is H sufficient number of entries. Fee, 10s. 6d. Entry to be made before the end of the First Tenn.

READING AND EXCURSIONS.

All Third aud Fourth Year Students are recommended to peruse the Transactions of the Institution of Civil Engineers, London, and the current numbers of the leading Engineering journals.

' ENGINEERING. 5 5 9

Excursions will be made to various engineering and architectural works, and manufacturing establishments-Students will be required to attend these excursions, and to take notes of what they inspect unless specially exempted by the Lecturer. Questions may be set at the Examinations upon the objects inspected a t these excursions.

PRACTICAL WORK POR DEGREE OF B.M.E. AND POR DIPLOMAS OP MINING AND

METALLURGY.

The Faculty has prescribed the following rules in regard to practical work for tbe Degree of B.M.E. and for Diplomas in Mining and in Metallurgy, to be done a t the conclusion of the. University course ;—

DEGREE OF B.M.E. (Regulation XVIIa., Section 17) AND

DIPLOMA IN MINING (Regulation XVIId., Section 6).

Not more than three months may be spent in Mine Surveying and Draughtsmanship and not less than three months in underground mining under a competent Mine Manager or Mining Engineer; not more than four months may be spent in Practical Metallurgy under a competent Metallurgist; not more than three months in Geological Surveying under a competent Geological Surveyor, and not more than three months in all in unskilled work.

DIPLOMA IN METALLURGY (Regulation XVIIe., Section 6).

Not less than eight months shall be spent in purely Metallurgical work under a competent Metallurgist, and not more than four months may be spent in Assaying a t a works under a competent Assayer, or in research work or the Commercial Treatment of Ores under a competent Instructor in the University, a School of Mines, or other institution approved by the Faculty.

DETAILS FOR PINAL HONOURS.

The examination for Final Honours may include all work prescribed for the specified subjects.


MUSIC.

.DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

FOR THE ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS TO BE

HELD IN THE FOURTH TERM, 1915, AND

FIRST TERM, 1916.

BACHELOR OF MUSIC.

F I R S T YEAR. HARMONY—

Three and Four Parts. Harmonic Analysis of passages selected from the classics. Harmonization of Melody.

COUNTERPOINT—

All species of counterpoint in not more than four parts (one moving part). Combined counterpoint in three parts.

.FORM AND ANALYSIS— Accent, cadence, metre, rhythm, phrase, &c. A general

examination ot the principal musical forms, illustrated chiefly from Bach's Suites, and Mozart's, Haydn's, and Beethoven's earlier Sonatas.

HISTORY, LITERATURE. &. .ESTHETICS OF MUSIC—

History of the progress of the art, from the beginning ot the Christian era.

A more detailed knowledge ot the period selected for special study.

A critical knowledge of such compositions its may be prescribed throughout the year.

MUSIC. 561

Books recommended for reference:— Harmony—Bridge and Sawyer, Macpherson, Front,

Mansfield. Counterpoint—Bridge, Macpherson, Gladstone (Parts

I. and II .) . Summary of Musical History—Parry. History of Music—Hunt. Elements of the Beautiful in Music—Pauer.

SECOND YEAR. HARMONY—

Not more than four parts, vocal and instrumental. Ground Bass. Accompaniment. Modulation, simple and extraneous. Elementary composition.

COUNTERPOINT— All species in not more than four parts, one moving

part, (i.e., . in second, third, fourth, or fifth species). For Honours, three parts in fifth species against the C.F.

FORM AND ANALYSIS— All Musical forms used by the Great Masters.

HISTORICAL AND ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTATION—

The history of the Orchestra aud development of the ar t ot instrumentation to the middle of the XlXth Century.

A critical knowledge of orchestral works prescribed during the year.

PLAYING FROM SCORE— Candidates will be required to read at sight from

vocal scores (with and without C clefs) and easy quartott scores.

HISTORY, LITERATURE, & ÊSTHETICS OF MUSIC— In addition to the subject matter of the Lectures

Candidates will be required to show a critical knowledge of such works as may be prescribed throughout the year.

5 6 2 DI'.TAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1915

DOUKLE COUNTERPOINT, CANON AND FUGUK PART I.

Double louiiterpoiiit at the octave in two parts. Canon (a) in two parts, (b) in two parts with third (free) part added. Fugue: The laws of (a) Subject and Answer; (h) Exposition; (<) Episodes; (-/) Stretto.

Books recommended for reference:—

Counterpoint—Cherubim, Prout, Kidston, Gladstone. Fugue—Higgs, Prout. Musical Form—Prout. Lectures on Musical Analysis—Banister. Instrumentation—Riemann's Catechism (Augeuer),

Prout (Novollo). Art of Music—Parry. History of Music—Naumann, Riemann. Tbe Oxford History of Music. Dictionaries—Grove. Riemann.

'THIRD YEAR.

HARMONY AND COMPOSITION—

(n) A work composed by the Candidate, for solo voices* chorus, and small orchestra, must be submitted to the Ormond Professor not later than the last day of the Third Term. The composition should include examples of solo aria, unaccompanied vocal quartett , canonic, and fugal writing, etc.

In presenting any composition the Candidate will be required to make a written declaration that it is his own unaided n-ork.

N.B.—The exercise is not required from those who present Practical Study.

(b) Advanced Harmony up to five parts.

COUNTERPOINT up to five parts.

MUSIC. 563

INSTRUMENTATION AND ORCHESTRATION, PLAYING FROM SCORE—

'The nature and compass of the various instruments and their employment in the scores of the Great Masters.

The history of orchestration. Candidates will be required to show a critical know

ledge of compositions prescribed and to score for orchest ra a passage set for the purpose; also to read at sight from vocal scores, quartet t scores and the easier scores of Mozart and Haydn, etc.

LITERATURE OF -MUSIC— Candidates must show familiarity with Handel's chief

oratorios, Bach's Matthew Passion, Suites, and tlie " 48," Mozart's Operas, Haydn's Creation, Beethoven's Masses, Schubert's and Schumann's Songs, Mendelssohn's Oratorios and Psalms, as well us the orchestral and chamber music of these composers. They should submit a list of the works in which they are prepared to be examined to the Ormond Professor not later than the last day of tlie Third Term.

DOUBLE COUN'TERPOIS'T, CANON AND FUGUE, PART II.—

Double Counterpoint at the octave tenth and twelfth. Free Counterpoint on a Choi-ale (Figured Chorale). Fugue in not more than four parts.

DIPLOMA IN MUSIC.

FIRST YEAR.

MUSICAL TERMINOLOGY—

A thorough knowledge is required of all the details of musical notation—notes, clefs, signatures, scales, intervals, inversions, signs and terms, transposition, etc. Such subjects connected with elementary History, Form, Instrumentation, etc., are dealt with as in the Director's class,


EAR TESTS AND SIGHT R E A D I N G -

HARMONY—

Scales. Tonality. The various chords used in auy key. Cadences. Keys and their relationships. General laws of part writing. Figured Bass. Harmonization of simple Melodies in three and four parts.

COUNTERPO I N T -All species in two und three parts (not more than one

moving part).

Books recommended for reference:— Ear-training—Shinn, Sawyer. Harmony—Bridge and Sawyer, Macpherson (with

Appendix). Introduction to 'Theory, Handbook of Form, Hand

book of Musical Knowledge—Peterson.

SECOND ANU THIRD YEARS.

As for First and Second Years of Mus. Bac. course; but Subject (5), Double Counterpoint Canon and Fugue, is not required.

MUSIC 565

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS OF EXAMINATION FOR

THE DEGREE OP DOCTOR OF MUSIC. TO HE

HELD IN THE FIRST TERM, I91«.

The requiremeuts under the heading Pianoforte will serve as an indication of the scope of the examination.

1. A knowledge of the whole range ot pianoforte l i terature; and a very high standard of interpretative as well as executive ability.

The candidate must submit a list of works he is prepared to play, which must touch all schools and all styles, and which must also show his own ability to write for the pianoforte. He must therefore submit works of his own— original compositions, or variations on an original or other theme, or transcriptions, and transcriptions ot orchestral And choral-orchestral works.

2. He must be prepared to perform such of these works as the examiners select under the exact conditions ot public performances.

3. Further, he must be prepared to improvise on original themes and subjects set by the examiners.

4. The reading at sight will include reading from tull orchestral score, and the candidate must also present and play a transcription for pianoforte of any work prescribed for the purpose by the examiners.

566 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, fills.

FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDA

TIONS FOR THE ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS TO

BE HELD IN T H E FOURTH TERM, 1915, AND

FIRST TERM. 1916.

CHEMISTRY—PART I. }

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY—PART I. > Science)* BOTANY—PART I. )

BOTANY—PART I I . (see under Science).— Special Text-books:—

Percival—Agricultural Botany. Books for reference :—

Fischer—The Structure and Functions of Bacteria. Bailey—Plant Breeding. Mueller—Select Plants.

BOTANY—Third Year (see under Science).— Plant Physiology (A. or B.).

ZOOLOGY—PART I. (see under Science).—

BIOLOGY—(Diploma course)—

The course will consist ot the work of the First Term in Biology (Medical course).

AGRICULTURAL ZOOLOGY— The structure and functions ot cells. Introduction t'o the study ot organic life. Plants and

animals contrasted. The larger subdivisions of the animal kingdom. One-celled animals. 'The more important points iu the structure and lite-

history of the Liver-fluke, Tape-worms, Roundworms, Leech and Earth-worm.

AGRICULTURE. 567

Brief account of the Mollusca. The snail and slug. The structure and life-history of a typical insect and

the" life-histories' of a series of insects selected with reference to their agricultural and horticultural importance.

The moire important points in the structure of the frog, bird and rabbit.

The osteology of the horse, ox and sheep.

Laboratory work— This will consist of the demonstration and dissection

of specimens referred to in the lectures. Not less than three hours weekly will be devoted to laboratory work.

AGRICULTURAL CHEMISTRY, PART I.—

General principles of the application ot Chemistry to Agricultural Science.

Elements of Physical Chemistry. — Vaporization and condensation; phenomena of solution and solubility ; osmotic pressure and other physical properties of aqueous solutions ; methods of determination of molecular weight; electrolytes and electrolysis; the ionic theory ; relative strengths of acids and bases; velocity of chem-. ical reactions -, the law of mass action and conditions for equilibrium; catalysis.

Organic Chemistry.—A short course supplementary to Chemistry Part I., with special reference to t i e study of the groupings of importance to Agricultural Science.

Water Supply, the Atmosphere, the Soil as necessary to Plants.

Water Supply.—Its importance, water cultures.

The Atmosphere.—Its composition and content of plant food.

The Soil.—Its functions, origin, and relation to sub-soil. Constitution of soils from physical and chemical standpoints. Characteristics of limestone, sand, clay and humus in soils.


.s~«// Physics.— Mechanical texture and proximate composition of soil a,nd sub-soil. -Methods of mechanical analysis. Water in soil dependent on (a) rainfall, (h) drainage, (<) evaporation, (d) soil structure aud texture as measured by observed porespace, permeability and capillarity. Aeration and temperature of soils and ground water.

Laboratory Work— Simple quantitative analysis, volumetric ahd gravi

metric. Soil analysis, mechanical and chemical. Examination of, and . experiments with, soils, manures, other' raw materials arid agricultural products.

Text-books:— H. Ingle—Manual ot Agricultural Chemistry. Lyon and Pippin—'The Principles of Soil Manage

ment. Cnurch—Laboratory Guide, or Lincoln and Wal

ton—Elementary Quantitative Chemical Analysis.

McCall—The Physical Properties of Soils. Russell—Soil Conditions and Plant Growth.

Books for reference:— Warington—Chemistry of the Farm. A. D. Hall—The Soil. Roberts - The Fertility of the Soil. A. D. Hall—Fertilizers and Manures. Treadwell—Analytical Chemistry.

AGRICULTURAL CHEMISTRY, PART II.—

Further treatment of work of Part I . Chemical Composition of Soils.—Availability of plant

food. Tbe value and limitations of chemical analyses. The necessity for field and pot ex-.perimunts. The methods of chemical and mechanical soil analysis'.

Fertilizers.—Natural and artificial. Sources of potash, phosphates and nitrogen. Fixation of nitrogen and its circulation in nature. Chemical and physical effects on soils of use of fertilizers, and ot the growth of crops.

AGRICULTURE. 5 6 9

Soil Moisture.—Effects of drainage, tillage, root forage, and irrigation on soils. Conservation of soil water. Dry farming and sewage farming.

Soil types.—Their distribution, composition and suitability for various crops and rotations. Chemistry of products and.amounts of plant food removed from the soil.

Laboratory Work—

A continuation ot the work of Part I.

Fur ther Books for reference:— Hilgard—Soils. Wiley—Agricultural Analysis. Alan Murray—Soils and Manures. Howell—Soil Problems in Wheat Growing.

CHEMISTRY AND AGRICULTURAL CHEMISTRY

(with Laboratory work)—

DIPLOMA COURSE.

Elementary Inorganic and Organic Chemistry, with special reference to the composition and food requirements of plants aud animals; the constitution of soils ; the manuring of soils ; and the more important raw materials aud products of agriculture.

Text-books:— H. Ingle—Elementary Agricultural Chemistry; and Any modern elementary text-book of general

chemistry.

Laboratory Work—

Experiments illustrative of the subjects dealt with in the lecture course.

'Text-hooks (for practical work) :— Coleman and Addyman — Practical Agricultural

Chemistry. McCall—The Physical Properties of Soils. "-


BIO-CHEMISTRY-

DEGREE COURSE.

Lectures twice a week for three terms. The Carbohydrates of the vegetable and animal king

doms, including their occurrence, chemistry, and the changes .they undergo in vital processes. The sugars, starches, inulin, glycogen, dextrins, celluloses, pectins, lignin, etc.,are here included.

The Fats, vegetable and animal. The Lipoids, Waxes* and associated bodies.

• The Pioteins. Classification. Physico-Chemical pro

perties of their solutions, and methods of purification. Chemistry of the proteins, with reference to work done on the elucidation of their chemical constitution. Comparison of the vegetable and animal proteins. Included albumins, globulins, nucleoproteins, phosphoproteins, mucins,histones, scleroproteins (hair, wool, horn), and their deriv atives by hydrolysis, etc.

Pigments. Chlorophyll, carotin, lipochronies, haemoglobin, and their derivatives.

Ferment Action. Comparison of enzymes with inorganic catalysts. Laws governing their actions. Special fermentations, e.g., alcoholic, lactic, butyric.

Colloidal Chemistry. Colloid reactions and their importance in vital processes.

Foodstuffs. 'Their chemical composition and nutrient value. Methods of chemical analysis. Chemical changes occurring on preservation. Here included green fodders, beans, grains, roots, straw, hay, silage, etc.

Animal Tissues. Bone, muscle, blood, glandular and nervous tissues. Horn, hair and wool.

Chemistry of the Excreta. Animal Metabolism. The use of inorganic salts, carbo

hydrates, fats, proteins and protein cleavage products, with their economy in the animal body and Intel-changeability.

AGRICULTURE. 5 7 1

Milk mid its Products. The secretion of milk and the factors controlling it. The chemical composition of the milk, with the chemistry of the inrportant ingredients. Cream, butter and cheese.

Special Plant Products. Essential oils, resins, tannins, gums, glucosides, and alkaloids.

Special Animal Secretions. The internal secretions. Hormones. Specific immunity reactions.

Practical Work will include qualitative and quantitative exercises covering the above subjects.

DIPLOMA COURSE (2nd Year).

This will consist of a more elementary treatment ot the subjects detailed for tbe Degree.

The instruction will be included in the course of Physiology and there will also be a set of lectures once weekly in t he third term.

ECONOMIC BACTERIOLOGY AND THE PATH

OLOGY OF THE INFECTIOUS DISEASES.

P a r t I. — General Hacteriology a n d Bacteriological Technique.

Isolation, Cultivation, Staining and Characters of Microorganisms.

Part II.—Economic Hacteriology.

Agricultural—Milk, Butter, Cheese, Soil (including Nitrogen Bacteria), Air, Water, Bacterial Enzymes:

Other Industries—Brewing and Alcoholic Ferments, Tanning, Acetic Ferments, Disinfectants, etc.

Part III.—Pathology.

Pathology and Diagnosis of Infectious Diseases including the following:—Anthrax, blackleg, contagious mamm-itis, contagious plenro-pneumonia, contagious abortion, swine fever, tuberculosis, variola, vaccinia.

5 7 2 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, WIS.

COMPARATIVE ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY O F

THE DOMESTICATED ANIMALS.

PHYSIOLOGY—

Elements of Physiology of Digestion, Respiration, Animal Heat, Reproduction, Lactation, Circulation, Excretion, and of the Nervous System,. thd-Skin and the Eye.

HISTOLOGY—

The more important tissues and organs.

ANATOMY—

The elementary anatomy of the important bones, muscles and joints, the digestive organs, the heart and main blood and lymphatic vessels, t h e generative organs, tbe urinary system, the skin and its associated structures, the nervous system and the organs of special sense.

The determination of age by the study of animal tissues.

GEOLOGY, PART I. (see under Science), AND ECONOMIC GEOLOGY.

'This course will include all the work set out under Geology, Far t I., together with the origin of soils, soil surveys, etc.

Students will be expected in addition to attend a field excursion to be held during the last two days of the third term and the Monday following.

Text Books for reference:— Hall—The Soil (Murray). Stockbridge—Rocks and Soils (Wiley)

PHYSICAL GEOLOGY (Diploma Course)—

This will include selected portions ot Geology, Part I.

AGRICULTURE:

AGRICULTURE—

These lectures are delivered at the University during-the Fourth Year of the Course for the Degree in Agriculture, a t times to suit the year's practical work a t Dookie Agricultural College. The course comprises 72 lectures,, and deals with the general principles of Agriculture as-modified to suit Australian conditions. Special prominence-is given to the modifications required in practice to meet existing, conditions of markets and of labour in Victoria.

Rainfall and climatic zones. Australian soils. The Victorian wheat belt. Cultivation systems and rotations. Grazing conditions. The ten-inch line of rainfall.

Closer settlement country. Modifications in farm practice. Pastures. Winter and summer crops. Rotation systems.

Farm live stock. Food requirements. Provision of fodder. Sheep and wool. The lamb export trade. Dairy farming and fat cattle.

Closer settlement studies. Irrigation farming. Fruit growing^ Minor farm industries.

Farm management and economics.

ANNOUNCEMENT.

Students entering the Second and Third years are-required to produce evidence ot having spent five weeks-before the beginning of lectures in Practical. work a t

. Dookie Agricultural College or other recognised institution or a t a farm previously approved by the Faculty.


FACULTY OF VETERINARY SCIENCE.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS FOR THE ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD IN THE SECOND AND FOURTH TERMS, 1915, AND IN. FIRST 'TERM, 1916.

FIRST YEAR.

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, PART I. (Veterinary Course)— During the first year Candidates shall at tend the full

course of lectures and laboratory work, as prescribed lor Natural Philosophy, Par t I . , and shall pass the Examinations for the first two terms, or an Examination a t the end of the year on the portion of the course covered during the first two terms.

The course in Natural Philosophy, Par t I . , is of an elementary nature, and includes lectures illustrated by experiments and Laboratory work on the fundament a l principles of the following subjects: —

Mechanics and Hydrostatics. Properties of Matter. Heat. Light. Electricity and Magnetism. Sound.

ZOOLOGY, PART I.—(Veterinary course)— As for Biology (Medical course) omitting the Elements '

•of tbe Morphology and Physiology of Plants.

BOTANY, PART I —(Veterinary course)— As for Botany, Part I., in tbe Science course, except that

A short course of lectures dealing with the relations of fungi to plants and animals, illustrated by Rusts, Smuts, Ergot, Trichophyton and Actinomyces will be given in place of those dealing with Uarchantia, Pteris and Selaginella.

VETERINARY SCIENCE. 5 7 5

CHEMISTRY, PART I. (see under Faculty ot Science)—

OSTEOLOGY AND ARTHROLOGY (3rd Term)—

Students must attend one demonstration weekly.

SECOND YEAR. HISTOLOGY—

The course will consist of lectures and demonstrations exteuding over not less than 75 hours.

During this course each student is required to mount and study microscopically and make drawings of specimens typical of the following structures:—

GENERAL HISTOLOOT or MAMMALS.

The cell; epithelia; connective tissues; cartilage and bone (including development); blood and bloodvessels and marrow; muscular tissues; nervous, tissues; lymphatic glands and lymphadenoid organs; respiratory system ; digestive tube and glands; skin and its appendages; ductless-glands; urinary system; male and female re productive organs; sense organs.

SPECIAL HISTOLOOT OB RUMINANTS.

Modifications in the minute anatomy of the alimentary systems of ruminating animals will b t demonstrated and studied microscopically.

PHYSIOLOGY—

The entire course of instruction will extend over not less, than 130 hours. The earlier lectures are restricted to tbe fundamental principles of bio-chemistry, so that the practical classes on the same subject may be better understood. Subsequent lectures deal with, the physiology, general and comparative, of the blood, circulation, respiration, animal nutrition, metabolism, digestion, hormone and nerve, the peripheral nervous system, including the receptor mechanisms of general and special, senses, the central nervous system, muscle and locomotion, animal heat, renal and other excretions, reproduction, lactation, and the ductless glands.


The lectures are illustrated with experiments and demonstrations, and emphasis is laid on subjects of special importance. The entire equipment of tbe laboratory

•(except instruments exclusively used in investigations on the human subject) is brought into requisition, and •every effort made to secure objective treatment ot the subject.

Practical classes in Biochemistry are held once a week throughout the year. In these classes each student has the opportunity of studying experimentally the chemistry of the constituents of the animal body, of animal

•excreta, and the fundamental ingredients of fodders. A course of practical classes, ten in number, deals with

the biophysics of muscle, nerve, circulation and central nervous system.

Tho standard of the systematic course is given by the lectures. Students are expected to read Smith's Veterinary Physiology. Osborne's Elements of Animal Physiology will be found to serve as a useful introduction. In the practical course the typed slips issued a t each class give .all the information and directions required. Students desirous of further knowledge in biochemistry are recommended to read Hawk's Physiological Chemistry.

ANATOMY OF THE DOMESTICATED ANIMALS—

This course consists ot anatomical lectures and demonstrations extending over not less than 100 hours. I t deals fully with the whole of the tissues of the horse's body, and it is designed to emphasize structures of surgical importance.

The anatomy of the ox, camel, sheep, pig, dog, cat and fowl is dealt with by comparative methods.

Each student must attend at the dissecting room and -engage in the dissection of the horse and other domesticated .animals, for a total period of not less than 300 hours.

.SYSTEMATIC BOTANY—

As for Section (8) Systematic Botany, of Botany, Part I I . , in the Science course.

The course will consist ot lectures and demonstratious -extending over a period of not less than 100 hours.

VETERINARY SCIENCE. 677

This subject is dealt with in lectures and demonstrations, including field excursions.

They comprise the classification and characters of plants generally, and their characteristics, both macroscopic and microscopic; the structure and classification of grasses and fodder plants , of noxious and poisonous plants, and of weeds.

MATERIA MEDICA AND PHARMACY (Veterinary Course)—

(a) Weights and Measures of the Imperial and Metric Systems.

(b) The general nature and composition, and the more important physical and chemical characters of the drugs utilized in Veterinary medicine.

(c) The composition ot the Pharmacopoeial preparations of these drugs, and the processes employed in their manufacture.

(d) The doses of these drugs and of their preparations for the various domesticated animals. r

(e) Chemical and Pharmaceutical incompatibilities. {f) The candidate will be required to recognise the

more important drugs used in Veterinary medicine.

(g) The candidate will be required to write prescriptions with and without abbreviations.

(h) General dispensing of Veterinary medicines and preparations.

(i) Methods of administering medicines to animals.

Text-books:— Finlay Dunn—Veterinary Medicine. Mitchell Bruce—Materia Medica.

THIRD .YEAR.

PATHOLOGY AND BACTERIOLOGY— The course will consist of lectures and demonstrations,

including laboratory work, extending over not less than 150 hours.


The lectures in Pathology deal with the general characters of inflammation and its results: regeneration and healing of wounds; death of tissue; infiltrations and degenerations; hypertrophy and at rophy; new growths; cysts, etc. ; while the morbid changes occurring in the different diseases affecting the various systems and organs-are studied in detail.

The practical work comprises the macroscopic examination of diseased organs; the preparation of sections of tissues exhibiting the various pathological changes dealt with, and their microscopic study; and post-mortem examinations.

The lectures and demonstrations in Bacteriology deal generally with', the classification, structure, isolation and cultivation of microbes; toxins and anti-toxins; vaccination and immunity.

PHARMACOLOGY—

The course, extending over not less than one term, will consist of lectures accompanied by lecture-demonstrations.

Tho action of the following groups of drugs is dealt with: —

Drugs acting on the Alimentary Canal; Anaesthetics ; Hypnotics and Sedatives; Local Anaesthetics, Nerve Stimulants; Drugs acting on the Heart r Drugs acting on the Circulation; Antiseptics;: etc.

The students have full opportunity of handling all the drugs dealt with in the lectures, and the actions ot tbe drugs are exhibited by full experiments wherever-possible.

VETERINARY HYGIENE AND DIETETICS—

The course will consist ot lectures and demonstrations extending over not less than 50 hours.

The Lectures on Hygiene with Demonstrations at stables, dairies, etc., treat of air, its impurities, and air-borne diseases, the construction, ventilation, and situation of buildings, tbe construction of yards, cattle and sheep dips, drainages, the-cure and feeding ot animals, etc.

VETERINARY SCIENCE. 5 7 9

The Lectures on Dietetics deal with the feeding and foods of animals, including natural foods and artificial foods, their digestibility, nature, source, values—both commercial and nutritive—the rations, etc., as supplied to the various animals, and also the water supply.

Frequent excursions are made to different premises for practical Demonstrations.

THERAPEUTICS AND TOXICOLOGY (Third Year).

This course will consist ot lectures dealing with the uses of drugs and other agents in the treatment of disease. Also the actions of the more common poisons and their antidotes.

PARASITOLOGY—PART I.

The course will consist of lectures and demonstrations extending over not less than 45 hours, and dealing with the classification of the Metazoon parasites of the domesticated animals, the chief distinguishing features ot each group; the common genera in each ; the more important points in their s t ructure; the life history of typical species.

The lectures arc accompanied by demonstrations and laboratory work, during which the student is enabled to become familiar with the common parasites of the skin and internal organs.

GENERAL ZOOTECHNY AND THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF SHOEING—

These subjects are dealt with by series of special lecture demonstrations during both the second and third years, and extending over not less than 50 hours.

CLINICS—

Students must attend not less than 100 hours a t the hospital practice, paying particular attention to the preparation, dispensing and administration of medicines.

.87


FOURTH YEAR.

PATHOLOGY AND BACTERIOLOGY OF INFECTIOUS DISEASES OF THE DOMESTICATED ANIMALS—

Tbe course will consist ot lectures and demonstratious, with laboratory work, extending over not less than 100 hours, on the various pathogenic bacteria and miciopara-sites affecting the domesticated animals, and the pathological conditions of the contagious diseases, including tropical diseases, and practical application of principles of immunity.

MEAT 1 N S P E C T I 0 N -

This course is conducted a t the City Abattoirs where lectures and demonstrations are given at least once a week on all the phases of the subject.

VETERINARY SURGERY—

This course consists of not less than 90 lectures and demonstrations on the application of the principles of Surgery to general conditions and to special cases, and also to the consideration of the details that Regional Veterinary Surgery demands.

As all sound Surgery is based upon correct diagnosis, and as the success of Veterinary Surgery depends upon economic considerations, stress is laid upon direct and differential diagnosis, and also upon the factors upon which prognosis is founded.

OPERATIVE SURGERY—

During this course, which is essentially practical, all the usual operations in Veterinary Surgery will be demonstrated, and opportunity will bo afforded students to perform them ou the dead subject.

VETERINARY MEDICINE AND OBSTETRICS—

The course will cousist of not less than 120 lectures, and daily demonstrations.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS OF EXAMINATION FOR

T H E DEGREE OP MASTER OP VETERINARY

SCIENCE. TO BE HELD IN T H E FIRST TERM,

1916.

GBOUP (A).

VETERINARY MEDICINE AND SURGERY.

(1) MEDICINE AND OBSTETRICS—.

Physical signs of disease, and means of diagnosis. Clinical recording. Evidence'"of contagious disease. Conducting post-mortems, and obtaining material

for investigation. - ' Examination—for clinical purposes—of body fluids,

' urine, milk, etc. Therapeutic actions of drugs. Toxicology. '" • •'• "'" Methods of treatment and prophylaxis. Obstetrics and diseases of pregnancy. Diseases of young stock.

Field Work: 1 month in an obstetric practice. 1 month as locum tenens in a general practice.

> i I . . . : ; - . - . . I l l . (2) VETERINARY SURGERY—

The subject includes the technique and practice of Veterinary Surgery, Veterinary Ophthalmology, Surgical Anatomy, Surgical Pa th ology; the causes and detection of unsoundness in horses.

Field Work: A period of one month's practice with an officer of the

Agricultural Department daring the inspection of horses for soundness. A period of two weeks or one short vacation in charge of the surgical clinic of the Veterinary Hospital.

Candidates taking this group* will be expected to' assist the surgeons during major operations, and to perform minor operations when necessary.

Text books recommended:— Dollar—Regional Surgery and Operative Tech

nique. French—Surgery of the Dog. Sharpe—Veterinary Ophthalmology. Share Jones—Veterinary Surgical Anatomy.

GROUP (B).

"VETERINARY PATHOLOGY AND BACTERIOLOGY..

(1) PATHOLOGY— Examination of the blood, diseases ot the blood. Examination of milk. Examination! of urine. Preparation of microscopic sections—fixing, harden

ing, embedding, cutting, staining ahd mounting.

The neoplasms of the domesticated animals, benign and malignant.

Diseases of the nervous system of animals. Preservation and mounting of post-mortem speci

mens. Immunity—Its practical applications.

<2) BACTERIOLOGY— A practical knowledge of laboratory methods and

technique, including the preparation of media, methods of staining, filtration, cultivation, isolation, experimental infection, and identification of the common pathogenic organisms, including bacteria, fungi, and filtrable viruses.

The bacteriological examination of milk.

<3) PARASITOLOGY— (a) Vermes. (b) Protozoa. (c) Arthropoda.

Candidates taking Section 3 must do subsection (A) and either (b) or (c).

<4) TROPICAL DISEASES OP ANIMALS.

Sections 3 and 4 -art alternative suBjeets, and only ont of the two is to be taken.

Field Work: Practical application of immunity; vaccination of

animals; serological testing. Examination of, and reports on, post-mortem speci

mens in the field and in the laboratory. Collection and! demonstration of parasites of groups

selected. - -

GROUP (C).

VETERINARY SANITARY SCIENCE.

<1) CONTROL OP CONTAGIOUS DISEASES OF ANI-MALS. VETERINARY" QUARANTINE AND POLICE MEASURES—

Contagious diseases of animals—their geographical distribution and prevalence.

Means of diagnosis; obtaining specimens and materials for diagnosis ana investigation.

Means of prevention, control, and eradication. Sanitary laws and veterinary police measures in

different countries; special measures for certain diseases.

Transport of animals. Preparation of reports and vital statistics.

Field Work: Not less than one month under control of the Chief

Veterinary Officer in the practical application of the provisions of the Stocks Diseases Act.

<2) MEAT INSPECTION— The meat supply—world sources; home supply.

export. Laws relating to meat inspection and import in various countries.

Diseases of meat, and meat-producing animals. Conditions rendering meat unfit for food. Ante-mortem inspection of food animals. Slaughtering methods. Identification of organs, tissues, etc., by chemical

anatomical and biological tests. Post-mortem inspection; jointing. Preservation of meat and meat products. Abattoir construction and management.

i

Field Work: Not less than one month at a public abattoir.

<3) MILK AND DAIRY INSPECTION— Chemistry of milk; differences in ; diiforent species,

and the conditions causing variation. Physiology of milk secretion; cellular content of

Bacteriology of milk; bacterial counts; common bacteria present; methods of identification.

Diseases of the udder and teats. The economics of milk production; preservation, pas

teurisation, and sterilisation of milk; use of preservatives.

Adulteration and its. detection. Inspection of dairies. Inspection of cows. Herd testing

Field Work: Not less .than one month spent in dairy super

vision.

i

VETERINARY SCIENCE. 581

The lectures on Veterinary Medicine deal with the various diseases affecting domesticated animals; their causes, symptoms, diagnosis, prognosis, medicinal treatment, nursing, prevention, etc. The lectures will be supplemented by daily clinical instruction and hospital practice, including dispensing, etc.

The lectures in Veterinary Obstetrics deal with pregnancy and gestation, and the various conditions met with in maternal and in foetal dystokia, and the diseases and injuries incidental to parturition. The lectures will be illustrated by demonstrations and practical work.

STATE VETERINARY SANITARY SCIENCE—

The coarse will consist of lectures chiefly explanatory of the various legislative enactments in various States dealing with the control of animals in health and disease.

PARASITOLOGY—PART II.

The course will be supplementary to Parasitology, Part I., and will consist of lectures and demonstrations extend-

. ing over not less than 30 hours, dealing more especially with the arthropoda inimical to domesticated animals.

CLINICS—

Students must attend for not less than 300 hours at tbe hospital practice of the Veterinary School.

. 3 7 A


FACULTY OF DENTISTRY.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS FOR THE ANNUAL

EXAMINATIONS, TO BE HELD IN 1915, AND

SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATION IN FEBRU

ARY, 1916.

CHEMISTRY— Physics—The elements of Physics in relation to

Chemistry. Matter and Energy. Mass— Weight—Volume—Density. The general properties of solids, liquids and gases. The simpler phenomena of heat, light, electricity and magnetism in relation to Chemical change.

Inorganic Chemistry—The preparation, properties and uses of the common elements and their more important compounds, with special reference to those employed in dentistry ;—Hydrogen.; fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine; oxygen, sulphur; manganese, chromium, iron, nickel, cobalt; nitrogen, phosphorus, arsenic, antimony, bismuth; carbon, silicon, tin, lead; boron, aluminium; calcium, strontium, barium, magnesium; zinc, cadmium, mercury; sodium, potassium, copper, silver, gold ; platinum.

Organic Chemistry—The classification of the more important types of carbon compounds. The chemistry of the mote important organic compounds employed in dentistry—alcohol, ether, chloroform, iodoform, ethyl chloride, etc.

Chemical Theory—The nature of chemical elements and chemical compounds. Tbe classification of the chemical elements—The Periodic Law. Atoms and molecules. Chemical notation. The meaning of chemical formulae and of chemical equations.

DENTISTRY. 583

Practical Chemistry—The use of the Blowpipe. General analytical operations—solution, filtration, evaporation, crystallisation, etc. 'The preparation and properties of chemical substances. The qualitative analysis of simple salts by wet and dry methods.

JUNIOR ANATOMY— Second Term. —Lectures twice a week on the bones of

the skull, the vertebrae, the ribs and the sternum. Ijectures once a week on the abdomen and thorax.

Third Term.—Lectures thrice a week ou the head and neck.

. Text-liook :— Dixon's " Manual ot Osteology." Parson and Wright's "Practical Anatomy" (2 vols.). Morris's "Treatise on Anatomy," 4th edition.

JUNIOR DENTAL ANATOMY, HUMAN AND COMPARATIVE—

Elementary Biology. The course of lectures includes a study of the nature

of teeth in general—and of the Dental Tissues in particular. A consideration of the development of the teeth, their calcification, and their eruption, together with the various methods of

. attachment, completes the series. Books recommended:—

Dental Anatomy—Tomes, Underwood Hopewell-Smith (last editions).

JUNIOR DEN'l'AL MECHANICS & METALLURGY— (a) Junior Dental Mechanics—The general principles

of Dental Mechanics, embracing the construction ot artificial dentures upon the vegetable bases, a description of the materials used and accepted methods, consideration of temperaments, and preparatory treatment of the mouth.

(*) Junior Metallurgy — The consideration of the principles of Metallurgy, the metallic elements, properties, alloys, and refining of metals, also their native sources.


SENIOR ANATOMY—

Second Term.—Lectures once a week on the abdomen and thorax.

Third Term. — Lectures three times 11 week on the head and neck.

Text-book :— Parson and Wright's "Practicnl Anatomy" (2 vols.). Morris's "Treatise on Anatomy," 4th edition.

e

SENIOR DENTAL ANATOMY. HUMAN AND COMPARATIVE—

The lectures include a detailed description of tbe teeth of man, their arrangement and occlusion with an account of their associated parts ; also comparative studies of the teeth of fishes, reptiles, birds and mammals.

Text Books: Tomes, Black, Underwood (latest editions).

PHYSIOLOGY (with special reference to Dentistry) —

Physiology.

The Physiology of the body as a whole. 'The interdependence of organs. Repair. 'Transplantation, etc.

The Blood—With special reference to coagulation. The Heart and Circulatory System — With special

reference to the effects of anaesthetics, of posture, of pain, of surgical shock and haemorrhage. The Lymphatic systems, with special reference to those in the mouth.

Respiration—The gaseous interchange in the lungs ; the nervous and chemical control of respiration. Effects of vitiated air, etc.

Digestion—The physiology of the mouth in full detail. Digestion in the stomach, with special reference to the mental factor and the preparation of the food for gastric digestion by adequate mastication. Digestion iu the small and large intestines, including the action ot the liver.

DENTISTRY. 585

Excrelion—An elementary knowledge of the mechanism of renal excretion and the composition of urine will be required. The skin and sweat (also elementary).

Animal Heat—An elementary knowledge of the main facts will be required.

The Peripheral Nervous System—With special reference to the fifth, seventh and ninth cranial nerves and the autonomic supply of the salivary glands. The organs of sensation, including an elementary knowledge ot the eye and ear.

The Central Nervous System—An elementary knowledge will be required.

PRACTICAL METALLURGY— The Physical Properties of the Metals—Gold, Platinum,

Palladium, Silver, Tin, Antimony, Mercury, Lead, Bismuth, Zinc, Cadmium, Copper, Aluminium, Iron, Nickel, viz.:—Lustre; Tenacity; Elasticity-, Malleability; Ductility; Conductivity for Heat and for Electricity; Fusibility; Specific Gravity; Specific Heat; Expansion by Heat ; Brittleness ; Hardness -, Crystalline Character ; Change of Volume on Solidification; Action ot air (either hot or cold), ot water, of acids, or alkalis, and of sulphuretted hydrogen on the above metals and their principal alloys and amalgams.

Effect of Exposure of the above Metals, their alloys and amalgams in the mouth.

Gold—Preparation and Properties of Pure Gold. Cohesive and non-cohesive Gold. Precipitated and Spongy Gold. Assay of Gold. Calculation of amount ot base metal to be added to reduce the fineness of Gold to a given carat, or of the amount of fine gold or of gold of high carat needed to be added to raise the fineness of an alloy to a giveu carat. The detection and estimation of Gold in alloys. The purple ot Cassias. The effect of impurities on the properties of Gold. The properties of the alloys of Gold. Composition ot solders of Gold.

6 8 6 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 191.1.

Platinum—Preparation and Properties of Platinum. Platinum-Black and Spongy Platinum. Detection and estimation of Platinum in alloys. Alloys of Platinum with Iridium, Gold, Silver and other Metals. Dental Alloy.

Palladium—Preparation and Properties of Palladiuui and its combinations with Silver, Gold and Mercury.

Silver—Preparation and Properties of Pure Silver. Assay of Silver by Cupellation ami in the wet way. Preparation and Properties of the combinations of Silver with Copper, Gold, Platinum and Mercury. Composition and preparation of solders for Silver. Electro-plating.

Tin—Preparation and Properties of Tin. Detection of Tin in alloys. Preparation and Properties of the Alloys of Tin. Its combination with Zinc, Copper and Mercury. Composition and melting-points ot readily fusible alloys.

Antimony—-Preparation and Properties. Properties of Alloys.

Mercury—Preparation and Properties of Pure Mercury. Testing the purity of Mercury. Vermilion and detection of impurities therein. Preparation and Properties of amalgams of the various metals mentioned in this Synopsis. Composition and preparation of the principal alloys which have been used for preparing Dental Amalgams. Methods of testing such amalgams, ns to the causes of their change of volume, permanence in the mouth, and change of colour. Effects of different metals in these amalgams. Possible action of amalgam fillings ou other metals used in the Mouth.

Lead—Preparation and Properties. Effect of alloying on its Properties. Solders and soft soldering.

Bismuth—Preparation and Properties. Alloys.

Zinc —Preparation, Purification and Properties. Preparation of Zinc Oxide, Zinc Chloride, and the various materials for the Oxychloride, Oxyphos-

DENTISTRY. 587

phate, and Oxysulphate Cements. Action of Acids and Alkaline Solutions on Cements in tbe Mouth. Alloys of Zinc.

Cadmium—Properties, its advantages and disadvantages in alloys and amalgams.

Copper—Preparation and properties. Effect of irapuri ties on its properties. Alloys. Modes of preparation and properties of Copper Amalgams.

Aluminium—Preparation and Properties of Aluminium and Aluminium-bronze. Solders for Aluminium and Aluminium-bronze.

Nickel—Preparation and properties. Alloys. German Silver. Nickel-plating.

Iron—Differences between Cast Iron, Wrought Iron and Steel. Effect of presence ot Impurities in Iron. Hardening, Tempering, Annealing and Burning Steel.

Jletliods of testing Metals and Alloys tor their various properties as described in first paragraph.

Methods of testing Dental Amalgams for changes of volume.- Effect of Sulphuretted Hydrogen, Water, Air, Acids and Alkalis on Dental Amalgams.

Methods of parting Gold from Silver; rough tests for fineness ot Gold Alloys (Touchstone); of preparation of Gold Alloy of required fineness; of recovery of Gold from Scraps; of preparation of Solders for Gold; of recovery of Platinum and Silver from Scraps ; of preparation of pure Silver ; of preparation of Amalgam Alloys containing two or more of the following metals :—Silver, Tin, Gold, Platinum, Cupper, Zinc ; of preparation of readily fusible Alloys containing.two or more of the metuls Tin, Lead, Bismuth, Mercury, Cadmium, Antimony, and Zinc.

Methods ot determining melting-pointsof readily fusibel Alloys; of preparation of Alloys recommended for Dies and Counter-dies. Description of Furnaces and Muffles used iu Metallurgy. Theory and varieties of Blow-pipes and Fluxes. Colouring and Gilding Gold. Purification of Sweep or Lemel.


DENTAL SURGERY AND PATHOLOGY (3rd Year)—

This course embraces the consideration of the teeth and their adjacent parts in a state of health, the causes and treatment of the Pathological conditions to which these organs and associate parts are subject, also a full description of the materials used in operative dentistry and thorough instruction in all the operations required of the Dental Practitioner, and a full description of the instruments used in Operative Dental Surgery.

Teething—Brief description of teething, normal and abnormal, including development of the teeth and growth ot the jaws ; signs, periods and process of eruption. Absorption of the Deciduous Teeth—Dates of eruption of the permanent teeth ; attendant local and general disturbances.

Irregularities of the Teeth as to Position—Causes both geperal and local; Treatment—general considerations ; skiagrams.

Caries—Its frequency ; Macroscopy ; Microscopy ; its nature ; artificial reproduction ; its treatment.

1. Preventive. 2. Remedial by excision—Dr. Arthur's Method—by

Chemical Applications—by Filling. Description of the various instruments employed. Nomenclature. Preparation of cavities. Preparation of cavities by classes. Materials used for filling. Gold. Amalgams, Osteoplastics or Cement. Gutta Perclia. Temporary Filling. Insertion of the Filling. ' Exclusion of saliva. The use of Matrices. Inlays—Porcelain-Gold.

Diseases of the Dental Pulp—Injuries; Rupture of the-Apical Vessels; Laceration of the Pulp Tissue. Hyperemia Pulpitis—acute and chronic—pulp degeneration ; fatty fibroid, calcareous. Formation of secondary dentine.

DENTISTRY. 589"

Treatment—Capping, devitalizing; arsenious acid; removal of pu lp ; treatment of canals; filling materials F mummification; immediate removal of the pulp by pressure anesthesia; dead pulps -, pulpless teeth; complications with periodontitis.

The Operation of Extraction of the Teeth—General principles—the shape of the teeth and of t h e roots, the instruments to be used— difficulties— complications and sequela;. The-extraction of misplaced teeth. The extraction of teeth under anesthetics—local and general.

Books recommended:— Tomes, J . P. Colyer, Black (last editions).

GENERAL SURGERY. PATHOLOGY AND BACTERIOLOGY—

Inflammation, Regeneration and Repair of Injuries, Thrombosis and Embolism, Degenerations and Infiltrations, Atrophy and Hypertrophy, Tumours, Development of Bacteriology, Nature of Bacteria and their properties. Methods of Cultivation and examination of Bacteria, Chemical Products of Bacteria, Immunity, Serum Treatment of Disease, Antiseptic and Aseptic Methods in Surgery, Description of Pyogenic Organisms, Septicaemia and Pyaemia, Erysipelas, Boils, Carbuncles, and Malignant Pustule, Ulceration and Gangrene, Tuberculosis, especially forms amenable to Surgical treatment, Syphyis, Fractures and Dislocations (General), Pathological conditions about the Mouth.

Books recommended:— Hewlett—Pathology, General and Special. Green—Pathology and Morbid Anatomy.

MATERIA MEDICA AND THERAPEUTICS—

(a) Objects, Indications and Methods ot Treatment.

!b) Routes by which Medicines enter the circulation. c) Pharmacology.

(d) Principles and Methods of Prescription Writing.

•590 DETAILS OF 8UBEJCT8, 1915.

(e) Principles of Dosage. ( / ) Incompatibility of Drugs. (g) Weights and Measures. (A) Classification ot Drugs. (() Fosological Table. (*) Some of the Forms in which Medicinal Substances

are employed. </) General nature and composition and the more

important Physical and Chemical Characters of the Pharmacopoeial substances named in tbe annexed Schedule, and of the more important non-official drugs.

(m) The composition of the Pharmacopoeial preparations of these Drugs and the processes employed in their manufacture.

4n) 'The doses of these Drugs and their preparations. («) Their formulae synonyms. Pharmacology and

Dental Therapeutics.

Schedule of Pharmacopoeial Substances. A najsthetics.

The general principles to be observed in selecting anaesthetics, and their methods of administration. —Chloroform, ether, nitrous oxide, nitrous oxide and oxygen, somnoform, ethyl chloride, cocaine, stovaine, eucaine.—The management and treatment of the difficulties, accidents aud dangers of general surgical anaesthesia. Principles and practice of local analgesia.—Practical demonstrations on anesthetics will also be given at tlie Melbourne Dental Hospital,

Inorganic Substances

Acidum aceticum, acidum arseniosum, acidum boricum, acidum chromicum, acidum h ydrochloricum, acid, um nitricum, acidum phosphoricumconcentratum, acidum sulphuricum, acidum sulphuricum aro-maticum, alumen, ammonium compounds, spiritus ammoniae aromaticus, ammonii chloridum, liquor ammoniae fortior, aqua, argehti nitras, calcium, calcii carbonas praecipitata, calcii bypo-phosphis, calx chlorinate, calx sulphurata,

DENTISTRY. 591

liquor calcis, calcii sulphas, carbo, cupri sulphas, hydrargyri perchloridum, symptoms of mercurial poisoning, hydrogenii peroxidum, iodum, liquor ferri perchloridi fortior, magnesium,, phosphorus, plumbi acetas, potassium compounds, potassii bicarbonas, potassii bromidum, potassii chloras, potassii iodiduui, potassii permanganas, sodium compounds, sodii biboras,. soda caustica, sodii phenas, sodii sulphis, zinci chloridum, zinci oxidum, zinci sulphas.

Synthetical Compounds. Acidum carbolicum, aether, alcohol ethylicum, amyl

nltris, butyl-chloral hydras, chloral hydras, chlo-roformum, creasotum, ethyl chloridum, glusidum, hydronapthol, iodofonuuiu, substitutes for iodoform, aristol, di-iodoform, europhen, iodol, naphthol, paraffinum molle, phenacetinum, phe-nazouum resorcinnm.

Organic Substances. Acidum benzoicum, acidum gallicum, acidum salicyli-

cum, acidum tannicum, aconitum, adrenalinP belladonna, camphora, capsici fructus, catechu,, cocainae hydrocliloras, collodium, ergota, eu-caine, gelsemium, glycei'inum, gossypium, gut ta percha, hamamelis, krameriae radix, mastiche,. maticae folia, menthol, moi-phina, myrrha, nux vomica, oleum cajuputi, oleum caryophylli, oleum cinnamomi, oleum eucalypti, oleum morrhuae,. oleum terebinthinae, opium, papaveris capsulae, pepsiua, pyrethri radix, quillaiae saponaria,. quininae sulphas, sapo dur us, sinapis, thymol, veratrina.

Special attention is given to the varieties, actions and uses of:—

Depletives, counter-irritants, escharotics, demulcents, emollients, astringents, haemostatics, detergents, antacids, alkalis, antiseptics, bleaching agents,. alteratives, sedatives and eliminatives.

Specimens ot the most common drugs used by the Dental Surgeon will be available for examination by the-Dental Student.

-592 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1U1S.

Books recommended :— Dental Materia Medica, Pharmacology and Thera

peutics—Glassington. Dental Materia Medica and Therapeutics—Hermann

Prinz. Dental Materia Medica, Therapeutics, aud Prescrip

tion Writing—Eli H. Long. Anaesthetics and their Administration—Frederic W.

Hewitt. Anaesthetics in Dental Surgery—Luke.

SENIOR DENTAL MECHANICS & METALLURGY—

Senior Metallurgy includes the more thorough consideration ot all the metals, and the best known methods ot manipulating them. A comprehensive consideration of Dental Amalgams. The properties of .the metals used in their manufacture, and the effect of different metals on these alloys.

Senior Dental Mechanics embraces the exhaustive consideration of all the higher branches of tnia subject, including the construction of dentures on metal bases in all their different forms.

Cast metal dentures and attachments. Continuous gum dentures All the approved methods ot Crown and Bridge Work. Mechanical treatment of Cleft Palates, including tbe

various methods of constructing obturators and artificial vela.

The treatment of fractures of the jaws, including the making and applying of inter-dental splints.

The construction ot appliances for regulating, and the rules governing same.

PRACTICAL HISTOLOGY AND MICROSCOPY (with special reference to Dentistry)—

Demonstrations (with practical work) are adapted to -the requirements of Dental Students, during nhich the following details are specially illustrated:—

Histology of the Cell, Epithelial Tissues, Blood Corpuscles and Blood Vessels.

DENTISTRY. 593

Histology of Cartilage, Bone, Muscle, Nerve and Nerve-cord.

Microscopic Anatomy of the following Structures, connected with the Mouth:—Skin, Tongue, Teeth (including stages of development). Salivary Glands, Tonsil, (Esophagus Epiglottis and Larynx.

ORTHODONTICS (3rd Year)— The Normal and Abnormal Development of the jaws

and teeth before and after birth. Also associated parts such as tbe nose and its accessory

sinuses from an orthodontic point of view. The factors entering into the formation and occlusion

of the Deciduous and Permanent dentitions. Diagnoses and classifications ot abnormalities occurring

in the Deciduous and Permanent dentitions.

ETIOLOGY—

Maldevelopulent, Malnutrition, Heredity and Environment, Pathological Influences.

Principles, objects and complications of treatment. Consideration and treatment of the different types of

abnormal positions ot the teeth and jaws. Diagnosis ot dente-facial irregularities. Mechanics and Physiology ot tooth movement. Principles of Force and Anchorages. Model making. Facial casts, Technique of making and

fixing the various appliances. (This includes practical classes).

The principles ot Retention. Surgical treatment.

M E D I C I N E -Infectious Diseases, Nature of Infection, Action of Con

tagion in the recipient, 'Transmission of Infectious Diseases, Mixed Infections, Prevention of Infection, Isolation, Disinfection, Immunity, Classification, Pyrexia—Registration of Temperature, Varieties of Pyrexia, consideration of tbe leading features of Enteric Fever, Influenza, Tuberculosis, Acute Rheumatism, Pneumonia, Tetanus, Actinomycosis.


Diseases of the Heart—Endocarditis, Pericarditis, Myocarditis, Chronic Valvular Disease of the Heart , Aortic Incompetency and Stenosis, Mitral Stenosis, Mitral Incompetency.

Functional Affections of the Heart—Palpitation, Arryth-mia, Rapid Heart, Slow Heart, Angina Pectoris.

Diseases of the Blood Vessels—Especially the arteries— Arterio-Sclerosis, Thoracic Aneurysm.

Diseases of the Brain and Nervous System — Cerebral Haemorrhage, Epilepsy, Chorea, Migraine; Headache, Neuritis, Neuralgia, Infantile Convulsions, Hysteria, Neurasthenia, Shock.

'The effects of Perfect and Imperfect Mastication. Diseases of the Blood—Especially primary and secondary

anaeiuias. Diseases of the Stomach, Intestine and Liver—Especially

Dyspepsia and Constipation. Diseases of the Kidneys — Albuminuria, Haematuria,

various forms of Bright's Disease. Diseases 'of the Thyroid. Gland—Bronchooele, Exo-

thalmic Goitre, Myxoedema. Morbid Conditions independent of Primary Disease of

the Urinary Organs—Diabetes Mellitus. Chronic Jnto»icot ions—Especially Alcoholism, Lead and

Mercurial Poisoning. Disorders of Nutrition—Mostly involving Bones and

Joints—Gout, Ostto-arthritis, and Rickets. Oral Sepsis and Asepsis.

Regular Clinical Demonstrations on Medical Cases of special importance to the Dental Surgeon are given at the Melbourne Hospital.

Books recommended :— Practice of Medicine—Frederick Taylor. Principles and Practice of Medicine—Osier. Allbutt's System of Medicine.

ORAL SURGERY—

1. Surgical Anatomy of the Mouth, 'Tongue, Jaws, &c. 2. Surgical affections of the Lips, including congenital

malformations. 3. Surgical Diseases in connection with the Teeth. 4. Tumours of the Upper and Lower Jaws.

DENTISTRY. 595

5. Fractures aud Dislocations of the Jaws. tj. Diseases ot the Antrum of Highmore. 7. Diseases of the Salivary Glands. 8. Surgical affections of the 'Tongue. 9. Surgical affections ot the 'Tonsil.

10. Cleft Palate. 11. Post-nasal Growths. 12. 'The method of controlling hemorrhage of the Oral

Cavity. 13. The technique of Oral Operations.

The Demonstrations at the Melbourne Hospital will consist of Clinical Instruction at the bedside on Oral Cases, and the attendance of the class at all operations in the Theatre connected with this subject.

DENTAL SURGERY AND PATHOLOGY (4th Year)— This Couise includes reflex affections due to the tee th

neuralgia and diseases of the nervous system, affections of the lympbathic glands, diseases of the buccal membrane and gums, affections ot the tongue, morbid growths, odontomes, diseases of the antrum, necrosis of the maxillae, fractures of the jaws and their treatment. Orthodontics (correction ot irregularities) treatment by every approved mechanical appliance, illustrated by diagrams, models and lantern slides bearing specially on etiology. Orthodontics—Etiology; general considerations in treat

ment ; mechanical appliances and the changes in the tissues with possible complications and sequelae considered—Dr. Angle's Method. Dr. Case's Method—Superior Protrusion—Inferior Protrusion—Open Bite—Surgical Treatment.

The Teeth—Considered as to variations iu size, number and structure ; Relations of teeth to hair and nails; Syphilitic teeth ; Rachitic teeth ; Hypoplastic teeth; Supernumerary teeth; Gemination ; Nodules.

Caries—Pathology, causes of immunity and susceptibility. Concussion—Dislocation—Fracture—Their causes, symp

toms and treatment. Erosion, Attrition and Abrasion — Their destructive

features and treatment. Bleaching the Teeth—

..is


.Periodontitis—Local and General; acute and chronic; symptoms and treatment. Abscess, Gouty Periodontitis.' Necrosis of Teeth, 'Tumours, Anchylosis.

Pyorrhoea Alveolaris—Its cause, prevention, and treatment Diseases of the Gums—Hypertrophy ; Inflammation;

Gingivitis ; Stomatitis; Purpura; Perforating Ulcers; Gum Tumours.

.S'oliva—Its characteristics; composition; variations in disease ; Its bactericidal qualities ; Salivary Calculus stain.

Odontomes—Of the enamel organ—ot the papilla—of the follicle—of the entire tooth germ.

Odontalgia—Local and referred. Neuralgia—Its causes—symptoms and treatment. Replantation, Transplantation and Implantation of Ihe

Teeth— Dr. Younger's Method.

Books recommended:—

Tomes, J. F . Colyer, Black (last editions).

PRACTICAL BACTERIOLOGY (with special reference to Dentistry)—

A. General Bacteriology—

1. Apparatus—Use and Sterilisation. 3. Nutrient Media—Preparation, Neutralisation, Steril

isation, Standardisation. 3. Bacteriological Methods—Demonstration, Isolation,

Identification of Specific Micro-organisms, Pure Cultures, Staining Methods, Spores, etc.

4. Pathogenic Hacleria—A study of the principal Microorganisms affecting human beings, with special reference to Pyogenic cocci, Diphtheria, 'Tubercle, Pneumonia, Typhoid, Colon, Anthrax.

5. Examination of Air and Water. 6. Methods of Sterilisation and Disinfection— Instru

ments, etc. Action of H"at. Light and Disinfectants

DENTISTRY. 597

B. Special Bacteriology—

1. Micro-organisms ill healthy and diseased mouths. Conditions influencing presence and multiplication.

Special Mouth Bacteria (Special Media)—Demonstration and Isolation.

'2. Dental Caries—Aetiology—Action of Micro-organisms, Acid production, Decalcification and Liquefaction with Experiments, Preparation and Staining of microscopic sections.

3. Bacteriology of Inflammatory and Suppurative Conditions ot tbe Mouth.

PRACTICAL REQUIREMENTS

in the Australian College of Dentistry and Melbourne Dental Hospital.

jftntmuni Requirements for Second Year Students.

OPERATIVE TECHNIQUE REQUIREMENTS.

Each student must attend thirty (30) demonstrations on Operative 'Technique and make and complete —

1. In Teeth set in Dummy Head. (a) Six root fillings (3) in molars. (b) 5 amalgam ( 2 prox-occlusal in molars.

< 2 „ „ „ bicuspids. ( 1 in another tooth.

(c) 3 cement * 1 contour in molar. it 2 „ in incisors.

(d) 3 tin ( 2 in incisors. ( 1 in molar.

2 . In Teeth set in Plaster Blocks. (a) Six root fillings (3) in molars. (b) 4amalgam ( 2 prox-occlusal in molars.

), 2 „ „ „ bicuspids. (c) 3 cement 1 contour molar.

} 1 „ incisor. ( 1 in another tooth.

(a) 3 tin ( 1 in incisor. }. 2 in molars.


All teeth must be filled with regard to correct occlusion. All work must be signed up by the Demonstrator lit each

stage and on completion.

Minimum Keouiremeuts for Third Year Students.

(a) Students must attend the extracting surgery ou the days allotted to them, for the purpose of extracting, and administering anaesthetics.

20 administrations of nitrous oxide. SO administrations of General Anaesthetics (other than

Nitrous Oxide) for dental purposes, und 50 administrations ot Local Anaesthetics.

100 amalgam and plastic fillings, 50 of which must have been inserted in teeth iu which the pulps were exposed or were putrescent, and requiring root treatment.

15 gold fillings. 20 scaling cases.

(6) The student must construct and complete to the satisfaction of the Honorary Dental Surgeons and Superintendent of the Dental Hospital:—

3 mechanically constructed regulation cases, one of which, in duplicate, must remain on the model, and models of each case at commencement and ou completion to be retained for examination purposes.

10 inlays in teeth out ot the mouth. 2 porcelain crowns (1 anterior and 1 bicuspid tooth)

on roots out ot the mouth. Baked porcelain crowns and bridges are to be done in tbe bridge and crown class.

He must also complete and adjust to a patient's mouth 2 dentures on vulcanite base, e.g., 1 full upper and lower denture and 1 full upper or 1 full lower denture—giving preference to plaster impressions and mounting gum block teeth— constructed wholly. by himself in the Hospital under the supervision of the Instructor in Dental Mechanics.

All work must be signed up by the Honorary Dental Surgeons or Demonstrator at each stage and on completion.

DENTISTRY. 599

Minimum Requirements for Fourth Tear Students.

(a) Students must attend the extracting surgery on the days allotted to them, for the purpose of extracting, and administering anaesthetics.

20 administrations of nitrous oxide. 30 administrations of General Anaesthetics (other than

Nitrous Oxide) for dental purposes, and 60 administrations of Local Anaesthetics.

40 gold fillings, one half of which must have been inserted in the proximal cavities of the six anterior teeth, either upper or lower; and in addition five must be approximo occlusal fillings, and five of which must be non-cohesive.

76 amalgam aud plastic fillings, 40 of which must have been inserted in teeth in which the pulps were exposed or were putrescent and requiring root treatment.

20 scaling cases.

(6) 'The student must construct and complete to the satisfaction of the Honorary Dental Surgeons and the Superintendent of the Dental Hospital:—

3 mechanically constructed regulation cases, one of which, in duplicate, must remain on the model, and models of each case at commencement and on completion to be retained for examination purposes.

5 inlays. 8 crowns, including at least 1 all metal, 1 Richmond,

and 2 all porcelain (1 anterior and 1 bicuspid tooth).

1 case ot bridge work, with a minimum of three teeth. 1 denture in metal plate.

Each and all of the above to be adjusted to a patient's mouth, and to be constructed wholly by himself in the Hospital under the supervision of the Demonstrator in Crown and Bridge Work and the Instructor in Dental Mechanics respectively.

All work must be signed up by the Honorary Dental Surgeons or Demonstrators at each stage and on completion.


(c) Minimum requirements of the Fourth Year Course of practical laboratory work in Dental Mechanics:—

1 partial upper denture in metal plate; 1 partial lower denture in metal plate and vulcanite base in combination; 1 deuture of not less than 6 front single gum teeth-soldered to a metal plate with turned or beaded soldered edge. Also 1 full upper and lower denture with gum block teeth mounted on vulcanite base, from plaster impressions taken by the student, completed and adjusted to a patient's mouth, constructed wholly by himself in the Hospital under the supervision of the Instructor in Dental Mechanics.

Continuous gum work as required.

The student must also in both the Second and Third Terms complete to tbe satisfaction ot the Demonstrators in Graduation Filliugs:—

1 gold filling, 2 amalgam, 1 cement, 2 root treatment. Gold filling to be an approximo-occlusal cavity

in either bicuspids or molars, or an approx-imal cavity, including restoration of incisal angle in incisor teeth, or approzimal cavity in cuspid teeth.

Amalgam fillings—Compound cavities. Cement filling—Compound cavity. Root treatment—In either gold, amalgam, or

cement cases.

The Fourth Year class work will be taken into account by tbe Examiners in Practical Dental Mechanics.

All work in each year is subject to inspection by the Examiners.

DENTAL MECHANICS.

ADDITIONAL PRACTICAL REQUIREMENTS IN LABOHATOKT

FOR STUDENTS INDKNTUKED TO THE COLLEGE.

During the First Year Each student shall at least make

(a) Dies, 3 each of 20 different models, including partial uppers and lowers, full uppers and lowers, moulded in sand, and cast same in zinc,

DENTISTRY. 601

or other metal as the Demonstrator may direct, and two counter dies in lead or other metal for each model. Upon any student satisfying tbe Demonstrator as to his proficiency in making dies and counters he may proceed to swage such plates as the Demonstrator may direct.

(A) 4 dentures on vulcanite base during each month, and adjust them to the mouth under the supervision of the Demonstrator.

Examination a t end of session in casting models in plaster, and trimming same, and in mounting bites on articulators.

Certificates for each of tbe above sections to be signed by the Demonstrator in Dental Mechanics and countersigned by a Clinical Instructor or the Superintendent.

No work shall be allowed to go out of the College or Hospital until the same has been approved and passed by the-Demonstrator or Superintendent.

Any student failing to complete these requirements may forfeit the right to sit for the annual examinations.

During the Second Year

Each student shall at least make (a) Dentures ou vulcanite base for 50 patients, fitted

to the mouth under the supervision ot the Demonstrator.

(b) Four dentures on metal plates, including the fitting of bauds or clasps, strengtheners and soldering the same, casting dies and counterdies.

(c) Two cast metal plates, one of which shall be for an edentulous upper, with vacuum chamber, and attachments for vulcanite.

Examination a t end of session in the " Taking Impressions of the Month in Composition, Plaster, etc.," and in the "Taking ot Bites or Articulations," and adjusting the same on models.

Certificates, Approval, and Penalty as in first year.

During the Third Year

Each student shall at least make

(502 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1915.

(a) Dentures on Vulcanite base for 10 patients, fitted to the mouth under the supervision of the Demonstrator. Preference should be given to full sets, including Porcelain Gum Blocks, for edentulous cases.

(/>) Four dentures on metal plates, including the fitting, mounting and soldering of bands, clasps and teeth, cases finished complete.

(c) Tivo cast metal plates, one ol which shall be cast direct on to porcelain teeth.

'Class for Bridge Work and Crowns, out of the mouth, for one afternoon from 2 to 5 o'clock each week during the session.

Certificates, Approval and Penalty, same as in first year.

During the Fourth Year

Each student shall a t least make Dentures on Vulcanite base for four patients, fitted to

the mouth under the supervision of the Demonstrator. All should be full sets for edentulous cases.

Certificates, Approval, and Penalty, same as in first year.

DENTISTRY. 603

DETAILS OP SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS POR THE EXAMINATIONS POR THE DEGREE OP DOCTOR OF DENTAL SCIENCE, TO BE H E L D IN MARCH, 1916.

1. SURGICAL PATHOLOOT, Practical and Theoretical.

A knowledge of tbe Pathology of the following conditions will be required: —

Inflammation and Immunity, Septicaemia, Pyaemia. Syphilis. Tubercle, 'Tumors, Cysts, Disease ot Bone and Joints, Diseases of Mouth Nose Ear and accessory sinuses. Diseases of Pharynx Larynx Trachea and Lungs, Diseases of Hear t and Blood Vessels, Kidneys.

Text Books:— Green—Pathology and Morbid Anatomy. Adami—Inflammation. Bowlby—Surgical Pathology.

The examination will include examinations of macroscopic and microscopic specimens.

2. BACTERIOLOGY, Practical and Theoretical. Bacteriological Technique. Apparatus. Nature and

properties of Bacteria. Staining Methods. Fermentation, Putrefaction and Disease. Bacteriology and Diagnosis of Infectious Diseases. Methods ot infection and prevention. Germ Carriers. Antigens and anti-bodies, and the more important serum re-actions in the diagnosis of infectious diseases. Agglutinins and the Widal re-action. Precipitins. Complement, Immune body, Haemolysis and Bacteriolysis. Complement deviation and the Wasserman reaction. Toxins and anti-toxins and their standardisation. Vaccines and Vaccination. Manufacture and standardisation of vaccines. Dental Bacteriology, with special reference to dental caries and pyorrhoea alveolaris. Disinfection. Various Methods of. Antiseptics and disinfectants. Resistance of micro-organisms to heat and disinfectants.


Text Books: Mycology of the Mouth—K. Goadby, M.R.C.S.,

L.D.S. Manual of Bacteriology — Muir and Ritchie, 5th

Edition. University Laboratory Hand-book, Practical

Bacteriology—B. J . Bull. 3. OPERATIVE DENTAL SDBOEST.

All Surgical Operations met with in daily practice. Text Book:—

Operative Dentistry, edited by C. N. Johnson, 2nd Edition.

4. DENTAL MECHANICS. Preparation of the mouth for all prosthetic treat

ment. Impressions of the mouth. Principles and practice of the construction of metal dentures, including plaster models, dies, counter-dies, moulding, etc., taking the occlusion, selecting and fitting teeth and methods ot attachment to plates. Tube teeth and their methods of attachment in plate work and crown and.bridge work. Cast metal dentures. Continuous gum dentures. The vegetable bases, etc. Crown work, bridge work. Palatal mechanism with manufacture of artificial vela and obturators. Interdental splints. Construction ot appliances for the treatment of irregularities. Manufacture of Porcelain teeth.

Text Book;— The American Text Book of Prosthetic Dentistry,

edited by Chas. J . Essig, M.D., D.D.S. (last edition).

5. DENTAL SUBOEBY, PATHOLOOT AND BACTERIOLOOT.

Study of development of the maxilla and mandible with special reference to the etiology of malformations and orthodontics.

Mouth breathing—its local and general effects. Defective formation of tbe teeth. Injuries of the teeth. Caries, clinical and pathological conditions, theories of susceptibility and immunity. Erosion, attrition and abrasion. Diseases of the pulp. Diseases of the perio-

DENTISTRY. 605

dontal membrane. Alveolar abscess. Root infection and treatment. Saliva, composition, physical and bactericidal properties, variations of, pathological conditions, relation to caries, etc. Salivary Calculi. Diseases ot the gums. Odontomes. Odontalgea and Neural-

f ia. After effects of extraction, haemorrhage ifficulties, complication. Oral sepsis and

diseases arising therefrom. Prophylaxis. Suppuration in Antrum, diagnosis, etc. Fractures,, and dislocations' ot the jaw. Necrosis of the jaw. Cysts, tumours ot the jaws. Diagnosis of swellings about the jaws. Interference with closure of the jaw. Anaesthesia, local and general, complications, etc. Principles of general pathology as applied to dental pathology. The remote and direct relations of dental to general disease. Pathology of nutrition, atrophy, degeneration, hypertrophy, with special reference to such dental diseases as dentition, pyorrhoea alveolaris, pulpi t is , gingivitis, etc. Disturbances of vascular system and infective inflammations, with special reference to alveolar abscess and disease affecting the periodontal mebrane, etc.

Dental Bacteriology, special reference to pathogenic-micro-organisms in such dental and oral diseases as caries, pyorrhoea alveolaris, oral sepsis, etc., etc., vaccines and serum therapy.

Text books:—

Dental ûrgery and Pathology, by J. F . Colyer (last edition).

American Text Book of Operative Dentistry, by-Edward C. Kirk.

6. DENTAL MATERIA MEDICA AND THERAPEUTICS.

Drugs, their action and uses in Dentistry. Other therapeutic procedures and measures used in Dentistry. Dental Anaesthetics—local and general.

Text book :— Dental Materia Medica and Therapeutics. by-

Hermann Prinz. The examinations shall be partly written; partly prac

tical, partly oral.

<)06 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1916.

PRIZES AND SCHOLARSHIPS. %

SHAKESPEARE SCHOLARSHIP. (Not open till 1916).

BOWEN PRIZE.

SUBJECT FOR 1915.

The Cabinet System in Australia in the Twentieth Century.

PROFESSOR MORRIS PRIZE, SUBJECT FOK 1915.

Gray's Literary Criticism.

Essays for the above Priises must be sent to the Regist ra r on or before 1st March, 1915.

THE WYSELASKIE SCHOLARSHIPS.

1. MATHEMATICS—

(1) The higher parts ot Dynamics. (2) Hydrodynamics. (3) Conduction of Heat. (4) Mathematical theory of Electricity and Mag

netism.

•i. NATURAL SCIENCE—

(1) Geology, Palaeontology and Mineralogy. (2) Chemistry, with Laboratory work. (3) Biology, with Laboratory work.

The Examination in the foregoing groups will cover the ground of the following University Courses:—

(1) Geology, Parts I., II . , and III . , with Laboratory and Field work.

(2) Chemistry, Parts I., II . , and III. , with Laboratory work.

(3) Biology, Parts I., I I . , aud III . , with Laboratory work.

SCHOLARSHIPS, ETC. 6 0 7

The Examination for the next Wyselaskie Scholarship. in Natural Science will be in Group (3) of the subjects above set out ; the next following, in Group (1 ) ; and the next following, in Group (2); and so on, in rotation, at subsequent Examinations.

3. ENGLISH CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY—

The University Course in History ot the British. Empire Part I., in History of the British. Empire Part II., and in Constitutional History and Law Part I., as prescribed for final honours.

4. POLITICAL ECONOMY—

(1) The University Course iu Political Economy. (2) Tbe Practical Applications of Political Economy.. (8) The History of Commercial Legislation in Great

Britain. (4) The History of Industry. (5) The History of Industrial Legislation in Great

Britain and Australasia. (6) The Commercial and Industrial position of and

in Australasia.

6. MODERN LANGUAGES—

(1) An English Essay. (2) Translation from English into French aud-

German. (3) Passages for translation from any French or-

German authors. (4) Advanced questions on the Etymology and

Grammar of French aud German. (5) Viva voce Examination.

6. CLASSICAL AND COHPAKATIVE PHILOLOGY AND LOGIC —

(1) Passages tor translation from any Greek or Latin authors.

(2) Passages of English for translation into Greek and Latin'prose and verse.

(!*) (Questions ou the Phonology, Morphology and. Grammar ot Greek and Latin in particular.

"608 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1915.

(4) General questions on the outlines of Greek and Roman history, antiquities, and geography.

(6) The University Course in Formal Logic. (6) The methods of Scientific Investigation and

Criteria of Proof.

THE W. T. MOLLISON SCHOLARSHIPS.

1. FRENCH—

Dictation, Reading and Conversation. A thorough knowledge of phonetics and French

Grammar.

Advanced Composition and unseen Translation.

Essay. A general knowledge of French History (Lavisse's

Histoire de France is recommended).

A thorough knowledge of the following periods of French Literature:

(a) XVIIth. Century (classical period). (h) XlXth. Century (especially the Rom

antic Period).

.2. ITALIAN —

(1) Dictation, Reading and Conversation. (2) Composition and Essay Writing in Italian. (3) Translation from English into Italian and vice

versa. (4) Italian Grammar. (5) History of Italian Literature.

Recouimended:— Garnett—Italian Literature.

(6) History of Italy, from 1815 to the present day. Recommended:—

Orsi—L'Italia Moderna.

-3. JAPANESE—

(1) The elements of Grammar'as contained iu the first part of Chamberlain's Handbook of Colloquial Japanese.

SCHOLARSHIPS, ETC. 609

(2) Translation of simple English sentences on the ordinary events of daily lite into Colloquial Japanese (Roman Characters). »

(3) Literal translation of any portion of the practical part of Chamberlain's Handbook of Colloquial Japanese contained in sections 445-457 (inclusive).

(4) 'Translation of simple sentences in Colloqui8^ Japanese in Roman Characters not contained in Chamberlain's Handbook.

(5) An oral test of fluency in speaking Japanese confined to simple sentences on matters of daily life.

THE H B. HIGGINS SCHOLARSHIP.

1915. Group A. (1) 'The books of Greek and Latin Poetry set for

First Year in 1912, for Second Year in 1913 and for Third Year in 1914.

(2) Special books of English Poetry. Milton—Paradise Lost, Books i. to iv. Wordsworth—Prelude, Books i. to iv. Keats—Eve of St. Agnes.

1916. Group B. The books of French and German Poetry set for

Pass and Honours for First Year in 1913, for Second Year in 1914, and for Third Year in 1915. The books of English Poetry set for Pass for Part 1., 1914, and Part II . , 1915 (excluding Shakespeare's Plays, but not excluding Shakespeare's Sonnets).

THE COBDEN CLUB MEDAL.

The Examination shall lie open to all Students who are eligible to compete for the Wyselaskie Scholarship in Political Economy.

The Examination shall be the Examination for the Wyselaskie Scholarship in Political Economy.

If the Scholarship be awarded, the Medal shall be given to the Candidate who is placed second in order of merit j

610 DETAILS OR SUBJECTS, 1915.

but if the Scholarship be not awarded, the Medal shall be given to the Candidate who is placed first in order of merit.

cProvided tha t if in any year there be no Examination for the Wyselaskie Scholarship in Political Economy, the Cobden Club Medal shall be awarded to tbe Candidate who obtains the highest marks in Political Economy at the Final Honour Examination in the School of History.

By order of the Professorial Board,

ORME MASSON,

18th May, 1914. President.

TERM EXAMINATIONS. 611

ANNOUNCEMENTS.

TERM EXAMINATIONS, 1915.

In accordance with the provisions of Regulation I I I . Division I., Section 4, Term Examinations in substitution for the December Annual Examinations will be held in 1915 in the following subjects ;—

(1) All subjects for Degrees in Engineering and for the Diplomas of Mining and Metallurgy with the exception of Pure and Mixed Mathe-

. matics, Natural Philosophy, Chemistry, Geology, and the subjects of the Final Years of Engineering courses.

(2) Applied Mechanics of the Second Year of the course for the Diploma < >f A rchitecture.

EVENING LECTURES, 1915.

I t is proposed to hold Evening Lectures at the University in 1915, in the following subjects :—

Natural Philosophy, Part I., German, Par t I. with Laboratory Work. British History, Part I.

Pure Mathematics, Part I. Ancient History. Psychology, Logicand Ethics. History of Philosophy. Latin, Par t I. Advanced Logic. Greek, Part I. English, Part II . English, Par t I. Architecture. Education. Surveying. French, Par t I. The Courses on Mental Philosophy, English Part II . ,

Education, will consist of three lectures a week each. The course on Architecture will consist of two lectures a week These lectures will be held between 4 and 7 p.m.

The course on Natural Philosophy will consist of two lectures a week with two and a half hours Laboratory work. All other courses will consist of two lectures a week. These will be given after 7 p.m.

Evening lectures will only cover the work necessary for Pass.

The fees will be the same as for ordinary lectures.

612 ANNOUNCEMENTS FOR 1915.

CONCESSIONS TO STUDENTS ENGAGED IN WORK

DURING THE DAY.

Attention is called to the Regulation under which persons who show that they are engaged in the full and regular work ot a calling or profession may, with the permission of the Faculty of Arts previously obtained, enter for and pass the subjects ot each year of the Arts and Education courses two at a time. Applications for permission must be made before the end of the First Term, and must state the subjects which it is proposed to take, and must be accompanied by a full statement of the work

. in which the student is engaged and the hours during which he is occupied; the statement should be signed by employer or head of public department.

Similar concessions under similar conditions are allowed in the Science, Engineering, and Law Courses.

Entry for evening lectures must be made on special forms, obtainable a t the Registrar's Office, on or before Saturday, 6th March, 1915. Fees must be paid into the University account a t the Bank ot Victoria not later than Saturday, 6th March: they may be paid by the term or by the year.

Lectures begin on Monday, 22nd March. No lectures will be given in any subject unless the

number of entries is satisfactory. Students desiring Evening Lectures in any other

subjects are requested to communicate with the Kegistrar.

MASSAGE STUDENTS.

Lectures and Demonstrations in Anatomy and Physiology specially adapted for Massage Students are provided as follows:—

First Year—Junior Anatomy, Physiology. Second Year—Senior Anatomy.

The Pees are as follows:— First Year — Lectures: Junior Anatomy - i

Dissections: Practical Anatomy Lectures: Physiology -Examination (each subject) -

Second Year—Lectures: Senior Anatomy -Dissections: Practical Anatomy Examination

» i 4 2 8 4 2

8 4 4 2 8 4 2

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PRIZES—PUBLIC EXAMINATIONS. 6 1 3

PUBLIC EXAMINATIONS.

NOTE.—Whenever a prize to be awarded in books is won, the list of books selected by the candidates must be submitted for the approval of the President ot the Professorial Board.

E X H I B I T I O N S A N D P R I Z E S .

The following Exhibitions and Prizes will be open for competition at the Examinations to be held in December, 1915:

JUNIOR PUBLIC EXAMINATION.

The " Prix Corneille," consisting of £4 in French books treating only of tbe work of Corneille, presented through the French Consul, to be awarded to the candidate whose parents are not of French origin, who obtains the highest marks in all branches of French.

S E N I O R P U B L I C E X A M I N A T I O N .

Candidates must be under 19 years of age.

1. Sixteen Exhibitions of .£20 each, in the following subjects—

English; History; Greek; Latin ; French; German; Algebra; Geometry and Trigonometry; Elementary Mechanics; Physics; Chemistry; Anatomy and Physiology; Botany; Geography and Geology; Music; Drawing.

One-half of the amount of the Exhibition is retained until the Exhibitioner has completed a year at the University.

2. The University French Club's Prize of £2 2s. for French, confined to candidates neither of whose parents is French, will be awarded to the candidate obtaining the highest marks in the French Essay and over 75 per cent, of mar is in the rest of the examination.

. 3 9 A

6 1 4 ANNOUNCEMENTS FOR 1915.

Candidates must have passed either the Junior or the Senior Public Examination, and candidates who have already received the prize or who have matriculated are excluded from competition.

8. The " P r i x Corneille," consisting of M in French books treating only of the work ot Corneille, or of others a t the choice of the candidate, presented through the French Consul, to be awarded to the candidate whose parents are not of French origin, who obtains tbe highest marks in all branches of French at the Senior Public Honour Exam-ination.

JUNIOR COMMERCIAL EXAMINATION. Candidates must be under 17 years ot age.

1. The Chamber of Commerce Exhibition of .£20 to b e ' awarded to the candidate who.having passed the Examination, obtains tbe highest aggregate of marks a t one Examination in the following four subjects, provided that he obtains distinction in any three of them: English, Arithmetic, Bookkeeping, Precis and Commercial Correspondence, and a Modern Language. Two pounds of the total amount of the Exhibition must be spent on books to be bound and stamped with the seals of the University and of the Melbourne Chamber of Commerce.

2. The Chamber of Commerce Prize of ,£8 8s. (of which £ 2 must be spent on books) to be awarded under similar conditions to the second highest candidate in the above subjects.

3. The Deutscher Schulverein von Victoria's Prize of wU3 3s. in books for German.

SENIOR COMMERCIAL EXAMINATION.

1. The Chamber of Commerce Gold Medal, to be awarded to the candidate who obtains the highest aggregate of marks in the Honour papers at one Examination, provided that a t least four subjects are taken, including two ot those numbered 1, 2, 0, 6, 7; no paper to count unless Honour standard has been obtained.

2. The Netherlands Chamber of Commerce tor Australasia's Prize of £2 2s. in books for Dutch.

3. The Italian Consul's Prize of .81 Is. in books for Italian.. 4. A prize of £2 2s. in books for Book-keeping, Precis and

Commercial Correspondence.

List of Scholarships and Exhibitions on Special Foundations, for Competition.

- Annual - First Term, 1916

Showing Date a t which next open Argus (.£60) - - Civil Engineering Baird Bursary (JE22 p.a.) Medical Course -Beaney (£10) -

U100) -Dixson (i860) -

(J660) -(£20) -(£20) -(juao) -

1. 2. 3. 4.

Dixson (F.

1. Surgery -2. Pathology - . . .

Chemistry, Par t I I I . -Natural Philosophy, Far t I II . Pure Mathematics, Far t II- -Mixed „ „ „ -Mech. Engineering, Part II . ,

Design and Drawing -Hon.) (,£80) I. Chemistry -

(.680) 2. Natural Philsophy (.£60) 3. Mathematics (£40) 4. Electrical Engineering (.£40) 5. Mechanical Engineering

Obstetrics and Gynaecology -

Irregular • Annual

with

- Biennial

- Annual

Pulton (.£40) -Harbison-Hi ginbotham

(.£100) H. B. Higgins (JE30)

Economic Research The Study of Poetry

„ 1915 ., 1015

Fourth Term, 1915 ,. 1915

ffl a o f >

t t i t

t t »t

I t I t

First Term,

ff ' » t t

ft i i

ft t t

i t •»

1916 1915

1915 1916 1915 1915 1916 1915 1915

s > tn ©

B

> £ > »*1

S a:

March 1st. July,

1915 1916

en

Scholarsh ips and Exhibi t ions on Special Foundations—(continued.)

Caroline Kay (.£100 p.a.) 1. Geology Biennial - First Term, 1916 (j6100p.a.)2. Veterinary Anatomy - - - „ „ 1915

Kemot (P. Hon.) (.£70) 1. Chemistry ,. - First Term, 1915 (.£70) 2. Natural Philosophy - - - „ - „ „ 1916

(Research) (.£35)3. Geology Annual - „ „ 1915 George Lansell (.£40) - Mining Engineering -, - - .. - First Term, 1915 Jessie Leggatt (.£34 p.a.) Law Biennial - Fourth Term, 1915 John Madden (.£20) - Law Annual - Fourth Term, 1915 McBain (Research) (.£40) Biology Biennial - Fourth Term, 1916 Mollison (.£68 p.a.) - 1. French Triennial - First Term, 1916

(.£68 p.a.) - 2. Italian - - - - - - „ - „ .. 1917 (.£58 p.a.) - 3. Hindustani ,. - „ 1916

Ormond (JE20) - - 1. Music, Entrance Diploma (3) - Annual - February, 1915 (JB20) - - 2. Music, Entrance Mus. Bac. (3) - „ - Fourth Term, 1915 (.£20) - - 3. Music, First Year Mas. Bac. (3) - „ - Fourth Term, 1915 (.£20) - - 4 . Music, Second Year Mus. Bac. (1) „ - Fourth Term, 1916

Payne (£Vi) - - 4th year B.V.Sc. Course - Fourth Term, 1915 Shakespeare (.£46 10/- p.a.) Triennial - Fourth Term, 191C Stawell (Research) (,£40) Engineering . . . . Annual - First Term. 1916 Stewart (JB100 p.a.) - 1. Anatomy Triennial - „ „ 1915

00

a a ©

> 50

>

© "8 B X > s > © a;

Scholarships

Stewart (£50 p.a.) -(.£60 p.a.) -

Wrixon (J622) -Wyselaskie (.£50 p.a.)

(.£50 p.a.) (jB60p.a.) (.£50 p.a.) (.£50 p.a.) (£50 p.a.)

Bowen (£3 10/-) Cobden Club Medal -

James Cuming (£34) -Dublin (£9)

Dwight (£60) -

! and Exhibi t ions on Special Foundat ions—

2. Medicine Triennial 3. Surgery - „

Agriculture . . . . Annual 1. Mathematics . . . . Irregulai 2. Natural Science - - - - „ 3. English Constitutional History - „ 4. Political Economy - - - „ 5. Modem Languages 6. Classical and Comparative Philo

logy and Logic . . . i t

Prizes.

English Essay - Annual Political Economy - - - .,

Agricultural Chemistry - - ., Original Contribution to Literature

or Science or Art - - - „ 1. History (Final Honours) - - „

(continued).

1-t t It

- Fourth Term • - First Term,

,, ,, ,, „

„ „ „ »

-

- March 1st, - First Term,

1916 1916

,1916 1916 1915 1917 1916 1916

1915

1915 1915

- Fourth Term, 1915

- January 31st - First Term,

, 1915 1915

OS

n X

r > X

X "0

1

> *3 93 OS

o "3

X

> 2 > O

Oi

-<

Dwight (£30)

(£25) - - 3. (£25) - - 4. (£25) - - 5.

Grimwade (£34) Maude Harrington (30/-) Jamieson (£4) • Laurie (£7) -Professor Morris (£8)-Alexander Sutherland (£4) David Syme (£100) -Professor Wilson (£4 15/-) Wrigh t (£20) - - 1.

(£10) - - 2.

Prizes—(continued).

British History II . and Const. History I. (Second Year) - Annual

Education Natural Philosophy, Par t I. -Chemistry, Par t I. - - -Chemical Research . . . Accompanying on Pianoforte Clinical Medicine Logic and Philosophy -Literary Criticism . . . Biennial English Language and Literature Annual Scientific Research . . . „ Mathematics & Natural Philosophy „ Mechanical Engineering Part I. - „ Instrumental Music - - „

- Fourth Term, 1915

- Fourth Term, 1915 - Fourth Term, 1915

„ 1915 • March 1st, 1915 - Fourth Term. 1915 - First Term, 1915 - First Term, 1915 - March 1st, 1916 - Fourth Term, 1915 - March 1st, 1915 - Fourth Term, 1915 - Fourth Term, 1915 - Fourth Term, 1915

n a o tr >

o *i

a x > s 2 > © Z

COMMISSIONS IN THK BRITISH ARMY. 6 1 9

MILITARY CADETSHIPS.

The Secretary of State for War has consented to a temporary renewal- of the system-by which a yearly- nomination to the Royal Military College was formerly allowed to each of the chartered Universities in colonies not having a Military College through which Commissions in the Army may be obtained. ..

The Regulations may be seen a t the Registrar's Office. Tbe upper limit of age for candidates is now 20 years.

Applications must be received on or before tbe 1st February in each year.

COMMISSIONS IN THE BRITISH ARMY.

The nomination for appointment to a Commission in the British Army formerly placed at^the disposal of the Conncil is for the present suspended.

Candidates applying otherwise for such Commissions and desiring to be exempted from the Army qualifying examination are required to have passed a t the Junior or Senior Public Examination in the following subjects:—

(1) (2) (3) (4) (B) (6)

English. English History. Geography. Arithmetic. Algebra. Geometry.

and in two of the following subjects:—

(7) (8) (9)

Physics or Chemistry French or German. Latin or Greek.

COMMISSIONS IN THE ROYAL ARMY MEDICAL CORPS.

The Army Council has approved of the nomination for Commissions in the Royal Army Medical Corps of two candidates annually from the Medical Schools of Australia; one

6 2 0 ANNOUNCEMENTS FOR 1915.

candidate to be nominated in each half-year. The Regulations may be seen at the Registrar's Office.

Applications for nomination must be received not later than March 1st, and September 1st in each year.

SURGEONS TO THE NA\'Y.

ROYAL NAVT.

The Admiralty is willing to accept annually from Australia two candidates specially recommended by the governing bodies of selected Australian Universities, for commissions as Surgeons in the Royal Navy.

Candidates must be between 21 and 28 years of age and must pass a qualifying examination in London.

ROTAL AUSTRALIAN- NAVT.

The Commonwealth Naval Board will invite the Universities ot Sydney, Melbourne, and Adelaide, from time to-time as positions become vacant to nominate candidates for appointment as Surgeons in the Royal Australian Navy.

Candidates should be not more than 28 years of age and must be graduates in Medicine and Surgery with a t least one year's experience in a recognised General Hospital.

ORIENT FREE PASSAGES.

Three first class return passages are granted annually by the Orient Line of Royal Mail Steamers to graduates of the University nominated by the Council. Applications should be lodged before the end of February, and should deal with the following points:—(1) the course done in Melbourne, (2) the course of study proposed in Europe, (3) the applicant's means.

The passages are available daring the months from June to November.

INTERCHANGE OF TEACHERS.

The P. and O. and Orient Companies will allow reductions of 10°/0 on return fares, and 15 /„ on single fares, between England and Australia to University teachers who are temporarily exchanging posts a t the request of their Universities.

RHODES SCHOLARSHIP. 621

BRITISH SCHOOL AT ROME.

This school was founded in 1901 and enlarged in 1912. I t s object is to promote and facilitate Roman and Italian Studies its resources being directed chiefly to tbe study of Archaeology, Architecture, Painting and Sculpture. The School is largely supported by the Royal Commissioners of the 1851 Exhibition who provide a number of scholarships a t the school. The Royal Institute of British Architects also provides certain scholarships in Architecture. The school charges no fee to its students. The cost ot suitable residence in Rome is about £ 6 or £7 per month.

RHODES SCHOLARSHIP.

KuOOLATIONS FOK THK ELECTION OK RHOUKS SCHOLARS

yea VICTORIA, 1915.

1. Candidates must be British subjects or sons of British subjects, unmarried, and not less than 19 or more than 25 years of age on the 1st of October in the year for which they are elected.

2. Candidates must have been resident for at least seven years in the Commonwealth of Australia ot i ts dependencies, in New Zealand, or in Fiji, and for the three years immediately preceding the election must have been resident in Victoria.

3. Candidates, other than those referred to in Section 4, must have passed in the subjects ot " Besponsions " in the Melbourne University Matriculation or Junior Public Examination, or in some other examination deemed equivalent by the Committee of Selection. (The subjects of "Bespons ions" are Greek, Latin, Arithmetic and either Algebra (Elementary), or Euclid, Books I . . I I . , and III-.)

4. Candidates who have completed two full years of any course in a University recognised for the purpose by the University of Oxford, and have passed in all subjects of those two years, may be admitted to the status of Junior Colonial Student in the University of Oxford, and are not required to have passed in the snbjects of

6 2 2 ANNOUNCEMENTS FOB 1915.

Besponsions, though they will have to pass in Greek before proceeding to a degree in the University of Oxford.

5. In the selection of a scholar regard will be paid to the following qualifications of candidates: —

(a) Literary and scholastic attainments. (b) Fondness for and success in manly outdoor

sports. (c) Qualities ot manhood, truth, etc. (d) Exhibition during schooldays or subsequently of

moral force of character, and of instincts to lead and- take an interest in his schoolmates, etc.

6. Each candidate must furnish to the Chairman of the Committee of Selection: —

(a) A certificate that he is within the eligible limits of age.

(b) Evidence that he has passed in the following subjects at the. Melbourne University Matriculation or Junior Public Examination or a t some other Examination deemed equivalent by the Committee of Selection viz.:—Greek, Latin, Arithmetic and either Algebra or Geometry. (This will not be required from candidates who are excused from Responsions under Section 4.)

(c) A certificate from the Head of his School or College, or other person competent to judge, stating that the candidate is, in his opinion, able to pass the Responsions Examination at Oxford. (This will not be required in the case of candidates who are excused from Responsions under Section 4.)

7. Each candidate must furnish certificates dealing with the various qualifications set forth in Section 5. The Committee will give due weight to certificates from Heads of Colleges and Schools and from other persons and bodies competent to judge in regard to all or any of these qualifications.

8. Should it seem advisable, the Committee of Selection will apply to the candidates or any selected number of them such further intellectual tests as i t may deem necessary. No candidate will be finally elected without a personal interview.

BARRISTERS AND SOLICITORS. 6 2 3

9. The elected scholar will be fumisked by the Chairman of the Committee of Selection with a memorandum prepared by tbe Representative of the Trustees a t Oxford of the steps necessary to be taken to have his name enrolled a t one ot the Colleges of the University.

Candidates must send in applications accompanied by the required certificates and statements not later than 30th November, 1915.

All communications in regard to the Rhodes Scholarship must be addressed to the President ot the Professorial Board, University of Melbourne, and must be endorsed with the words "Rhodes Scholarship."

For the information of candidates, attention is drawn to the fact tha t the Scholarship, which is of the value of £300 per annum for three years, will be paid in quarterly instalments, the first on beginning residence a t Oxford, and thereafter terminally on the certificate of his College tha t his work and conduct have been satisfactory. Without such certificate the Scholarship lapses.

ADMISSION OP BARRISTERS AND SOLICITORS.

The admission of barristers and solicitors in Victoria is governed by the Rules of the Council ot Legal Education, and is controlled by the Board of Examiners appointed by the Supreme Court. In the case of persons not already admitted to practise in some other State of the Commonwealth or in the United Kingdom, the main qualification is either (1) graduation as a Bachelor of Laws in the University of Melbourne, followed by one year's service under articles; or (2) the following course:— '

(a) The candidate must before presenting himself for any of the examinations mentioned in (b) , have passed an examination or examinations which would entitle him, according to the Statutes and Regulations of the University of Melbourne, to enter for the examination for the first year of the course for the degree ot Bachelor ot Laws.

(b) He must pass a t the University of Melbourne, in the manner prescribed herein in the following; subjects:—

€ 2 4 ANNOUNCEMENTS FOK 1915.

(1) Law of Property in Land and Conveyancing. (2) Law of Contract and Personal Property. The examination in these subjects must be

passed before beginning the service under articles provided for in (c).

(3) Constitutional History and Law Par t II. (4) Private International Law. (6) Administrative Law. (6) Equity. (7) Law ot Wrongs (Civil and Criminal). (8) Law ot Procedure and Evidence. (9) Constitutional History and Law Part I I I .

(Constitution of the Commonwealth ot Australia).

The subjects marked 3-9 or any of them may be passed before, during, or after the service ot articles, but no student may present himself for examination in Equity, unless he has passed in the Law ot Property in Land and Conveyancing at an examination held not less than six months before the examination at which he presents himself in Equity.

A student (unless he requires one subject only to complete his course) is not entitled to credit for any subject passed at any examination unless he has passed thereat in two snbjects a t least ; and

A Supplementary Examination a t the University • is deemed to be not a part of tbe preceding

Examination. But where a student has passed in two subjects in December, he may pass in March in any single subject in which he has failed in December.

(c) He must serve for four years as a pupil under articles to a person practising as a barrister or solicitor, or as a barrister and solicitor.

For further information the student is referred to the x-ules, and to the Secretary of the Board of Examiners, -Supreme Court, Melbourne.

8UPHBMK COURT PR1ZK8. 6 2 5

SUPREME COURT PRIZES.

1. A prize of Twenty-five pounds open for competition to students a t the University of Melbourne not pursuing the course for any degree in law, to be awarded to the candidate who shall be recommended by the Examiners and placed first a t the Honour Examination in November in the subjects of the Law of Property in Land Conveyancing and the Law of Contracts and Personal Property and who has a t that November Examination passed for the first time in each of those subjects.

2. A prize of Fifty pounds open for competition to past students a t the University who have not pursued the course for any Degree in Law to be awarded to tbe Candidate who shall be recommended by the Examiners and placed first in the subjects for the I'inal Honour Examination for the degree of Bachelor of Laws and who has within eighteen months of that examination completed tne passing of all the subjects as prescribed and set out in Rule Five of the Rules of the Conncil ot Legal Education.

Any person winning this prize in one year shall not be eligible to compete therefor in a subsequent year.

3. A prize of £25 in the first year and £100 in the second year to be given to the student to whom the Scholarship is awarded at the Final Honour Examination for the Degree of Bachelor of Laws in the University of Melbourne.

Library Digitised Collections

Author/s:University of Melbourne

Title:University of Melbourne Calendar 1915

Date:1915

Persistent Link:http://hdl.handle.net/11343/23466

Terms and Conditions:Terms and Conditions: Copyright in works deposited in the University of MelbourneCalendar Collection is retained by the copyright owner. The work may not be alteredwithout permission from the copyright owner. Readers may only, download, print, andsave electronic copies of whole works for their own personal non-commercial use. Anyuse that exceeds these limits requires permission from the copyright owner. Attributionis essential when quoting or paraphrasing from these works.;To request permission toadapt, modify or use the works outside of the limits of these terms and conditions, pleasecomplete the permission request form at: http://www.unimelb.edu.au/copyright/information/fastfind/externalrequest.html;For further information about these conditions or requestingpermission, please contact the Copyright Office at: http://www.unimelb.edu.au/copyright/contact.html

http://hdl.handle.net/11343/23466

Documents

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS - University of Melbourne